2023 BMW I7 17

Content A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
BMW i7.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A5EAB0 - VI/22 OwnersManuals2.com

OwnersManuals2.com
WELCOME TO BMW i.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW i.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will
have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest the following:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW i. Also
use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important
notes on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical
features available in your BMW i. The manual also contains information
designed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contrib-
ute to maintaining the value of your BMW i.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the
most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as a Re-
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle
will contain the latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the
onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade

– the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
NOTES
Information ........................................................................................................... 6
Safety of the high-voltage system .................................................................. 16
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in ............................................................................................................. 18
Set-up and use ................................................................................................... 22
On the road ......................................................................................................... 25
CONTROLS
Dashboard .......................................................................................................... 32
Sensors of the vehicle ....................................................................................... 36
Operating condition of the vehicle ................................................................... 41
BMW iDrive ......................................................................................................... 45
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ................................................................... 63
Personal settings ............................................................................................... 67
Opening and closing ......................................................................................... 74
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ................................................................ 106
Transporting children safely ........................................................................... 123
Driving ................................................................................................................ 129
Displays ............................................................................................................. 149
Lights ................................................................................................................... 171
Safety ................................................................................................................ 180
Driving stability control systems .................................................................... 214
Driver assistance systems ............................................................................. 218
Parking ............................................................................................................... 241
Driving comfort ................................................................................................ 268
Climate control .................................................................................................. 271
4
Interior equipment .......................................................................................... 284
Storage compartments .................................................................................. 294
Cargo area ....................................................................................................... 298
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ............................................................... 302
Increasing range ............................................................................................. 306
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ........................................................................................ 312
Wheels and tires .............................................................................................. 324
Under the hood ................................................................................................ 352
Operating materials ........................................................................................ 355
Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 357
Replacing components .................................................................................. 359
Breakdown Assistance .................................................................................. 362
Vehicle Care ..................................................................................................... 369
REFERENCE
Technical data ................................................................................................. 376
Appendix ........................................................................................................... 378
Everything from A to Z ................................................................................... 382
© 2022 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID8 VI/22, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Media at a glance
Orientation General information
The fastest way to find information on a partic- The contents of the Owner's Manual are avail-
ular topic is by using the index. able in various media formats. The following
For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend Owner's Manual media formats are available:
reading the quick reference guide in the own- ▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
er’s manual. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Validity of the Owner's Manual Printed Owner's Manual

The printed Owner's Manual shows all stand-
Production of the vehicle
ard, country-specific and optional equipment
At the time of production at the plant, the that is currently available, or may become
printed Owner's Manual is the most current available in the future, for specific models.
resource. Due to updates after the editorial
deadline, differences may exist between the Integrated Owner's Manual in the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
vehicle
Notes on updates can be found in the appen- Principle
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual shows all
standard, country-specific and optional equip-
ment that is currently available, or may be-
After a software update in the vehicle
come available in the future, for specific mod-
After a vehicle software update, such as via els. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated displayed on the Control Display.
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information. Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. "MENU"
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
2. "All apps"
Entertainment, Communication
3. "Owner's Manual"
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication can be obtained as 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
a printed book from the service center. contents.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Scrolling through the Owner's Manual
Swipe up or down until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
6
Information NOTES
Context help app can be displayed on smartphones and

tablets.
General information
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac- BMW Driver’s Guide Web
cessed from any menu. Depending on the The BMW Driver's Guide Web shows all stand-
selected function, either the associated de- ard, country-specific and optional equipment
scription or the main menu of the Integrated that is currently available, or may become
Owner's Manual will be displayed. available in the future, for specific models. The
BMW Driver’s Guide Web can be displayed in
Selecting context help from a menu any current browser.
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "General help"
Icons and displays
Selecting context help from a Check Control
message Icons in the Owner's Manual
Directly from the Check Control message on
the control display: Icon Meaning
"Owner's Manual" Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
Supplementary Owner's Manuals to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Man-
uals, which are included in addition to the on- Measures that can be taken to help
board literature. protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select

Additional sources of individual functions.
information ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the

voice activation system.
Service center ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice

An authorized service center will be glad to activation system.
answer questions at any time.
Action steps
Internet Action steps to be carried out are presented as
Vehicle information and general information on a numbered list. These steps must be carried
BMW, such as on technology, are available on out in the order shown.
the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
1. First action step.
BMW Driver’s Guide app 2. Second action step.
The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all stand-

ard, country-specific and optional equipment
Bulletpoint lists
that is currently available, or may become Items or actions without strict order or alterna-
available in the future, for specific models. The tive options are shown as a bulletpoint list.
7
NOTES Information
▷ First possibility. is currently available in the vehicle and if or

▷ Second possibility. when the function can be installed in the vehi-
cle can be obtained from an authorized service
center or other qualified service center.
Icons on vehicle parts
A claim for the availability of equipment, a sys-
This symbol on a vehicle component
tem or a function in the vehicle cannot be de-
indicates that further information on the
rived based on the description in the Owner's
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob-
served.
For any equipment and models not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple-
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the
features and options applicable to your vehicle.
These icons found on parts of the vehicle indi-
cate that incorrect use of high-voltage technol-
ogy or of orange-colored high-voltage compo-
nents poses a risk of life-threatening injury by
Status of the Owner's
electric shock. Manual
Basic information
Vehicle features and options The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development to ensure that
This Owner's Manual shows all models and our vehicles continue to embody the highest
all standard, country-specific and optional quality and safety standards. In rare cases,
equipment that is currently available, or may therefore, the features described in this Own-
become available in the future, for specific er's Manual may deviate from those in your
models. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also vehicle.
describes and illustrates equipment, systems
and functions that are not available in a vehi- Validity of the Owner's Manual
cle, for example due to the following situations:
▷ Selected optional equipment Production of the vehicle
▷ National-market version or national-market At the time of production at the plant, the
equipment printed Owner's Manual is the most current
▷ Options for later release and software up- resource. Due to updates after the editorial
date deadline, differences may exist between the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
This also applies to safety-related functions
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
and systems.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
Before starting a journey, verify whether the
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
described equipment or function is available in
cle.
the vehicle. Information on whether a function
8
Information NOTES
After a software update in the vehicle facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance
After a vehicle software update, such as via and repair, according to BMW specifications
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated with properly trained personnel, referred to
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified
latest information. service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub-
For Your Own Safety sequent damage and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
Intended use paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of com-
ponents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
result in a safety hazard.
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove Parts and accessories
stickers. BMW recommends the use of parts and acces-
▷ Technical vehicle data. sory products approved by BMW.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where Approved parts and accessories and advice on
the vehicle is driven. their use and installation are available from a
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu- BMW center.
ments. BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
Warranty vehicles.
Your vehicle is technically configured for the BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces-
operating conditions and registration require- sories.
ments applicable in the country of first delivery, BMW does not evaluate whether each individ-
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is ual product from another manufacturer can be
to be operated in a different country it might used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten- safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
tially differing operating conditions and regis- approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
tration requirements. Noncompliance with ho- whether these products are suitable for BMW
mologation requirements in a certain country vehicles under all usage conditions.
may affect warranty coverage. Please consult
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for California Proposition 65 Warning
further information on warranty matters.
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
Maintenance and repairs
warning:
Advanced technology, for instance the use of
modern materials and high-performance elec-
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and re- Warning
pair work. Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends tomobile components and parts, including
that you entrust corresponding procedures to components found in the interior furnishings
a BMW center. If you choose to use another in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known
service facility, BMW recommends use of a to the State of California to cause cancer
9
NOTES Information
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles ▷ California Emission Control System Limited
and certain products of component wear con- Warranty.
tain or emit chemicals known to the State
Detailed information about these warranties
of California to cause cancer and birth de-
is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
fects or other reproductive harm. Battery
Booklet.
posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
contain other chemicals known to the State designed to meet the particular operating con-
of California to cause cancer. Wash your ditions and homologation requirements in your
hands after handling. Used engine oil con- country and continental region in order to de-
tains chemicals that have caused cancer in liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
laboratory animals. Always protect your skin operated under those conditions. If you wish to
by washing thoroughly with soap and water. operate your vehicle in another country or re-
For more information go to www.P65Warn- gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
ings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. cle to meet different prevailing operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war-
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
Warning
or region. In such case, please contact Cus-
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- tomer Relations for further information.
senger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including en- Maintenance
gine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
and lead, which are known to the State of
road safety, operational reliability and the New
California to cause cancer and birth defects
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
or other reproductive harm. To minimize ex-
posure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle Specifications for maintenance measures:
the engine except as necessary, service your ▷ BMW maintenance system.
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
Maintenance, refer to page 357.
gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information ▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- accessible via a QR code in the New Vehi-
vehicle. cle Limited Warranty Booklet.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
Service and warranty If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
We recommend that you read this publication maintained, this could result in serious dam-
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol- age to the vehicle.
lowing warranties: A failure to maintain your vehicle or improper
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. maintenance may affect your warranty cover-
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. age. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Booklet for further information on
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War-
warranty matters.
ranty.
10
Information NOTES
Refer to section on engine oil change re- The processed data is only processed in the
garding recommended service intervals for oil vehicle itself and is generally volatile. The data
changes. is not stored beyond the operating period.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and
vehicle keys, contain components for storing
Data memory technical information. Information about the
vehicle condition, component usage, mainte-
General information nance recommendations, events or faults can
be stored temporarily or permanently.
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Electronic control units process data This information generally documents the
they receive from vehicle sensors, self-gener- state of a component, a module, a system, or
ate or exchange with each other. Some con- the surrounding area, for instance:
trol units are necessary for the vehicle to func- ▷ Operating states of system components,
tion safely or provide assistance during driving, such as fill levels, tire pressure, battery sta-
for instance driver assistance systems. Fur- tus.
thermore, control units facilitate comfort or in- ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys-
fotainment functions. tem components, for instance lights and
Information about stored or exchanged data brakes.
can be requested from the manufacturer of the ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving
vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example. situations such as airbag deployment or
engagement of the driving stability control
Personal reference systems.
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
identification number. Depending on the coun-
The data is required to perform the control unit
try, the vehicle owner can be identified with the
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect
vehicle identification number, license plate and
and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle
corresponding authorities. In addition, there
manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
are other options to track data collected in the
vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, such as The majority of this data is stored temporarily
via the ConnectedDrive account that is used. and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
In some circumstances the vehicle may store
some data for an additional but limited period
Operating data in the vehicle
of time.
Control units process data to operate the vehi-
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
cle.
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
For example, this includes: assurance measures, this technical informa-
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its tion can be read out from the vehicle together
individual components, e.g., wheel RPM, with the vehicle identification number.
wheel speed, deceleration, lateral accelera- An authorized service center or another quali-
tion, engaged seat belt indicator. fied service center or repair shop can read
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain out the information. The diagnostic socket re-
sensor signals. quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
data.
11
NOTES Information
The data is collected, processed, and used line services. The transmission depends on the
by the relevant organizations in the service selected settings for the use of the services.
network. The data documents technical condi-
tions of the vehicle, which can be used to de- Incorporation of mobile devices
termine vehicle maintenance status, and facili- Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
tate quality improvement. devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
be reset when an authorized service center or control elements.
another qualified service center or repair shop The sound and picture from the mobile devi-
performs repair or servicing work. ces can be played back and displayed through
the multimedia system. Certain information is
Data entry and data transfer into transferred to the mobile devices at the same
the vehicle time. Depending on the type of incorporation,
this includes, for instance, position data and
General information other general vehicle information. This opti-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort mizes the way in which selected apps, for in-
and individual settings can be stored in the stance navigation or music playback, work.
vehicle and modified or reset at any time. There is no further interaction between the
For example, this includes: mobile device and the vehicle, such as active
access to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions. How the data will be processed further is de-
termined by the provider of the particular app
▷ Chassis and climate control settings. being used. The extent of the possible settings
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en- depends on the respective app and the operat-
tertainment and communication system of the ing system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the Services
respective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or General information
photos for playback in an integrated multi- If the vehicle has a wireless network connec-
media system. tion, it will enable data to be exchanged be-
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction tween the vehicle and other systems. The
with an integrated hands-free system or an wireless network connection is realized via an
integrated navigation system. in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the ve-
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
hicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. network connection enables 'online functions'
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or to be used. These include online services and
is found on a device that has been connected apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or by other providers.
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. Services from the vehicle manufacturer
This data is only transmitted to third parties Where online services from the vehicle man-
upon personal request as part of the use of on- ufacturer are concerned, the corresponding
12
Information NOTES
functions are described in the appropriate ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or operating.
manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
information pertaining to data protection may seat belts were fastened.
also be found on the manufacturer’s website.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
Personal data may be used to perform online
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT systems of the ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. This data can help provide a better un-
Any collection, processing, and use of personal derstanding of the circumstances in which
data above and beyond that needed to pro- crashes and injuries occur.
vide the services must always be based on a EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
legal permission, contractual arrangement or nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re-
consent. It is also possible to activate or deac- corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tivate the data connection as a whole. This ex- tions and no personal data, for instance name,
cludes functions and services required by law gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
such as Assist systems. However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
Services from other providers type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
When using online services from other provid- quired during a crash investigation.
ers, these services are the responsibility of the To read data recorded by an EDR, special
relevant provider and subject to their data pri- equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve-
manufacturer has no influence on the content hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
exchanged during this process. Information on enforcement, that have the special equipment,
the way in which personal data is collected and can read the information if they have access to
used in relation to services from third parties, the vehicle or the EDR.
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can
be obtained from the relevant service provider.
Vehicle identification
Event Data Recorder (EDR) number
This vehicle is equipped with an event data General information
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
Depending on the national-market equipment,
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
the vehicle identification number is located in
like situations, such as an air bag deployment
different positions in the vehicle. This chapter
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will as-
describes all possible positions for the series.
sist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
13
NOTES Information
Under the hood Windshield
The engraved vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number can also be
can be found under the hood on the right-hand found behind the windshield.
side of the vehicle.
iDrive
Right nameplate It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi-
cation number via iDrive.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle ID (VIN):"
The vehicle identification number can be found Reporting safety defects

on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of
the vehicle.
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
Left nameplate and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying BMW
of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West-
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
The vehicle identification number can be found open an investigation, and if it finds that a
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
vehicle. may order a recall and remedy campaign.
14
Information NOTES
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De-
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
15
NOTES Safety of the high-voltage system
Safety of the high-voltage system

Vehicle features and options ▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a
rainstorm when the window was kept open.
This chapter describes model-specific equip- ▷ The vehicle is in water up to the allowed
ment, systems and functions that are available height.
now and will be available in the future, even if General driving instructions, driving through
they are not available in the owned vehicle. water, refer to page 302.
Additional information: ▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Monitoring of the high-

Working on the vehicle voltage battery
General information Principle
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends The temperature in the high-voltage battery is
that no changes be made to the vehicle, for monitored.
instance installation of retrofitting accessories,
Any unusually high temperature in the high-
that will have an effect on the vehicle’s high-
voltage battery is indicated.
voltage system.
Safety information Safety information
Warning
Warning
An unusually high temperature of the high-
Improperly performed work, in particular
voltage battery can cause a formation of gas
maintenance and repair on the high-voltage
and smoke. There is a risk of injury or dan-
system, can lead to electric shock. There is a
ger to life. In case of noticeable unusual odor
risk of injury, fire and danger to life.
or smoke formation, refer to the notes for ac-
Have work on the vehicle, in particular main- tions in the event of a message.
tenance and repair, performed by an author-
ized BMW i service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. High temperature message
While driving
Contact with water A Check Control message is displayed.
The high-voltage system is typically safe even During and shortly after charging
in the following example situations: Depending on the national-market version: the
vehicle sounds the horn and, if applicable, the
vehicle lighting is blinking.
16
Safety of the high-voltage system NOTES
Actions in the event of a message
While driving
1. Stop immediately.
2. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
3. Exit the vehicle.
4. Establish and keep a sufficient distance to
the vehicle.
5. Alert emergency personnel.
During and shortly after charging

1. If necessary, exit the vehicle.
2. Establish and keep a sufficient distance to
the vehicle.
3. Alert emergency personnel.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the high-voltage system
is switched off automatically to prevent risk of
danger to occupants and other road users.
Additional information:
What to do after an accident, refer to page 365.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
Vehicle key
Locking with the vehicle key
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking

system
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Overview
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Remote Engine Start.
Stationary climate control.
Display the charging screen.
Open the cargo area. The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Lock.
Panic mode, pathway lighting.
Unlock.
Access to vehicle interior
Unlocking with the vehicle key Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key. Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv-

er's door or all vehicle access points are un-
locked.
18
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Unlocking the vehicle Closing the cargo area

Press the button.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Press the button on the inside of the cargo
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi- area.
cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Displays, control elements
Access to the cargo area
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
Opening the cargo area
1 Light switch element

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but- 2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
ton on the outer side of the cargo area.
3 Instrument cluster
▷ Press and hold the button on the
4 Wipers
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors
may be unlocked. Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Driver's door BMW iDrive
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
1 Opening the door Call up the main menu.
2 Safety switch
3 Power windows
Go to Media menu.
4 Exterior mirrors
5 Seats, comfort features
6 Seat setting Go to Phone menu.
7 Central locking system
8 Opening/closing the trunk
Go to Navigation menu.
Switch console
Go to previous display range.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions.
1 Start/Stop button
2 Controller Activating the voice control system
3 My Modes
4 Assistance systems 1. Press the button on the steering
5 Parking brake, Automatic Hold wheel.
6 Selector lever 2. Say the command.
20
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Canceling voice control
▷ Press the button on the steering

wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Icon Meaning
wheel Select left mirror, Automatic Curb

Monitor.
Adjusting seats
Select right mirror.
Adjusting the steering wheel
1 Backrest tilt/head restraint

2 Height/longitudinal direction
3 Seat tilt
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back

Adjusting the exterior mirrors position and height of the steering wheel to the
seat position.
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷ Seat position.
Icon Meaning
▷ Exterior mirror position.
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Depending on the equipment: height of the
Head-up display.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Overview Entertainment
Depending on the country and equipment ver-
sion, the following buttons are installed in the
center console.
Button Function
Turning the thumbwheel: ad-

justs the volume.
Pressing the thumbwheel:
turns sound output on/off.
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors. Change the entertainment
source.
Storing settings
Press once: changes the sta-
1. Set the desired position. tion/track.
Press and hold: fast for-
2. Press the button. The LED lights up. ward/rewind the track.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.
Using the mobile phone
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2. General information
After the mobile phone is connected once to
Infotainment the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated
using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.
Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.
Navigation destination input
1. "NAV" Connecting via Bluetooth®
2. "Destination input" 1. "MENU"
3. To enter a new destination or start guid- 2. "All apps"
ance, tap on the search box or select entry 3. "Mobile devices"
from the search history.
4. "Connect new device"
4. Enter at least two characters.
Mobile phones in range are displayed on
If necessary, start search for point of inter- the control display.
est categories from the points of interest
5. Select the desired mobile phone.
menu.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
If necessary, accept the suggested search
the control display with the control number
keywords.
in the display of the mobile phone, and con-
5. A list of the results is displayed. firm that they match.
6. Select the desired entry. 7. If necessary, select the connection mode:
23
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
"Use Bluetooth"
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
Accepting a call
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls
can be answered in several ways.
▷ Via iDrive:
"Accept"
▷
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
to select from the list in the instrument clus-
ter: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1. "TEL"
2. "More"
3. "Dial number"
4. Enter the numbers.
5. Select the icon. The connection is es-
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
24
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
Driving Drive-ready state in detail
Functional requirements
Drive-ready state
Driving is possible when the following prereq-
uisites are met:
General information
▷ The state of high-voltage battery charge is
Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of
sufficient.
a running engine in conventional vehicles.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
Turning on the drive-ready state ▷ Charging cable is detached.
Driving
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position D, B or R.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Engaging selector lever position R, N,
A signal tone sounds. Drive-ready state is D, B
switched on.
Display in the instrument cluster

The READY display indicates
that the vehicle is ready for driv-
ing.
Turning off drive-ready state

▷ Reverse R.
After stopping the vehicle:
▷ Neutral N.
1. Apply brake and engage the parking brake. ▷ Gear position D.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ B gear position with high energy recovery.
The READY indicator goes out and a signal To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
tone sounds. you select a gear position or reverse, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
25
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
In selector lever position B, the vehicle will de-

celerate more than in selector lever position D
Light and view
when rolling to a stop.
Turn signal, high beams, headlight
Engaging selector lever position P
flasher
Turn signal
Press the button.

The transmission lock is engaged and ▷ Blinking: press the lever past the resistance
the parking brake is engaged. point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
Parking brake lever up or down.
▷ Brief blinking: press the lever to the resist-
Setting the parking brake ance point and hold it there for as long as
you want the turn signal to blink.
Press the button.
The LED on the button and the indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster are High beams, headlight flasher
illuminated.
The parking brake is engaged and transmis-
sion lock is engaged.
Releasing the parking brake

Press button with selector lever posi-
tion P and activated drive-ready state.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released. Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
Parking The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
Make sure the parking brake is engaged.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
26
Lights and lighting Window wiper system
Buttons in the vehicle Turning on window wiper system
Icon Function
Exterior lighting menu.
Automatic headlight control.

Low beams.
Lights off.
Lights off. Press the lever up until the desired position is

reached.
▷ Resting position of wipers, position 0.
Functions via iDrive ▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
Icon Function ▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Turning off the window wiper system
and flick wipe
Low beams.
Parking lights.
Lights off.
Left roadside parking light.

Press the lever down or forward.
▷ Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1,
Right roadside parking light. until it reaches the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
27
Activating/deactivating rain sensor Climate control

Climate control functions
Functions via climate control menu
Icon Function
Automatic program.
Enable: press lever up once from the 0 posi-

tion, arrow 1. Temperature.
Disable: press lever back into the 0 position.

Air conditioning.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-

trol.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Fresh air.
Cleaning the windshield

Air flow.
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat and panel heating.

Pull the lever.
28
Icon Function Icon Function
Seat cooling. Switching on/off
Steering wheel heating Automatic program.
Temperature.
The functions can also be operated via voice,
such as Temperature.
Air flow.
Buttons, automatic climate control
Air distribution.
Seat and panel heating.
Seat cooling.
Icon Function
Defrost function.
Intermediate stop
Rear window defroster. Charging the vehicle

Depending on national-market version, use a
mode 2 charging cable, fast charging cable
(mode 3), or the permanently installed cable
Rear automatic climate control of a charging station to charge the vehicle.
The charging cable can be stowed in the cargo
area, for instance under the cargo floor panel
or in a bag.
Before disconnecting and connecting a charg-
ing cable, clean the area between the charging
connector socket and charging socket and the
charging cable plug as necessary, for instance
remove snow.
If necessary, unlock the charging cable before
removing.
The charging status is indicated on the indica-
tor light on the charging socket.
29
Keep the charging socket cover closed when

the charging socket is not used.
Providing assistance
Wheels and tires Hazard warning system
Tire pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
After correcting the tire pressure

If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
cally. Make sure that the correct tire settings Hazard warning system button
have been made. With tires that cannot be
found in the tire pressure values on the control
display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
BMW Roadside Assistance
the flat tire monitor. In many non-ConnectedDrive countries, BMW
Roadside Assistance can be reached by phone
Checking the tire pressure around the clock. You can obtain support there
in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed: In ConnectedDrive countries, proceed as fol-
lows:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip. 1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Cleaning the wheels 3. "BMW Assistance"
The friction during hard braking may produce 4. Select the desired service.
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
A voice connection to the selected service is
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW
established.
recommends using vehicle care and cleaning
agents from BMW.
ConnectedDrive
BMW Assistance
Contact BMW Assistance for information and
support for all aspects of your vehicle.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. Select the desired service.
30
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv-
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Your service center.
31
CONTROLS Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle features and options now and will be available in the future, even if
they are not available in the owned vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Additional information:
ment, systems and functions that are available Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Doors and windows menu 48 Memory function 120
2 Safety switch 103 Seat settings menu 48
3 Power windows 99 7 Seat setting 106

8 Buttons for central locking system 93
Unlocking
4 Exterior mirror adjustment button 118
5 Opening and closing cargo area
85 Locking
6 Seating comfort features
32
Dashboard CONTROLS
9 Door and light Audio, see Owner's Manual for

Opening and closing the door au- Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
tomatically 82 munication 6
Voice control, BMW Intelligent
Exterior lighting menu 48 Personal Assistant 53
Automatic High Beam Assistant
175 Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Driving lights automatic 171
Communication 6
Low beams 172
Selection of configuration menus
Adaptive lighting functions 174 for instrument cluster and Head-
Lights off 172 up display 149
Using selection lists 160
Accessing and resetting trip data
10 Pitman arm, left
164
Turn signal 144
Resetting the g-meter values
166
High beams, headlight flasher 15 Pitman arm, right
144
Wipers 145
11 Steering wheel buttons, left

Turn speed control systems on/off Rain sensor 146
220
Select speed control system 220 Cleaning the windshield 147
Store speed 220 16 Horn, entire surface
Set speed 220

17 Adjusting the steering wheel 120
12 Sport Boost function 138

18 Unlocking the hood, behind the
13 Instrument cluster 149 footwell trim 353
14 Steering wheel buttons, right
Settings, instrument cluster 149 19 Opening the door 93
Settings, Head-up display 151

Volume, see Owner's Manual for 20 Door emergency unlocking 93
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
33
CONTROLS Dashboard
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 49 Adjusting the volume

2 Hazard warning system 362
Station/title forward
Defrost function 277
Station/title back
Rear window defroster 278
6 My Modes 139
Glove compartment 294
7 Parking assistance systems 241

3 Ventilation 280
4 Controller with buttons 50
Vehicle settings menu 48
5 Operating elements for entertainment sys-
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6 Two-axle ride level control 268
34
Dashboard CONTROLS
8 Automatic Hold 143 9 Selector lever 132

10 Turning drive readiness on/off
131
Parking brake 141
In the vicinity of the headliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 364 5 Glass sunroof 103

6 Interior lights 177
2 Camera
Gesture control 58. 7 Indicator light, front passenger
Interior camera 290 airbag 182
3 BMW Theater Screen, see Own- 8 Interior lighting menu 48

er’s Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, Communication 6
4 Reading lights 177
35
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
Sensors of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Front camera
ment, systems and functions that are available
now and will be available in the future, even if
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi- The front camera is located in the radiator
cle: grille.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Camera behind the windshield. Camera behind the windshield
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
36
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Top view cameras ▷ When the camera field of view is covered,

for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ With open doors or open cargo area.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷ When it is dark outside.
▷ The camera has overheated due to exces-
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
off.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi-
Rearview camera ately after vehicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
The rearview camera is located in the emblem Warning

on the rear end. The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
Functional requirement of the is a risk of accident. Watch the surrounding
cameras traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear. steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
▷ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 369.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 371.
System limits of the cameras

The function of the cameras can be limited or
may indicate something wrong, for instance in
the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
37
Front radar sensor Functional requirement of the radar

sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
System limits of the radar sensors

The front radar sensor is located in the radiator The function of the radar sensors can be lim-
grille. ited or not available, for instance in the follow-
ing situations:
▷ In case of dirty sensors.
Radar sensors, side, front
▷ In case of iced-up sensors.
▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,
films or a number plate baseplate.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
The radar sensors are located to the side in hills, vehicles or trailers.
the front bumper. ▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Radar sensors, side, rear ▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
The radar sensors are located on the side in

the rear bumper.
38
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors, front
The ultrasonic sensors for the automatic doors

are located near the door handles and below
the door opening in the sill.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis- Functional requirement of the

tance systems are located in the front bumper. ultrasonic sensors
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
Ultrasonic sensors, rear and clear.
System limits of the ultrasonic

sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper. ▷ If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
Ultrasonic sensors, side
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷ For objects covered with fabric.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis- ▷ In case of external interference with the
tance systems are located on the side in the ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
front and rear bumpers.
39
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic

sources.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷ For handlebars, pedals, or other bicycle or
motorcycle attachments.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ For objects with a fine surface or objects
such as wire mesh fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ For protruding objects, e.g., a jacket.
▷ For horizontal objects without support
structure on ground, e.g., chains.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
40
Operating condition of the vehicle CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
This chapter describes model-specific equip- turn the front wheels in the direction of
ment, systems and functions that are available the curb.
now and will be available in the future, even if ▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
they are not available in the owned vehicle. also secure the vehicle, for instance with
Additional information: a wheel chock.
Warning
General information Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
one of the three states: following actions:
▷ Idle state. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Standby state. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Drive-ready state. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Idle state ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Principle leave children or animals unattended in the
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
off. exiting and lock the vehicle.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
Establishing the sleep mode
from the outside and after exiting and locking. automatically
The sleep mode is established automatically,
Safety information such as in the following situations:
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
Warning
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
low.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle ▷ Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
against rolling away. one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
41
CONTROLS Operating condition of the vehicle
In some situations, the idle state is not set au- Manually setting to standby
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low beams are switched on. General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
Establishing idle state when hicle is automatically set to idle state.
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established Via thumbwheel
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
Press thumbwheel in the center
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
console. The control display and
1. "MENU" the instrument cluster illuminate.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock" Via start/stop button
5. "Turn off after opening door"
Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and the instru-
Establishing the sleep mode ment cluster illuminate.
manually
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
Press and hold the thumbwheel
in the center console until the OFF is displayed in the instru-
OFF indicator in the instrument ment cluster. The drivetrain is
cluster goes out. switched off and standby state
switched on.
Standby state
Drive-ready state
Principle
When standby state is switched on, most func- General information
tions can be used while the vehicle is station- Drive-ready state is turned on or
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted. off with the Start/Stop button.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside. Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of
To preserve the vehicle battery, use standby a running engine in conventional vehicles.
and the activated power consumers only as Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to
long as absolutely necessary. switching the engine off.
42
Operating condition of the vehicle CONTROLS
If the drive-ready state is turned on, the vehicle ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
ready to drive and READY is displayed in the ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
instrument cluster.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. dows.
To preserve the vehicle battery, switch off drive ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
readiness and any unnecessary power con-
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
sumers when parked.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Safety information leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians
and other road users might pay less attention NOTICE
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style
gaged when standby state is switched off.
to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
closely and actively intervene where appro-
of damage to property. Do not switch off
priate.
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and Turning on the drive-ready state
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. 1. Close the driver's door.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle 2. Depress the brake pedal.
against rolling away.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied
▷ Set the parking brake. length of time.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, READY is displayed in the instrument clus-
turn the front wheels in the direction of ter and a signal tone sounds.
the curb.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
When the drive-ready state
is switched on, READY is dis-
Warning played in the instrument cluster.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
43
CONTROLS Operating condition of the vehicle

1. While the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake and apply the parking brake.
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
tone sounds.
The drive-ready state is switched off automat-
ically if the driver's seat belt is not buckled
when the driver's door is opened.
44
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Warning

Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
Additional information: ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
Display and operating vices while the vehicle is stationary.
concept
Main menu
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper- General information
ating concept and includes a wide range of The main menu is divided into different areas.
functions.
Overview
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷ Via the Control Display.
▷ Via the Controller.
▷ Via the touchpad.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Via BMW Touch Command.
▷ Via the gesture control. 1 Menu bar
▷ Via the operating elements on the steering 2 Widgets
wheel.
3 Status information
Instrument cluster, refer to page 149.
4 Climate bar, climate 271
Menu bar
Menu
"MENU": Access to apps and vehicle func-
tions. A filter can be selected. The last selected
45
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
filter is stored. If necessary, change the filter to Status information

see the apps you want.
▷ "All apps": All apps and functions are dis- General information
played. The status field can be found in the upper
▷ "Infotainment apps": Only infotainment area of the Control Display. Status information
apps are displayed. is displayed in the form of icons. Depending
on the equipment and national-market version,
▷ "Vehicle apps": Only vehicle adjustment
different icons are available.
functions are displayed.
Telephone status information

Media
"MEDIA": Access to entertainment system Icon Meaning
functions, e.g., radio stations, or connection
with external devices. Active call.
Signal strength.
Telephone
"TEL": Access to telephone and message SIM card missing.
function as well as connection and manage-
ment of mobile devices such as smartphones. Entertainment status information
Navigation Icon Meaning

"NAV": Access to navigation system, desti- USB audio.
nation entry, and traffic bulletins. Configurable
map views and other functions, such as points Bluetooth audio.
of interest.
Smartphone audio.
Apple CarPlay© Connected Music.
"Apple CarPlay": Depending on national- Time shift.
market version with related function: access
to Apple CarPlay. Apple CarPlay enables the Wi-Fi.
secure use of certain functions of a compatible
Apple CarPlay.
Apple iPhone via iDrive.
Android Auto.
Android Auto©
Satellite radio is switched on.
"Android Auto": Depending on national-
market version with related function: access
to Android Auto. Android Auto enables the se- Status information for notifications
cure use of certain functions of a compatible
Android smartphone via iDrive. Icon Meaning
Number of notifications.
Widgets
Check Control message.
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as the navigation map. Suppress private information.
The widgets also serve as buttons and allow
jumping to the relevant menu. Do not disturb.
46
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Additional information: Entry comparison

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain- When entering data from a database such as
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6. contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed
down for each character entered, with charac-
Other status information ters being added as necessary.
Icon Meaning Activating/deactivating the functions

Sound output active. Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Selecting the menu item enables or disables
Sound output deactivated. the function.
Activation word active. Icon Meaning
BMW ID or driver profile. Function is activated.
Destination guidance active. Function is deactivated.
Quick link.
Enabling/disabling audible feedback
Wireless charging active.
1. "MENU"
Park Distance Control: sound active.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Park Distance Control: sound deacti- 3. "System settings"
vated.
4. "Sound"
5. Select the desired setting.
Input and display
Quick access
Letters and numbers
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,
Letters and numbers can be entered using the certain settings, and app recommendations.
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment. Input Operation
Icon Function Show Swipe from top to bottom on the

quick link. control display.
Change between capital and
Slide the controller up.
lower-case letters.
Hide quick Swipe from the bottom up on
Enter a blank space.
link. the control display.
Switching between languages. Slide the controller down.
Use voice control.
Confirm entry. Activating/deactivating pop-ups

For some functions, pop-ups are displayed au-
Shift the input area to the left tomatically on the Control Display. Some of
or right. these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
47
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
3. "System settings" Overview

4. "Pop-ups"
Shortcuts
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries. Button Function
Storing a function Vehicle settings menu.

1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function. Exterior lighting menu.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile. Interior lighting menu.
Executing a function
Seat settings menu.
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Tap the desired shortcut. Doors and windows menu.
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Deleting shortcuts BMW Curved Display

display. Principle
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut. The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen
3. "Delete shortcut" display in the vehicle that is curved towards
the driver. The BMW Curved Display comprises
the instrument cluster on the driver’s side and
Direct access the Control Display on the center console.
General information
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
access menus for the respective function di-
rectly on the control display. Then continue the Additional information:
operation via iDrive. Caring for special components, refer to
page 372.
48
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Overview Switching the control display on/off

automatically
The Control Display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
1 Instrument cluster 149 Switching the control display on/off

2 Control Display 49 manually
display.
Control Display 2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Con- Setting the brightness
trol Display. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Safety information 3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
NOTICE 5. "Brightness at night"
Objects in the area in the front of the Control 6. Make the desired setting.
Display can slip and damage the Control Dis-
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
play. There is a risk of damage to property,
ness control may not be clearly visible.
among other potential damage. Do not place
objects in the area in front of the Control Dis-
play. System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so-
Overview lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Control Display
49
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly.
Overview
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
Controller
Buttons on the Controller ▷ Tilt in four directions to change, e.g., be-

tween display areas.
Button Function
Call up the main menu.
Go to Media menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Go to Navigation menu.
Operating via the Controller
Go to previous display range. Opening the main menu
Press the button.
Operation The main menu is displayed.

▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-
ample.
50
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Selecting menu items Using alphabetical lists

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
item is highlighted. tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
2. Press the Controller. be displayed in a text box.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right

Selecting a widget quickly.
1. Slide the Controller in the main menu to the 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
right. The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget played in the list.
is selected.
3. Press the Controller.
Operation via touchpad
Changing between display range
After a menu item has been selected, e.g., General information
"System settings", a new display range will be Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
displayed. functions can be operated with the controller
▷ Slide the Controller to the left. touchpad.
The current display area closes and the
previous display range is shown. Selecting functions
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Press the button.
3. "System settings"
The previous display range re-opens.
4. "Touchpad"
Entering letters and numbers 5. Select the desired setting.
Input Entering letters and numbers

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num- ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
bers. the Control Display.
2. : confirm entry. ▷ Always enter associated characters, such
Setting the system language, refer to page 55. as accents or periods, so that the letter can
be clearly recognized.
Deleting an entry ▷ The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
Icon Function characters via the Controller.
Setting the system language, refer to
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-
page 55.
ber.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-

ters or numbers.
51
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Entering special characters You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
Function Operation not use any objects.
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the Opening the main menu
ter. touchpad.
Tap on the icon.
Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the The main menu is displayed.
space. center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the Adjusting widgets

upper area of the touch- The widgets can be adjusted in the main
pad. menu. The adjustments can only be performed
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the when the vehicle is stationary.
score. lower area of the touch- 1. If necessary, tap the icon.
pad.
2. Press and hold the widget.
3. Make the desired adjustment:
Using the map
▷ Tap on the icon.
The map in the navigation system can be
A new widget can be selected.
moved via the touchpad.
▷ Tap on the icon.
Tap the map on the control display and then
continue operation using the touchpad. The widget is deleted.
▷ Press and hold the widget and drag to
Function Operation
the left or right.
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di- The widget is moved to the desired po-
rection. sition.
Display menu. Tap once.
Sorting apps
Using alphabetical lists To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-
sired icon and move it to the desired location.
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
with additional options can be displayed.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
Press and hold the desired menu item.
in the list.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
Operation via Control ▷ "General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
Display er's Manual.
▷ "Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the Con-
trol Display is equipped with a touchscreen.
52
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
Entering letters and numbers BMW Intelligent Personal

Input Assistant
1. If necessary, tap the icon or Control
Display. Principle
2. Enter desired letters and numbers. The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
Deleting an entry operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant simplifies the operation of
Icon Function the vehicle with the automation of processes
and habits.
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.
Press and hold the icon: delete all let- General information
ters or numbers. ▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version.
Using the map ▷ The system includes special microphones
on the driver side and the front passenger
The navigation map can be moved on the
side.
Control Display.
▷ Say commands at a normal volume.
Function Operation Speaking directly into the microphone does
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate not improve voice recognition.
direction. ▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin- and speed.
map. gers.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
Display menu. Tap once. ken.
Using alphabetical lists Functional requirements

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- ▷ A language that is supported by the Per-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
be displayed in a text box. Setting the system language, refer to
page 55.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
▷ Always say commands in the configured
A letter box is displayed.
system language.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
For the full range of functions, the following
The first entry of the selected letter is dis- functions should be activated, set or booked:
played in the list.
▷ Online speech processing, refer to
page 56.
▷ For all settings under
Data protection, refer to page 67.
▷ Activation word, refer to page 54.
53
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
▷ BMW ID or a driver profile. 4. "Voice control"

▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the 5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
ConnectedDrive Store. 6. "Wake word"
7. ""Hello BMW""
Activating the voice control system
Personal activation word
General information
In addition to the preset activation word, a
There are various methods for activating the personal activation word can be set up with
voice control feature: an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted.
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly. The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addi-
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tion such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.
tive.
▷ Speaking the activation word. 1. "MENU"
The microphones on the driver's or front 2. "Vehicle apps"
passenger's side are active with the follow- 3. "System settings"
ing voice control, depending on where the
4. "Voice control"
activation word was spoken.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without 6. "Wake word"
pause in one sentence. 7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set"
Microphone button on steering wheel 9. "Start recording"
1. Press button briefly. Activation word from third-party providers
2. Say the command. Depending on the national-market version,

some third-party providers provide digital voice
Activation word assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
General information nected via Apple CarPlay.
Saying the activation word will start the Per- Supported voice assistants can be used with
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis- a connected smartphone in the vehicle. In ad-
tens. dition to the preset or personal activation word,
the activation word from connected third-party
Preset activation word providers can be used.
The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can 1. "MENU"
be activated and deactivated.
2. "Vehicle apps"
1. "MENU" 3. "System settings"
2. "Vehicle apps" 4. "Voice control"
54
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
5. Select the desired voice assistant. ▷ ›Activate the climate control‹

6. Select the desired setting. ▷ ›Increase the ACC distance‹
Additional example commands for the current
Canceling voice control context are displayed in the widget of the BMW
Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Press the button on the steering Additional information:

wheel again. Adjust widgets, refer to page 52.
▷ ›Cancel‹
Menu items
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
Say the commands of the menu items as they
▷ Press the Controller.
are selected via the control display.
Possible commands 1. Activate the voice control system.

2. ›Media‹
General information 3. ›Presets‹
Commands can be used to give instructions The stored stations are displayed on the
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant Control Display.
providing assistance.
For example, you can call contacts, navigate Owner's Manual via voice operation
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
about a vehicle function.
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
Most content on the Control Display can be
The voice activation system and the feed-
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list
back it provides do not replace the printed
entries.
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function
is available depending on the national-market
Help for voice control version. The speech recognition and quality of
▷ ›Voice commands‹: have possible example the feedback may vary.
commands suggested. ›How can the passenger airbag be
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have deactivated?‹
information on the operating principle of the The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
voice control announced. When stationary, the section of the integrated
▷ ›Help‹: have tips and example commands Owner's Manual is displayed on the Control
for voice control announced. Display.
▷ Additional example commands for the cur-
rent context are displayed in the widget of Settings
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Setting the system language
Sample commands 1. "MENU"
▷ ›Call John Smith‹ 2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ ›Drive me to JFK airport‹ 3. "System settings"
▷ ›Play a classical music station‹ 4. "Language"
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹ 5. Select the desired setting.
55
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Setting the response length 4. "Voice control"

You can set the Personal Assistant to use 5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
standard dialog or a short version. In case of 6. "Online speech processing"
the short version, the announcements by the
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab- Voice control from third-party
breviated version. providers
1. "MENU" Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
2. "Vehicle apps" voice control can be enabled by pressing and
holding the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
4. "Voice control"
1. "MENU"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
2. "Vehicle apps"
6. "Response length"
4. "Voice control"
Speaking during voice output 5. "Long press"
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the 6. Select the desired setting.
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-
abled if requests are often canceled uninten- Voice control in rear
tionally, for instance due to background noise The Personal Assistant can be started and op-
or conversations in the vehicle. erated from the rear by speaking the activation
1. "MENU" word.
2. "Vehicle apps" 1. "MENU"
3. "System settings" 2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Voice control" 3. "System settings"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)" 4. "Voice control"
6. "Speaking during voice output" 5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Rear voice control"
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality Adjusting the volume
of the speech recognition and search results Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
for points of interest. To use the functions, ance until the desired volume is set.
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there. The volume remains constant even if the vol-
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required ume of other audio sources is changed.
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is
available depending on the national-market Using the voice activation of the
version. smartphone
1. "MENU" Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
2. "Vehicle apps"
control.
56
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
The device must be connected via Apple Car- ▷ Major language dialects can cause prob-
Play or Android Auto. lems with the speech recognition feature.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
1. Press and hold the button on the the Search.
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated. BMW Touch Command
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the Control Display. Principle
BMW Touch Command is a touchscreen used
2. Press and hold the button on the to operate vehicle functions.
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the
smartphone. General information
The following functions can be operated:
Automating routines ▷ Audio sources.
▷ My Modes.
General information
▷ Interior lighting.
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic opening of windows ▷ Sun protection.
in the same place. Rules are created for this ▷ Rear seats.
purpose, which can be activated and deacti- ▷ Climate control in the rear.
vated at any time.
▷ BMW Theater Screen.
Activating/deactivating routines ▷ Wireless charging tray in rear.
1. "MENU" ▷ Some phone features.
2. "All apps"
Overview
3. "Automate habits"
System limits
▷ The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may BMW Touch Command is located in the door
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win- handle of the rear doors.
dows closed.
▷ Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
57
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Switching on BMW Touch Disabling functions

Command Individual functions of BMW Touch Command
BMW Touch Command is switched on auto- can be disabled on the Control Display.
matically after unlocking the vehicle. 1. "MENU"
If necessary, tap BMW Touch Command. 2. "Vehicle apps"
Screensaver
4. "Rear settings"
General information 5. Select the desired setting.
If no input is made via BMW Touch Command, In addition, certain functions can be disabled
the screen saver switches on after 30 seconds. with the safety switch.
After 60 seconds, the screen saver is dimmed. Additional information:
Temperature control remains possible when Safety switch, refer to page 103.
the screen saver is switched on.
The background of the screen saver depends
on the selected My Modes Design. BMW Gesture Control
My Modes, refer to page 139. Principle
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
Disabling the screen saver hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.
To disable the screen saver on the touch-
screen, swipe from bottom to top. Overview
Operating BMW Touch Command
Function Operation
Call up the main menu.

Tap the icon.
Adjusting volume.
Tap the icon.
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
Scroll. Drag up or down. that are carried out in the area of the center
console at the height of the Control Display.
Confirm the selection. Tap the screen.
The camera of the gesture control uses an in-
visible Class 1 laser.
Settings
Activate/deactivate gesture control
Brightness
1. "MENU"
1. "Display"
2. "Vehicle apps"
2. "BMW Touch Command"
58
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
4. "Gesture control" Carrying out gestures

5. "Gesture control" ▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior
mirror and next to the steering wheel.
Settings ▷ Execute gestures clearly.
1. "MENU" ▷ The gestures can also be executed from
2. "Vehicle apps" the front-passenger side.
4. "Gesture control"
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move extended index finger forward and Accept call.

backward in the direction of the control Select a highlighted entry in a
display. list during voice control.
Confirm pop-up.
Swipe the hand in front of the control Reject call.

display in the direction of the passenger Close pop-up.
seat.
End voice control.
Move extended index finger slowly in a Increase the volume.

clockwise circular movement.
Gesture is detected after one circular
movement.
Move the extended index finger counter- Reduce the volume.

clockwise in a circular movement.
Gesture is detected after one circular
movement.
Depending on the Bring thumb and index finger together Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-
equipment: and move the hand to the right or left. cle view.
3D view: rotate camera view.
This gesture can only be exe-
cuted while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
59
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Gesture Operation Function
Move fist with thumb extended to the left Reverse Skip function.
back and forth. The previous title is played.
Move fist with thumb extended to right Forward Skip function.

left back and forth. The next title is played.
With the index and middle fingers ex- Perform individually assigna-
tended, point into the direction of the ble gesture.
control display.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and Perform individually assigna-
stretch five fingers out again. ble gesture.
Assigning gesture individually Select function

Some defined functions can be selected di-
General information rectly in the menu for gesture control.
Two gestures can be assigned individually and 1. "MENU"
can be configured as shortcut for certain func-
tions, such as: 2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Destination guidance to home address. 3. "System settings"
▷ Mute/Playback 4. "Gesture control"
▷ Control Display on/off 5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-

o-five fingers"
Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an
active BMW ID or a driver profile. 6. Select the desired setting.
Configure gesture shortcut System limits

The desired function can be selected directly in Gesture recognition by the camera in the
every menu and configured as shortcut. headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-
cumstances:
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
▷ The camera lens is covered.
2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
3. Select the desired gesture.
60
BMW iDrive CONTROLS
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
lens. ▷ Printed Owner’s Manual for navigation,
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to communication and entertainment.
page 371. ▷ Driver’s Guide app.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de- ▷ Driver’s Guide Web.
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry. Safety information
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
Warning
Connecting mobile devices Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
to the vehicle distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
Principle a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
Various connection types are available for us- devices when the traffic situation allows. As
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec- warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
tion type to select depends on the mobile devices while the vehicle is stationary.
vice and the desired function.
Overview
General information
The following overview shows possible func-
Detailed information on the functions and con-
tions and the suitable connection types for
nection types can be found in the following
them. The range of functions depends on the
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.
fied keyword:
Function Connection type Icon on the con-
trol display
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.

tem. Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Playing music from a mobile device. Bluetooth audio.

Keyword: audio. Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone. Personal eSIM.

Keyword: calling with the Personal Keyword: Personal eSIM.
eSIM.
Data exchange between mobile de- Wi-Fi.

vice and vehicle. Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
61
CONTROLS BMW iDrive
Function Connection type Icon on the con-

trol display
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
hotspot. Keyword: personal hotspot.
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

via voice control. Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
voice control. Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device. USB.

Keyword: audio. Keyword: USB connection.
USB port, refer to page 287.
62
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and options There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software ▷ Cellular network reception.
Upgrade ▷ Consent to transmit the corresponding data

was given in the Data Protection menu.
Principle
Data protection, refer to page 67.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
Search for an upgrade
ments or quality improvements available.
Functional requirement
General information Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
Safety information the background.
Manual search
Warning
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 3. "System settings"
following actions: 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 5. "Search for upgrades"
▷ Releasing the parking brake. 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- play.
dows.
63
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Download of an upgrade Information about the version
Automatic download General information

If available, the data for a Remote Software The information about the version contains a
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the description of the updates included in the Re-
vehicle. No download consent is required. mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
Via BMW app completed, the information about the version
If an upgrade is available, information about can be displayed on the Control Display.
the new software version is displayed in the This information is also available in the Con-
BMW app. nectedDrive customer portal.
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an Displaying information
existing WLAN connection. Display in the vehicle:
The data can then be transmitted from the 1. "MENU"
mobile device to the vehicle.
2. "All apps"
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. ▷ Display currently installed version:
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to
the smartphone. "Installed version:"
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app. ▷ Display new available version:
3. Establish connection to the vehicle. "Information on version"
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
WLAN. play.
▷ Android: connect Bluetooth® audio and Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
WLAN. www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the Installing the upgrade
background only while driving.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- General information
play. ▷ Installation of the Remote Software Up-
Additional information: grade may result in the deletion of software
changes, e.g., performance increases not
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
see Owner’s Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication. ▷ Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
facturer can lead to an interruption of the
installation.
▷ The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
64
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
▷ The installation may take around 20 to ▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such
30 minutes. as a mobile phone.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated. ▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the in- cle for the consent for installation.
stallation. ▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the instal- ▷ Remove the devices connected to the diag-
lation. nostic socket.
▷ Charging the vehicle is interrupted due to
the installation. Installing immediately
▷ Following the successful installation, charg- The upgrade can be installed immediately
ing the vehicle may not continue automati- when all prerequisites have been met.
cally. 1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Prerequisites for the installation
▷ The state of charge of the vehicle battery is
sufficient. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ The outside temperature is above 5. "Start upgrade now"
14 ℉/-10 ℃. 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi- play.
tion.
▷ The hazard warning system is turned off. Installing with timer
▷ The selector lever position P is engaged. When the trip is completed, a timer can be
used to install the upgrade automatically at
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. a configured time, such as during the night.
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre- A later installation may make sense to meet
requisites on the control display. functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi- charged vehicle battery.
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade 1. "MENU"
will not be offered for installation.
2. "All apps"
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after charging the battery for a longer period of 3. "System settings"
time. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
Preparing the vehicle The installation starts automatically when:
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public ▷ All prerequisites for the installation have
road. been established correctly.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured ▷ All prerequisites continue to be met at the
so that a fault message can be sent to the time of installation.
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-
stallation is terminated. The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
▷ Close the windows.
▷ Close the trunk.
65
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Functional limitations Malfunction

During the upgrade, the majority of functions is In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
temporarily unavailable, for instance: structions on the control display or in the BMW
▷ Hazard warning system. app.
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary, If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact
Comfort Access. an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or a repair shop.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn. Validity of the Owner's Manual
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency call. Production of the vehicle
▷ Power windows. At the time of production at the plant, the
▷ Glass sunroof. printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
▷ Glove compartment.
▷ Operate the tailgate or trunk lid. After a software update in the vehicle
▷ Lock the tailgate. After a vehicle software update, such as via
▷ Exit warning if needed. Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
may no longer close completely. latest information.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked

from the outside using the integrated key.
In vehicles with an electrical lock, the lock may
temporarily not work. In this case, the vehicle
can be exited by unlocking the driver's door
manually.
Buttons for central locking system, refer to
page 93.
After successful upgrade

The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services such as. Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
After a longer stationary period, recharge the
vehicle battery with the charging cable as nec-
essary.
66
Personal settings CONTROLS
Personal settings
Vehicle features and options This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
General information
now and will be available in the future, even if Depending on the equipment, the following
they are not available in the owned vehicle. data is deleted:
Additional information: ▷ BMW IDs or driver profiles.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored shortcuts.
Data protection ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina-

tions.
▷ Phone book.
Data transfer
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
Principle ▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
The vehicle offers different services, whose ▷ Login accounts.

use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv- ▷ Digital key.
ice provider. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
General information moved from the BMW app and the Connected-
The data transfer can be deactivated for some Drive customer portal so that remote functions
services. When the data transfer is deacti- can no longer be used.
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Settings ▷ Data can only be deleted while stationary.
The data transfer can be configured in different ▷ The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
stages or individually for separate services.
1. "MENU" Deleting data
2. "Vehicle apps" The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
4. "Data privacy"
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 67.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Reset vehicle data
Principle
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
personal data, such as stored radio stations. tory settings when the drive-ready state is
67
CONTROLS Personal settings
switched off. The vehicle key must be in the A BMW ID or driver profile can be activated
vehicle. while unlocking. For this purpose, the driver
recognition must be assigned to the BMW ID
1. "MENU"
or the driver profile via a vehicle key or a digital
2. "Vehicle apps" key.
3. "System settings" If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
4. "Reset vehicle data" the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the
5. "Reset vehicle data" guest profile.
If setting synchronization has been activated

for a BMW ID in the vehicle, personal settings
are kept in the BMW Cloud. When a BMW ID or driver profile is created,
changed, deleted, or edited, the vehicle must
move no faster than at walking speed.
BMW ID/driver profiles Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only
Principle possible when the vehicle has cellular network
reception.
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is
the personal login for all relevant offers for the
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the
Welcome window
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
settings. is shown on the control display. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
uisites:
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.
▷ The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
General information ID or driver profile:
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
ID can be registered via the BMW app, in the BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
ConnectedDrive Portal, or with a service cen- ▷ The vehicle key or the digital key has not
ter. been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
A driver profile is created in the vehicle. file:
If a vehicle is used by several people, each The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
person can create their own BMW ID or driver IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
profile in order to save their personal settings. for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
If a BMW ID or driver profile is activated, the profile.
settings stored for it are applied in the vehicle.
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW signed to the vehicle key or digital key:
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa- The welcome is personalized, the stored
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
used to log in. driver profile can be changed.
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs or seven As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
driver profiles. or the control display is tapped outside of the
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
68
Registering your BMW ID If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the

settings of the guest profile will be ap-
To use a BMW ID, proceed as follows:
plied.
▷ Register your BMW ID.
▷ "Continue"
▷ Activate your personal ConnectedDrive ac-
The vehicle is added to the user’s BMW app.
count.
▷ Add or confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle.
Confirming a BMW ID
Registration of your BMW ID in the vehicle can
If the BMW ID has been created by the service
be started via the BMW app.
center and added to the vehicle, the BMW ID
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the must then be confirmed in the vehicle:
status bar.
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. "Add BMW ID"
2. Select the desired confirmation:
3. "Register now"
▷ Scan the displayed QR code with the
4. Scan the QR code shown in the display. BMW app.
The BMW ID is created on the smartphone.
▷ Enter the password for the BMW ID.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by
the service center and added to the vehicle. BMW app
The BMW ID must then be confirmed on the
control display in the corresponding vehicle. If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,
the vehicle is automatically added to the BMW
app. This means that BMW app functions can
Adding the BMW ID be used for this vehicle. To do so, the BMW
An existing BMW ID can be added to the vehi- app must be used with the same BMW ID.
cle:
Alternatively, a vehicle can be added to the
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the BMW app by the service center. In this case,
status bar. the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the
2. "Add BMW ID" control display in the corresponding vehicle.
3. ▷ "Log in with My BMW App" In rare cases, the use of BMW app functions
for this vehicle may be restricted. More infor-
▷ "Log in with BMW ID" mation is shown on the control display.
4. ▷ Scan the QR code shown on the display.
The BMW ID is copied from the BMW Creating a driver profile
app.
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
▷ Enter the access data for the BMW ID. status bar.
5. Depending on the national-market version, 2. "Add driver profile"
the following settings can be selected:
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
▷ "Settings from BMW Cloud"
4. Select the desired setting:
The settings stored in the BMW Cloud
"Current settings"
are applied.
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-
▷ "Current settings"
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
69
Main user The digital key that is recognized in the ve-

hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or
The main user is the person who first enters
the driver profile.
their BMW ID into the vehicle and the vehicle
into the BMW app. Alternatively, the main user
can be defined by the service center. Automatic driver recognition
The main user has access to the following set- If driver recognition has been established, au-
tings, for example: tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-
file is triggered by the following actions:
▷ Remove BMW IDs stored in the vehicle.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the button
▷ Transfer the role of the main user to an-
on the assigned vehicle key.
other BMW ID.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an external
▷ Change vehicle-wide data protection set-
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
tings.
the assigned Digital Key must be carried
▷ Create the digital master key. with you.
Additional information: ▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90. the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned Digital Key must be carried with
Specifying driver detection you. Depending on the country, it may not
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.
Driver detection and a PIN can be set up for a
BMW ID or a driver profile. If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
The driver detection offers the following ad-
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to
vantages:
the following priority:
▷ The BMW ID or the driver profile with saved
▷ The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
settings is activated automatically.
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
▷ The settings are not accessible to other the assigned driver profile.
persons.
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
The driver detection is specified immediately hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
following the addition of the BMW ID or after signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
creating the driver profile.
▷ If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are
Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a detected at the same time, the Digital
PIN must be created. Key triggers the activation of the assigned
▷ "Set PIN" BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.
The PIN can be used to activate the ▷ If another key is detected on the driver's
BMW ID or the driver profile, even if the door after activating the BMW ID or the
assigned vehicle key or the assigned digital driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
key is not available. file of the last key detected is activated.
▷ "Vehicle key" If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
The vehicle key that is recognized in the signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
vehicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID vated.
or the driver profile.
▷ "Digital Key"
70
Setting synchronization In the following cases the guest profile is auto-

matically active:
If synchronization is switched on, settings from
the following areas, for example, are continu- ▷ A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
ously synchronized: driver profile has not yet been created.
▷ BMW ID, e.g., profile picture. ▷ No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
▷ Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
address, or map settings.
The following limitations apply to the guest
▷ Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
profile:
tions.
▷ Selected functions that edit personal data
▷ iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
are not available in the guest profile. This
guage, or units.
includes functions of the navigation and
▷ Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac- the saving of favorites. More information
tivation word. on data processing is available in the Con-
▷ Exterior lighting, e.g., blinking indicator and nectedDrive data protection notes / service
home lights. descriptions.
Settings from the following areas are only ▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
synchronized when you log in for the first time: ▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
▷ Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s guest profile.
seat position or temperature setting. ▷ It is not possible to assign driver detection
▷ Data protection menu. to the guest profile.
▷ In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select screen or via iDrive:
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome
window. 1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"
at any time via iDrive:
▷ "Change driver profile"
status bar. 3. "Continue as guest"
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"

Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile. status bar.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN. 2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated, ▷ "Change driver profile"
the stored settings are loaded.
3. Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
Guest profile
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
The guest profile can be activated and the vehicle to be removed from the BMW app.
changed by anyone. If the BMW ID has been synchronized with the
71
BMW Cloud, the data stored in the BMW Cloud ▷ The type of driver detection.
is retained after the BMW ID is deleted. If the ▷ The profile picture.
currently active BMW ID is removed, the guest
▷ The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
profile is activated.
▷ The personal salutation.
Removing a vehicle from the BMW app re-
moves the corresponding BMW ID from the The following settings are available for the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with driver profile:
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the ▷ The type of driver detection.
BMW Cloud will be retained. ▷ The profile picture.
If the vehicle is removed from the main user’s ▷ The profile name.
BMW app, it will also be removed from the
other users’ BMW apps. The corresponding
Selecting a profile picture
BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
The profile picture can be selected from the
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, the
predefined profile pictures:
vehicle is removed from all users’ BMW apps
and all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle. 1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
Transfer of the vehicle key 2. "Settings"
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or 3. "Manage profile picture"
a driver profile can be used to view or change 4. "Select profile picture"
the stored personal settings.
For a BMW ID, the personal profile picture can
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per- be taken from the profile in the BMW app.
sons, any assigned driver detection should be This requires that the synchronization with the
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can BMW Cloud is activated in the settings. After
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the the profile picture from the BMW app has
driver profile. been applied, you can only select from the
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to predefined pictures if the profile picture in the
transfer a digital key to permit other persons BMW app is deleted or synchronization is de-
the use of your own vehicle. activated.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90. System limits
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
Settings the digital key may not always be possible in
the following cases, for example:
General information ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre- locked and unlocked.
ating a driver profile can be changed. ▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
status bar.
driver's side of the vehicle.
2. "Settings"
▷ When the vehicle was unlocked from the
The following settings are available for the BMW app.
BMW ID:
72
The use of personal settings that are stored for

a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
73
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Overview
Vehicle key
General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- Buttons on the vehicle key.
tery.
Icon Meaning
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible Unlock.
for the button functions.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key. Lock.
To provide information on maintenance rec- Stationary climate control, refer to
ommendations, the service data is stored in page 281.
the vehicle key. Displaying the charging screen, refer
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle to page 163.
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
Open the cargo area.
the vehicle.
Safety information Panic mode.

Pathway lighting, refer to page 174.
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Additional vehicle keys
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries Additional vehicle keys are available from an
within two hours, for example due to internal authorized service center or another qualified
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of service center or repair shop.
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
74
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Loss of vehicle keys 3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-
ing.
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery

4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive side facing down.
NOTICE
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de- key.
vice can damage the device. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
damage. Always replace the discharged bat-
tery with a battery with the same voltage, the
same size and the same specification.
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and

push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.

Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Integrated key
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-
General information
cle key to the side.
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked with-
out the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
75
Safety information The cover cap is slightly opened.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it. 2. Pull the cover cap to the side so that the
door lock is clearly visible.
3. Unlock the door lock with the integrated
Removing the integrated key key.
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
4. Remove the integrated key from the door

lock.
5. Press the cover cap in to close it.
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open
side of the vehicle key.
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle

key.
Unlocking via the door lock

1. Press the cover cap in.
76
6. Press the cover cap in again to open it Alarm system

slightly. If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
7. Pull on the cover cap until the door opens. key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be
activated.
Emergency detection of the vehicle

key
The other doors must be unlocked from the
inside.
Locking via the side door lock
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready

state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
Side door lock in the driver's door. 1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
mark on the steering column. Pay attention
1. Slightly open the driver's door. to the display in the instrument cluster.
2. Lock the side door lock with the integrated 2. ▷ If the vehicle key is detected:
key. Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
▷ If the vehicle key is not detected:
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
3. Close the driver's door. Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
If necessary, lock the other doors from the re-
spective side door lock as well.
77
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.

▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission Warning
towers or other equipment with high trans- For some national-market versions, unlock-
mitting power. ing from the inside is only possible with par-
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ticular knowledge.
objects. If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
Do not transport the vehicle key together and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
with metal objects. atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
or other electronic devices in direct proxim- when there are people in it.
ity to the vehicle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices. Warning
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
process of mobile devices, for instance can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
charging of a mobile phone. themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Place the vehicle key in a different location. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Fault of the radio link during charging of the ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
vehicle. dows.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
be unlocked and locked from the outside with ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec- There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive readi- leave children or animals unattended in the
ness. vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
Access to vehicle interior

Actions during unlocking
Safety information Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
Warning
▷ Only the driver's door and the charging
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
socket cover will be unlocked or all access
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
to the vehicle will be unlocked.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. ▷ The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve- firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
hicle can be opened from the outside. ▷ The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
78
▷ If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned be switched off by means of the Start/Stop
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver button.
profile will be activated. Additional information:
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless Settings, refer to page 95.
they were manually switched off.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in With the vehicle key
exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the Unlocking the vehicle
button in the vehicle interior, they will not
Press the button on the vehicle key.
be folded out during unlocking.
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system is switched off. If only the driver's door and charging socket
cover have been unlocked due to the settings,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
▷ Settings, refer to page 95. unlock the other vehicle access points.
▷ Welcome lights, refer to page 173. After opening one of the front doors, the vehi-
▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68. cle is ready for operation.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
Actions during locking bient brightness.
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi- Opening and closing automatic doors
cle: When opening and closing manually, the doors
▷ The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed are motor-assisted. Depending on the set-
with a light signal or a sound signal. tings, the doors can also be opened and
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte- closed automatically using the vehicle key.
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically Additional information:
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not Automatic doors, refer to page 82.
folded in when the hazard warning flashers
are switched on. Locking the vehicle
▷ Pathway lighting can be activated during 1. Close the driver's door.
locking.
The following functions are executed:
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the charging
socket cover are locked.
On the external door handle
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on. This
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
Principle
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
▷ The alarm system is switched on.
the vehicle key.
If the drive readiness is still turned on when
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
the vehicle.
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
79
General information Unlocking the vehicle at the rear door

The function is available with Comfort Access.
vehicle can also be unlocked and locked at the
external door handle with compatible smart-
phones with a digital key.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Press and hold the button in the recessed grip
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
to unlock the vehicle and open the rear door.
pants pocket.
▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to unlock and lock using the Digital Opening and closing automatic doors
Key. When opening and closing manually, the doors
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be are motor-assisted. The doors can also be
outside of the vehicle near the doors. opened and closed automatically on the exter-
nal door handle.
▷ After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible. Additional information:
Automatic doors, refer to page 82.
Unlock vehicle on front door
Locking the vehicle
2. Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed front door with your
finger for approx. 1 second without reaching
into the recessed grip.
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.
Malfunction
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the external door han-
dles.
80
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock Actions during unlocking

the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key If the settings specify that only the driver's
or use the integrated key. door and the charging socket cover will be un-
locked, note the following:
Touchless unlocking/locking of the The driver's door and the charging socket
vehicle cover will only be unlocked when the driver ap-
proaches the vehicle on the driver's side.
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
Settings, refer to page 95.
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked Functional requirements
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
pants pocket.
General information ▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the Digital Key.
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
▷ Automatic unlocking and locking must be
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
activated in the settings.
zone.
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear ▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
of the vehicle. several days, contactless unlocking/locking
will only be available after the vehicle has
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
been driven.
leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of Settings, refer to page 95.
the vehicle.
Depending on the national-market version,
With the Key Card
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital Principle
key. The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking tal key is installed. It can be used to unlock and
zone for an extended period of time without lock the vehicle.
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati- Additional information:
cally. Key Card, refer to page 89.
If a person is detected on a seat during locking:
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured General information
against theft. The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
▷ The charging socket cover remains un-
locked.
81
Locking/unlocking the vehicle position of the near field communication an-

tenna depends on the smartphone model.
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
Hold activated Key Card directly on the center
▷ The Remote Services of the BMW app in-
of the external door handle of the driver's door.
clude the option to lock and unlock a vehi-
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card, cle.
make sure that all doors and the trunk are This requires an active BMW Connected-
closed. Drive contract and the BMW app must be
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change installed on a smartphone.
the position of the Key Card and repeat the ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
procedure. the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
With the BMW Digital Key required.
Principle
Depending on the national-market version and Automatic doors
equipment, a digital key can be installed on
a compatible smartphone and used to unlock Principle
and lock the vehicle.
The automatic doors open and close automat-
Additional information: ically. If necessary, the doors can also be oper-
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90. ated manually.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle General information

Multiple doors can be opened and closed at
the same time.
When opening and closing manually, the door
movement is motor-assisted.
Hold the near field communication antenna of

the smartphone directly and centered on the
external door handle of the driver's door. The
82
Safety information Exit Warning is only triggered if the doors

are opened from the inside.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed while operating
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during opening and closing.
Warning
The system does not release the driver from Detection range for stationary obstacles.
their responsibility to assess the traffic and
their surroundings. Based on the limits of the If an obstacle is detected, a visual warning is
system, it cannot independently react to all issued on the respective door and on the con-
traffic situations. Otherwise, there is a risk trol display. Movement of the respective door
people may be injured or property damaged. is stopped.
Observe traffic and surroundings and actively Additional information:
intervene in corresponding situations, e.g.,
Exit warning, refer to page 194.
manually interrupt the door movement.
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 39.
Functional requirements On the external door handle

▷ The vehicle tilt is less than 10° in the longi-
tudinal and transverse directions. Principle
▷ The vehicle is at a standstill. The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
▷ The safety function is switched off. When
the safety function is switched on, the rear The vehicle key is automatically detected near
doors cannot be operated in the interior nor the vehicle.
operated with the vehicle key.
General information
Safety switch, refer to page 103.
vehicle doors can also be opened and closed
automatically with the external door handle us-
Detection of obstacles ing a compatible smartphones with a digital
When the doors are opened automatically, sta- key.
tionary and moving obstacles are detected un- Additional information:
der the following circumstances:
▷ The stationary obstacles are not closer
than 10 in/25 cm to the vehicle.
▷ The stationary obstacles are located below
the window line.
▷ The detection area for moving obstacles
corresponds to that of the Exit Warning.
83
Opening the door automatically Closing the door automatically
1. Press the button in the illuminated spot, ar- ▷ Press the button in the illuminated spot, ar-
row. row.
2. Move away from the door’s movement Pressing the button again stops the door
range. movement.
Pressing the button again stops the door ▷ Push the door briefly.
movement.
If the person opening the door is detected Closing the door manually
as an obstacle, the door stops. If the door’s
Close the open door slowly and press slightly
movement range is exited immediately, the
against the vehicle. The door closes automati-
door continues to move.
cally.
If the door does not continue to move, open
the door manually. With the BMW app
Doors can be opened and closed automatically
Opening the door manually
with the BMW app. To do so, a digital key
for the vehicle must be installed on the smart-
phone.
In the interior
Operating the front door

Reach into the recessed grip of the door and
pull the door outward.
The movement of the door is motor-assisted.
84
Press the button in the door to unlock Operation of individual doors:

the door.
Icon Meaning
Push the door outward.
Open the closed door.
Press the button next to the steering
wheel to open or close the door auto-
matically.
Operating the rear doors

Close the open door.
Stop the door movement.
Press the button to unlock the door. Access to the cargo area
Press the button to open or close the

General information
door automatically. It may not be possible to open the cargo area
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Closing the driver’s door with the brake
Valet parking mode, refer to page 94.
pedal
Depress the brake pedal to close the driver’s
Safety information
door.
This function must be activated in the settings.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
Operating doors on the control display
Doors can be opened, closed, and stopped in
motion, separately or together.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Automatic doors"
85

NOTICE compatible smartphones with a digital key are
also detected automatically. In this case, the
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure Additional information:
that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
during opening and closing.
Functional prerequisites
With the vehicle key
pants pocket.
General information ▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to detect the Digital Key.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Opening the trunk
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the following settings can be
changed:
▷ Whether the doors are also unlocked when
unlocking with the vehicle key.
▷ Whether the vehicle must be unlocked be-
fore unlocking with the vehicle key.
Selector lever position P must be engaged to ▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
open the cargo area with the vehicle key. ton on the trunk.
You must enable the setting for opening with ▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
the vehicle key. with you and press the button on the trunk.
Additional information: Locked doors are not unlocked.
Closing the cargo area
Opening the trunk
Press the button on the vehicle key for
approx. 1 second.
On the trunk
General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key. ▷ Press the button on the trunk.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
▷ Press the button on the trunk.
86
The vehicle is locked after closing the cargo Pressing the button again continues the
area. To do so, the driver's door must be opening process.
closed and the vehicle key must be outside ▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
of the vehicle near the cargo area. driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening procedure.
In the interior
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- lowing situations:
tion P must be engaged before the trunk lid
▷ If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
can be opened using the button in the vehicle
ment.
interior.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
Opening the trunk the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
Press the button in the storage com-
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of
partment of the driver's door.
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
Closing the cargo area ▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
Pull and hold the button in the storage
closing motion.
compartment of the driver's door.
The vehicle key or the digital key must be lo- Touchless opening and closing of
cated in the vehicle interior for this function. the cargo area
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is
closed. Principle
Touchless opening and closing of the cargo
Interruption of the opening area is possible when carrying the vehicle key
procedure on your person.
The opening procedure is interrupted in the Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
following situations: movement in the central rear area and the
cargo area is opened and closed.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of General information
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
The availability of the function depends on the
cargo area again.
equipment and the country.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if
cargo area again.
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key. movement is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
87
If contactless opening is used for the cargo Opening the cargo area
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
Depending on national-market version, con- approx. one arm's length away from the
tactless opening of the cargo area is also pos- rear of the vehicle.
sible for compatible smartphones with a Digital 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
Key. direction and immediately pull it back. With
Additional information: this movement, the leg must pass through
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90. the ranges of both sensors.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-

ing system flashes.
NOTICE
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
up. There is a risk of damage to property, close the cargo area again.
among other potential damage. Make sure
that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear
Closing the cargo area
Perform the foot movement for opening the
cargo area.
Functional requirements The hazard warning system flashes and an
▷ To open the cargo area contactlessly, se- acoustic signal sounds.
lector lever position P must be engaged. Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-
▷ Contactless opening and closing of the ess. The subsequent foot movement will open
trunk must be activated in the settings. the cargo area again.
phone to open and close the cargo area System limits
contactlessly using the Digital Key. The detection of the foot movement may be
Additional information: limited due to the following external conditions:
Settings, refer to page 95. ▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
Movement in range of the sensors may cause
unintended opening of the cargo area, for in-
stance due to water running down when clean-
ing the vehicle or with heavy rainfall. To pre-
vent such unintended opening of the cargo
88
area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a Safety information

sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle.
Malfunction NOTICE
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper- If the Key Card and a mobile device are in
ate the unlocked trunk manually with a slow the wireless charging tray at the same time,
and smooth motion. the Key Card could become damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Do not place the Key Card
Trunk emergency unlocking
in the wireless charging tray at the same time
as a mobile device.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in

the vehicle
General information
The Key Card must be located in the smart-
phone tray and a vehicle key must be located
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. in the vehicle to activate the Key Card.
The trunk is unlocked. A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
deactivate the Key Card.
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
Key Card vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
Principle A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
Activating Key Card
General information
The availability of the Key Card depends on
the equipment and the country.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
1. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
phone tray.
a service appointment.
2. Follow instructions on the control display.
89
Deactivating Key Card BMW Digital Key

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Principle
3. "Doors and windows" BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
4. "Key Card" locked and locked, as well as started, with a
5. "Deactivate Key Card" compatible smartphone.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of

paired digital keys.
General information
Availability and range of functions of the BMW
Unlocking and locking the vehicle Digital Key depend on the equipment and na-
tional-market version.
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card. BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices.
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 78.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
Turning on the drive-ready state the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app
provides a check to determine if the smart-
phone and the vehicle are compatible and
which functions are supported.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a Digital Key,
always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-
1. Place activated Key Card in the center of ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key
the smartphone tray. or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to
be handed over to another person. You can
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card
After drive readiness is switched on, the Key instead of your smartphone. Always take the
Card can be removed from the tray. vehicle key with you to a service appointment.
Malfunction
▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen- ▷ www.bmw.com/digitalkey.
sors and the Key Card, such as a wallet or a
smartphone cover.
90
Functional requirements Limiting the range of functions

▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
Digital Key ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected- Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the
Drive account of the vehicle owner. switch-off for driving stability control systems
can be disabled and the engine power can
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smart- be reduced. For more information, refer to the
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces- ConnectedDrive portal and the BMW app.
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
Enabling the digital remote control
model, an authentication may be required for
key security and safety reasons.
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote
digital remote control key in the vehicle. The control key or another method may be used
vehicle owner must prove his authorization for for authentication. Follow the corresponding
the vehicle for this purpose. instructions on the smartphone or the Control
Proof of authorization can be started via the Display.
BMW app or via the activation code in the
corresponding smartphone function, e.g. in the Deleting digital keys
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be in the
vehicle during activation. General information
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
in the BMW app or on the Control Display. list of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Sharing digital keys
Deleting the digital master key
General information
The digital master key can be deleted from the
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys
smartphone or via iDrive.
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as digital re- The deletion of the digital master key is com-
mote control key. This function must be sup- pleted immediately.
ported by the smartphone.
Deleting a shared key
Forwarding authorization Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-
To share the digital key, select the correspond- phone with the digital remote control key, via
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in the smartphone with a shared key or via iDrive.
the Wallet app. The deletion via the smartphone using the dig-
As soon as a digital key is shared with another ital remote control will not be performed until
person, the person will receive an invitation. the vehicle is used with a key other than the
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key key to be deleted.
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated. The deletion via the smartphone with a shared
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.
91
Deletion via iDrive Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, phone for contactless unlocking and locking
an authorized vehicle key must be located in using the Digital Key.
the vehicle or the remote control key must be Additional information:
located in the smartphone tray. Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 78.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Turning on the drive-ready state
3. "Doors and windows" Using the smartphone tray
4. "Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
Resetting the function

To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the digital main key 1. Place smartphone in the center of the
will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not smartphone tray.
deleted. Ensure that the display is facing up.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be 2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key. drive-ready state.
The digital remote control key must be enabled
again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again. In the interior
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending
1. "MENU"
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-
2. "Vehicle apps" tooth activated to be located inside the vehi-
3. "Doors and windows" cle. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
4. "Digital Key" drive-ready state.
5. "Reset function"
Sale of the smartphone
Unlocking and locking the vehicle Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
lows:
vehicle.
▷ Via the external door handle.
▷ With Comfort Access: depending on the na- Sale of the vehicle
tional-market version, the vehicle can be Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa- Key function or remove the vehicle from the
tion. ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
92
When the vehicle is removed from the Con- Overview

nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is
not deleted.
System limits
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off
with a digital key.
Alarm system, refer to page 97. The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Malfunction Lock.
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sen- Unlock.
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card Open the door.
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
▷ Fault of the connection from transmission Locking the vehicle
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power. Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
ings or metal objects.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Buttons for the central
Unlocking the vehicle
locking system
Press the button.
General information
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
ing off. Opening the door
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle Press the button.
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
The door is unlocked and slightly open.
93
Opening and closing automatic Safety information

doors
The automatic doors can be opened and Warning
closed automatically or manually.
Body parts can be jammed while operating
Additional information: the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
Automatic doors, refer to page 82. that the area of movement of the doors is
Malfunction
General information Closing

To close the doors, push lightly.
In case of a power failure, the doors can be
unlocked manually. The closing happens automatically.
Unlocking the door manually

Valet parking mode
Principle
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display
is disabled.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
General information
Pull the lever in the door to unlock it. Depending on the national-market version, the
valet parking mode may not be available.
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible
to change vehicle settings via iDrive. Settings
Soft-close automatic stored in a BMW ID or a guest profile can-
not be changed. Personal data cannot be dis-
function played.
Additionally, the following actions are carried
Principle out:
The soft-close automatic function reduces the ▷ The glove compartment can only be un-
effort and noise when closing vehicle doors. locked manually.
The door can be pushed into the door lock ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
without effort and the door will close automati-
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be
cally.
turned off.
▷ The availability of certain settings of the
driving modes is limited.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.
94
Functional requirement Unlocking and locking

The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
BMW ID. Doors
1. "MENU"
Activating the valet parking mode 2. "Vehicle apps"
1. "MENU" 3. "Doors and windows"
2. "Vehicle apps" 4. "Lock/unlock"
3. "System settings" 5. "Unlock"
4. "Valet parking mode" 6. Select the desired setting:
The cargo area is locked and disconnected ▷ "Driver's door only"
from the central locking system.
Only the driver's door and the charg-
5. If necessary, "PIN" ing socket cover are unlocked. Pressing
If the active BMW ID does not have an as- again unlocks the entire vehicle.
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The ▷ "All doors"
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
ing mode.
6. If necessary, enter the PIN. Touchless unlocking/locking
7. "Activate valet parking mode" 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Deactivating valet parking mode
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen. 4. "Comfort access"
2. ▷ Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID. 5. Select the desired setting:
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the ▷ "Unlock when approaching"
access data for the BMW ID. ▷ "Lock when walking away"
▷ If the selected BMW ID does not have
an assigned PIN: enter the access data Automatic unlocking
for the BMW ID. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Settings 3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"
General information 5. Select the desired setting:
Depending on the equipment and national- ▷ "Unlock doors at end of trip"

market version, various settings for opening ▷ "Unlock doors when in P"
and closing are possible. After drive readiness is switched off, the
locked vehicle is unlocked automatically by
pressing the start/stop button or engaging
selector lever position P.
95
Automatic locking Automatic doors

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Operation using the brake pedal
3. "Doors and windows" The driver’s door can be configured to close by
pressing the brake pedal.
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Lock after a short time" 1. "MENU"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short 2. "Vehicle apps"

period of time if no door is opened after 3. "Doors and windows"
unlocking. 4. "Automatic doors"
5. "Settings"
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
6. "Brake closes driver's door"
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows" Cargo area
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma- Cargo area and doors
tion signals: 1. "MENU"
▷ "Flash on lock/unlock" 2. "Vehicle apps"
Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice, 3. "Doors and windows"
locking by blinking once. 4. "Tailgate"
▷ With alarm system: 5. Select the desired setting:
"Sound on lock/unlock" ▷ "Tailgate"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound Depending on the equipment, the cargo
signals, locking is confirmed with one area will be unlocked or opened.
sound signal.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
Folding mirrors in automatically Depending on the equipment, the trunk
will be unlocked or opened and the
1. "MENU"
doors are unlocked.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ "Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
3. "Doors and windows" already unlocked"
4. "Lock/unlock" The vehicle must be unlocked before
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock" the cargo area can be operated with the
vehicle key.
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-
cle key is disabled.
96
Opening/closing the cargo area with Do not modify the system to ensure function of
no-touch activation the alarm system.
1. "MENU"
Turning the alarm system on/off
2. "Vehicle apps"
The alarm system is turned off or on as soon
as the vehicle is unlocked or locked.
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting: Opening the doors with the alarm
▷ "Open with foot movement" system switched on
▷ "Close with foot movement" The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Alarm system
Opening the cargo area with the
Principle alarm system switched on
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic The cargo area can be opened even when the
signal when someone attempts to open the alarm system is switched on.
locked vehicle incorrectly. After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will
be locked and monitored again. The hazard
General information warning system blinks once during closing.
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes: Panic mode
▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo You can trigger the alarm system if you find
area. yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Movements in the interior. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
▷ Changes in the vehicle inclination, such and hold for at least 3 seconds.
as during attempts at stealing a wheel or ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-
when towing the vehicle. cle key three times in succession.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
board diagnostics.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the diagnostic socket.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Optical alarm:
By blinking of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
97
Indicator light on the interior mirror The windows must be closed for the system to
function properly.
When the BMW Theater Screen is folded out,
movement in the rear is only detected to a lim-
ited extent.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
2 seconds: thorized action occurred.
The alarm system is switched on. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec- ▷ In car washes.

onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec- ▷ In duplex garages.
onds: ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor at sea or on a trailer.
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
access points are secured.
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
interior motion sensor
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with. within 10 seconds as soon as the
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking vehicle is locked.
until drive-ready state is switched on, but The indicator light lights up for approx.
no longer than approx. 5 minutes: 2 seconds and then continues to flash.
An alarm has been deployed. ▷ After turning off the standby state, an
option to turn off the interior motion sensor
and the tilt alarm sensor will be displayed
Tilt alarm sensor
on the control display.
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
The alarm system responds in situations such sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi- again.
cle is towed.
Ending the alarm
Interior motion sensor
Unlock the vehicle.
The vehicle interior is monitored.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
The alarm system responds when movement key, the drive readiness must subsequently be
is detected in the vehicle interior. turned on via the emergency detection of the
vehicle key.
98
Window On the external door handle
Principle
General information
The windows can be closed using the external
When a window is frequently opened to the door handle without operating the vehicle key.
same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For in- The vehicle key is automatically detected near
stance when the same parking garage is fre- the vehicle.
quently used.
General information
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 53. Depending on the national-market version, the
windows can also be closed at the external
door handle with compatible smartphones with
Safety information
digital key.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in- Functional prerequisites
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance
that the travel path of the windows is clear
in your pants pocket.
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-
With the vehicle key ital key.
Opening windows Closing the windows

Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The windows open for as long as the button

on the vehicle key is pressed.
Closing the windows

With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key after lock-
ing. Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed front door with your
The windows close for as long as the button finger and hold it there without grasping the
on the vehicle key is pressed. recessed grip.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
In addition to locking, the windows also closed.
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
switched on. in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
99
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are The window closes while the switch is be-
switched on. ing held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist-
In the interior ance point.
The window closes automatically.
Overview Pulling again stops the motion.
Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
Power windows General information

If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
The windows can be operated under the fol- Safety information
lowing conditions.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Warning
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside nas can impact jam protection. There is a
of the vehicle. risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.
Opening windows
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point. Closing without the jam protection
The window opens while the switch
system
is being held. In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist-
lows:
ance point.
The window opens automatically. 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec-
Closing the windows tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance threshold, closing is interrupted.
point. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
100
The window closes without jam protection. Functional requirement

The affected window must be closed.
Window roller sunblinds Operation
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows Driver's door

1. "MENU"
General information
2. "Vehicle apps"
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent, for instance, children from op-
erating the roller sunblinds at the rear using 4. "Sun blinds"
BMW Touch Command. 5. Select the desired function.
Overview Rear doors

Apply the setting using BMW Touch Com-
Driver's door mand.
1. Tap on the icon.

The main menu is displayed.
2. "Sun blinds"
3. To open or close, tap the desired side sun
protection on the display with your finger.
Press the button to open the menu for

doors and windows.
Rear doors
If the roller sunblind on the display is touched

again while the roller sunblind is moving, it will
move in the opposite direction.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller
sunblinds after having activated them consec-
utively a number of times, the overheating pro-
BMW Touch Command for operating the roller tection mechanism is active. The system is dis-
sunblinds. abled for a limited time to prevent overheating.
Let the system cool down.
101
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low Overview of rear door

interior temperatures.
Rear window roller sunblind
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent, for instance, children from op-
erating the roller sunblinds in the rear using
BMW Touch Command.
Additional information: BMW Touch Command for operating the roller
Safety switch, refer to page 103. sunblind on the rear window.
Safety information Operation
Driver's door
NOTICE
1. "MENU"
When operating the roller sunblind, objects
2. "Vehicle apps"
stored on the rear shelf may damage the
roller sunblind. There is a risk of damage 3. "Doors and windows"
to property, among other potential damage. 4. "Sun blinds"
Make sure that the area of movement of the 5. Select the desired function.
roller sunblind is clear during the operation.
Rear doors
Overview of driver's door 1. Tap on the icon.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Sun blinds"
3. Touch the rear window sun protection on
the display with your finger until the rear
window sun protection is closed or open.
Press the button to open the menu for

doors and windows.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller
sunblind after having activated it consecutively
102
a number of times, the overheating protection Turning the safety functions on/off
mechanism is active. The system is disabled
for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let Press the button.
the system cool down. The LED lights up if the safety function
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low is switched on.
interior temperatures.
Glass sunroof
Safety switch
Principle
Principle The glass sunroof sun protection can be
With the safety switch, it is possible to disable opened or closed.
particular functions in the rear. The locking of
functions is useful, for instance, when children With the vehicle key
or animals are carried in the rear.
Opening the sun protection
General information
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
The following functions can be disabled by cle key after unlocking.
pressing the safety switch:
▷ Open and close the rear windows using the The glass sunroof sun protection is opened
switches in the rear or with the vehicle key. as long as the button on the vehicle key is
▷ Open and close the roller sunblinds. pressed.
▷ Opening of rear doors by passengers in the
rear.
Closing the sun protection
The rear doors can only be opened from With Comfort Access: press and hold
the outside. the button on the vehicle key in close
range of the vehicle after locking.
▷ Unfold the BMW Theater Screen.
The glass sunroof sun protection is closed
Overview as long as the button on the vehicle key is
pressed.
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
On the external door handle
Principle
Safety switch
The sun protection can be closed using the
external door handle without operating the ve-
hicle key.
103
The vehicle key is automatically detected near In the interior

the vehicle.
Button in the headliner
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access. Overview
sun protection can also be closed with the ex-
ternal door handle using a compatible smart-
phone with a digital key.
Functional prerequisites
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance
in your pants pocket. Opening/closing the sun protec-
tion.
phone to close the sun protection using the
digital key.
Closing the sun protection

Operation
▷ Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
The sun protection is closed
as long as the switch is held
down.
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
Holding down the switch opens the sun
Touch the grooved surface on the external protection.
door handle of a closed front door with your ▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance
finger and hold it there without grasping the point.
recessed grip.
The sun protection closes automatically.
Besides locking the vehicle, the windows and
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
sun protection will be closed and locked.
▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not The sun protection opens automatically.
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
switched on.
104
Button in driver's door The main menu is displayed.

2. "Sun blinds"
Overview
3. Use your finger to select the roof sun pro-
tection on the display.
Jump directly to the menu "Doors and

windows". 4. Drag the bar down or up and make the de-
sired adjustment.
Operation ▷ Drag the bar down:
1. "MENU" Close the sun protection.
2. "Vehicle apps" ▷ Drag the bar upward:
3. "Doors and windows" Open the sun protection.
4. "Sun blinds"
The sun protection can be operated under the
BMW Touch Command in the rear following conditions:
doors ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Overview The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
BMW Touch Command for operating the roller

sunblind.
Operation
1. Tap on the icon.
105
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes model-specific equip- With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
ment, systems and functions that are available the protective effect of the seat belt can no
now and will be available in the future, even if longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
they are not available in the owned vehicle. under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
Additional information: risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
Sitting safely ing.
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of

the occupants can make a vital contribution to Warning
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. There is a danger of jamming when moving
In the event of an accident, the correct seat the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
position plays an important role. Follow the in- of damage to property. Make sure that the
formation in the following chapters. travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
▷ Seats, refer to page 106.
▷ Seat belts, refer to page 112. Adjusting seats
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 115.
General information
▷ Airbags, refer to page 180.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Seats, front
Overview
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
The switches for the seat settings are located
at the front doors.
106
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seat settings menu Adjusting seat tilt
The seat adjustment menu button is located Tilt switch up or down.

on the front door.
Press the button to go directly to the Adjusting backrest tilt

seat settings menu on the control dis-
play.
Setting the longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position

automatically
Press switch forward or backward.
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
Adjusting the height
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
Activate/deactivate the function

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Seat comfort"
Press switch up or down. 4. Select driver’s seat.

107
Thigh support The curvature is increased/decreased.

▷ Press arrow up/down:
Multifunctional seat The curvature is shifted up/down.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Functional limitations
3. "Seat comfort" The lumbar support cannot be adjusted at very
low temperatures.
4. Select desired seat.
Backrest width
Principle
Comfort function
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
Principle
The thigh rest adjusts automatically when the General information
longitudinal direction is adjusted.
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Activate/deactivate the function
When exiting the vehicle, the backrest width
1. "MENU"
opens completely. The last set position is au-
2. "Vehicle apps" tomatically applied before you start driving.
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat. Adjusting the backrest width
5. Select the desired setting. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Lumbar support 3. "Seat comfort"
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar 6. Select the desired setting.
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright sitting position. Upper backrest
Adjusting the lumbar support Principle

1. "MENU" The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a
2. "Vehicle apps"
relaxed seat position and reduces strain on the
3. "Seat comfort" shoulder muscles.
5. Select the desired function. General information
6. Select the desired setting: When exiting the vehicle, the upper backrest
moves all the way back. The last set position is
▷ Press arrow left/right:
automatically applied before you start driving.
108
Adjusting the upper backrest Safety information

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Warning
3. "Seat comfort" There is a danger of jamming when moving
4. Select desired seat. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
6. Select the desired setting. adjustment.
Seat massage
Calibrating the front seat
Principle 1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
The seat massage ensures relaxed muscles ward until the seat stops.
and better blood circulation in the lumbar re- 2. Press the switch forward again until the
gion and can avoid fatigue. seat stops.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
Turning the seat massage on/off
As soon as the message on the control dis-
1. "MENU" play disappears, the calibration is complete.
2. "Vehicle apps" If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
3. "Seat comfort" bration.
4. Select desired seat. If the message is still shown after repeated
calibration, have the system checked by a
5. "Massage"
qualified authorized service center or another
6. "Seat massage" qualified service center or repair shop.
The seat massage is stopped when the lumbar
support is operated.
Rear seats
Functional limitations General information
The massage function is not available at very Adjust the seat settings using BMW Touch
low temperatures. Command.
The following seat settings can be changed:
Calibrating the front seats ▷ Longitudinal direction.
▷ Seat tilt.
General information
▷ Backrest tilt.
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message ▷ Upper backrest.
is displayed on the control display. ▷ Lumbar support.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set- ▷ Executive Lounge Seating.
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
▷ Seat massage.
109
Safety information gion of the spine. The lower back and spine
are supported to promote an upright sitting po-
sition.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when folding Functional limitations
down the center armrest in the rear. There The lumbar support cannot be adjusted at very
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area low temperatures.
of movement of the center armrest is clear
during folding down.
Executive Lounge Seating
Overview Principle
The Executive Lounge Seating function ena-
bles rear passengers on the front passenger’s
side to travel more comfortably, e.g., by adjust-
ing different seat functions.
General information
The first time the seat is used, the seat posi-
tion must be set manually and then saved us-
ing the memory function.
BMW Touch Command is located in the door
handle of the rear doors. Memory function, refer to page 120.
Safety information
Adjusting the seats
1. "Seats"
Warning
2. "Adjustment"
If the front passenger seat is set too far for-
ward, the view from the front passenger win-
4. Select the desired function. dow may be restricted, e.g., on the exterior
5. Select the desired setting. mirror. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
the front passenger seat such that the view
Upper backrest from the front passenger window is not ob-
structed.
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a
relaxed seat position and reduces strain on the
shoulder muscles.
Lumbar support
General information
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re-
110
Overview The front passenger seat can only be adjusted

if no one is sitting on it.
1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
For maximum legroom in the rear, proceed as
follows:
Apply the setting using BMW Touch Com-
1. Lower the height of the front passenger
mand.
seat.
2. Tilt the front passenger seat backrest for-
Adjusting the seat position ward.
1. "Seats" 3. Lower the front passenger seat head re-
2. "Adjustment" straint.
3. Select desired seat. 4. Move the front passenger seat forward.
4. Select the desired function. 5. Raise the heel rest of the front passenger
5. Select the desired setting. seat.
When using for the first time, save the seat

Calf rest
position with the memory function.
If there is sufficient distance between the front
1. Select the desired seat setting. passenger seat and rear seat, the calf rest in
2. "SET" the rear can be folded out.
The calf rest folds down with excessive loads,
for instance when a heavy object is placed on
3. Tap on the icon.
it. To return to the initial position, grasp the calf
rest with both hands and lift until it clicks into
Retrieving the seat position place.
1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment" Heel rest
If there is sufficient distance between the front
passenger seat and rear seat, the heel rest in
3. Tap on the icon.
the rear can be folded out.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
from the rear
Base position
The front passenger seat can be operated Principle
from the rear, for instance to increase the leg-
room in the rear. In the base position, the backrest is moved to
an upright position.
111
Moving to the base position Comfort entry

1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment" Principle
The seat position can be adjusted automati-
3. Tap on the icon. cally to make it easier to get in and out of the
vehicle.
Seat massage
General information
Principle Front seats:
The seat massage ensures relaxed muscles ▷ The backrest width completely opens tem-
and better blood circulation in the lumbar re- porarily.
gion and can avoid fatigue. ▷ The seat moves back.
Rear seats:
Turning the seat massage on/off
▷ The seat moves to the base position.
1. "Seats"
▷ The calf rest and heel rest move down.
2. "Massage"
3. "On" Activating/deactivating the setting
Front seats:
Functional limitations 1. "MENU"

The massage function is not available at very 2. "Vehicle apps"
low temperatures. 3. "Comfort entry"
Locking the rear seats
Rear seats:
Principle 1. "Seats"
The rear seat adjustment functions can be 2. "Adjustment"
locked via the control display. Locking func- 3. "Comfort exit"
tions is useful, for instance, when children or
animals are carried in the rear.
Activating/deactivating the setting Seat belts

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" General information
3. "Seat comfort" The vehicle is fitted with four or five seat belts
4. "Lock rear seats" to ensure occupants' safety. However, they
5. Select the desired setting. can only offer protection when adjusted cor-
rectly.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
112
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re- ▷ The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
place seat belts. damaged, soiled, or changed in any
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to other way.
achieve the best possible protective effect for ▷ Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-
the seat belts when used properly and with the nism were modified.
correct seat settings. Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear in the event of an accident. There is a risk
seats are intended for the persons sitting on of injury or danger to life. Do not modify
the left and right. seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt ten-
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is sioners, roll-up mechanisms, or belt anchors
intended for the person sitting in the middle. and keep them clean. Have the seat belts
checked after an accident at the authorized
service center or another qualified service
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 106. center or repair shop.
Safety information
Correct use of seat belts
Warning ▷ Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of ▷ Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
the seat belt to serve its protective function. your lap. The seat belt must not press on
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. your stomach.
Do not strap in more than one person per ▷ Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
single seat belt. Infants and children are not edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be or fragile objects.
transported and secured in designated child ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
restraint systems.
▷ Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
Warning
seat belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
113
Buckling the seat belt Display in the instrument cluster

1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
and hip to put it on. minates after turning on the drive-ready state
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt when the seat belt reminder is active.
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage A Check Control message is displayed where
audibly. applicable. Check whether the seat belt has
been fastened correctly.
Icon Meaning
Seat belt on the driver's seat is

not buckled.
Seat belt on the passenger

seat or another seat in the ve-
hicle is not buckled.
When the seat belt is fastened, the driver's and Seat belt is buckled on the cor-
front passenger's belt straps are automatically responding seat.
tightened once after driving away.
Seat belt is not buckled on the
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
corresponding seat.
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Rear seat reminder system
Unbuckling the seat belt
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly. Principle
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle. At the end of a trip, the system informs the
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up driver of the possible presence of occupants on
mechanism. the rear seats.
Seat belt reminder General information

If a door with access to the rear row seating
General information is operated within 30 minutes before starting
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned off, a message appears on the control display
correctly. when the trip is completed and a signal tone
sounds.
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations: If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the
message is displayed again after the trip has
▷ When the seat belt on the driver's side or
been completed.
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
▷ When the seat belt is unfastened while driv- Activate/deactivate the function
ing.
1. "MENU"
▷ When objects are lying on a seat.
114
3. Rear seat reminder system ▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
4. Select the desired setting. termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
Front head restraints pillows, while driving.
Safety information Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a
Warning certain severity, the active head restraint auto-
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re- matically reduces the distance from the head.
straints can cause injuries in the head and Have the active head restraint checked and if
neck area. There is a risk of injury. necessary replaced in the case of damage or if
▷ Before driving, install the removed head it was exposed to an accident.
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
Adjusting the height
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the Press switch up or down.
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when Adjusting the distance: Manual
moving the head restraint.
head restraints
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
115
After setting the distance, make sure that the

head restraint engages correctly. Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
Setting the distance: Multi-function tective effect in the head and neck area.
seat There is a risk of injury.
The distance to the back of the head is ad- ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
justed via the backrest inclination. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint hangers, directly on the head restraint.
is as close as possible to the back of the head. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
Removing the head restraints head restraint.
The head restraints cannot be removed. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Rear head restraints Folding down the middle head

restraint
Safety information
General information
Warning To improve the view to the rear, the center
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re- head restraint can be folded to the rear. Only
straints can cause injuries in the head and push the head restraint down if no one will be
neck area. There is a risk of injury. sitting in the center seat.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head

Folding down the head restraint
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning ▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and

fold the head restraint backward.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make ▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
sure that the area of movement is clear when front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
moving the head restraint. head restraint engages correctly.
116
Adjusting the height: Manual head Pillow for head restraints in the rear
restraint
General information
Cushions can be attached to the outer head
restraints for increased comfort while driving.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of the head restraints
may be limited or counteracted if the cushion
The height of the head restraints can be ad- is incorrectly fitted. There is a risk of injury.
justed. Make sure that the top edge of the cushion is
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and below the mark.
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Attaching cushions
After setting the height, make sure that the
1. Attach the cushion with the clip to the tab
head restraint engages correctly.
on the back of the head restraint.
Adjusting the height: Electric head

restraints
General information
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows has been pressed.
Safety switch, refer to page 103. 2. Bring the head restraint to a sufficiently
high position.
Adjusting the height 3. Close the push-buttons.
1. "Seats"
Removing the head restraint

The head restraints cannot be removed.
117
Adjusting the height Overview
Grasp the cushion with both hands and slide it Icon Meaning
up or down.
Adjust the height so that the top edge of the Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
cushion is below the mark, arrow 1.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Exterior mirrors
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic
General information Curb Monitor.
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror. Select right exterior mirror.
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically. Press the button.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be The selected exterior mirror moves
stored using the memory function. along with the button movement.
Safety information Selecting the exterior mirror

▷ Press the button to select the left
Warning exterior mirror. The LED lights up.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users ▷ Press the button to select the right
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in- exterior mirror. The LED lights up.
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk
of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-
Malfunction
fic behind by looking over your shoulder.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
118
Folding in/folding out the exterior Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor
mirrors
1. Press the button. The LED lights up.
NOTICE 2. Engage selector lever position R.
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a Deactivating the Automatic Curb
risk of damage to property, among other po- Monitor
tential damage. Before washing, fold in the
Press the button. The LED lights up
mirrors by hand or with the button.
and the LED of the driver’s side outside
mirror goes out.
Press the button.
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx. Interior mirror, automatic

15 mph/20 km/h. dimming feature
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations: General information
▷ In car washes. The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
▷ On narrow roads. Photocells are used for control:
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded ▷ In the mirror glass.
out automatically at a speed of approx.
▷ On the rear of the mirror.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating Overview

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor

Principle ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This mirror and the windshield.
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
119
Steering wheel Turning the steering wheel heating

on/off
Safety information 1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
climate control bar.
2. steering wheel heating.
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is Memory function
a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
Electric steering wheel adjustment necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
General information ▷ Seat position.
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the ▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
▷ Steering wheel position.
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up ▷ Lumbar support position.
automatically. ▷ Depending on the equipment: height of the
The current steering wheel position can be Head-up display.
stored using the memory function.
To make it easier to enter and get out of the Safety information
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily
into the upper position.
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
Adjusting the steering wheel position
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back of damage to property. Make sure that the
position and height of the steering wheel to the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
seat position. adjustment.
120
Memory function, front Memory function, rear
Overview Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front The memory function is operated via BMW
doors. Touch Command.
Icon Meaning Icon Meaning
SET button SET button
Memory button 1 Memory button 1
Memory button 2 Memory button 2
Memory button 3
Storing settings
Stores the position of the rear seat
1. Set the desired position. and front passenger seat
2. Press the button. The LED lights up. Storing settings

3. Press the desired memory button as long 1. Set the desired position.
as the LED is lit. A signal sounds. 2. "SET"
3. Press the desired memory button.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button. Calling up settings
The stored position is called up. Press the desired memory button.
The procedure stops when a seat setting The stored position is called up.
switch or one of the memory buttons is
The seat position saved for button 3 can only
pressed again.
be applied if the front passenger seat is not
The adjustment of the seat position on the occupied.
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
121
The procedure stops when a seat setting

switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
Seat climate control

Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Climate operation, refer to page 271.
122
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely

Warning
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
ment, systems and functions that are available restraint systems and their components to
now and will be available in the future, even if become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
they are not available in the owned vehicle. injuries when touching the hot components.
Additional information: There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
The right place for children transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
Safety information
Children in the rear seat
Warning
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions: Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
▷ Releasing the parking brake. tems designed for the age, weight and size
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
dows. must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Safety information
exiting and lock the vehicle. Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
Warning suitable additional child restraint systems.
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons, seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
especially children, or animals. There is a belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
persons, especially children, or animals unat- ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
tended in the vehicle. braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
123
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child Safety information

restraint systems.
Warning
Children on the front passenger The protective effect of child restraint sys-
seat tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
General information can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
Before using a child restraint system on the
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
of injury or danger to life.
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated. Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
If a child restraint system and its fastening
airbags, refer to page 182.
system has been damaged or exposed to
an accident, have these systems checked
Safety information
and replaced by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
Warning shop.
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. Warning
Make sure that the front passenger airbags The stability of the child restraint system is
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER limited or compromised with incorrect seat
AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
Installing child restraint securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
systems and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
General information
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
124
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating the airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-
senger seat belt can be permanently locked to
Before installing a child restraint system in the fasten child restraint systems.
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
Locking the seat belt
are deactivated.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
seat belt.
airbags, refer to page 182.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
Seat position and height
The seat belt is disabled.
After mounting a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
Unlocking the seat belt
go and, if possible, to the lowest position. This
seat position and height ensure the best pos- 1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
sible position for the belt and offers optimal 2. Remove the child restraint system.
protection in the event of an accident. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
After mounting a universal child restraint sys- pletely.
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that
the belt is not constrained.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
LATCH child restraint fixing
is located in front of the belt guide of the child system
restraint seat, move the front passenger seat
carefully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
Backrest width dren.
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a Pay attention to the specifications, operating
child restraint system on the front passenger tips and safety instructions from the child re-
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do straint system manufacturer when selecting,
not change the backrest width again and do installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-
not call up a memory position. ing systems.
125
Mounts for lower anchors Position
General information Icon Meaning

The lower anchors may be used to attach the The corresponding icon shows
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child the mounts for the lower
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child LATCH anchors.
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Seats equipped with lower
mountings are marked with a
Safety information pair (2) of LATCH icons.
For vehicles equipped with a
Warning middle seat:
If the lower mountings of the child restraint It is not recommended to use
system are not correctly engaged, the protec- the inner lower mountings of
tive effect of the child restraint system is lim- standard outer LATCH posi-
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to tions to fasten a child restraint
life. Make sure that the lower mountings are system on the middle seat.
correctly engaged and that the child restraint Use the vehicle seat belt in-
system fits securely against the backrest. stead for the middle seat.
Before attaching child restraint

Warning systems
The mounts for the lower mountings and at- Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
tachment points of the child restraint system child seat mountings.
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the Installing child restraint systems
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam- 1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
age to property. Only attach child restraint turer's information.
systems at the corresponding mounts for the 2. Make sure that the child restraint system
lower mountings or attachment points. mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
With comfort rear seats: installation

of child restraint systems
To mount the child restraint system in the rear,
set the standard position. The function is oper-
ated via BMW Touch Command.
1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. "Reset"
When the desired position is reached, a
message is displayed:
126
"Default reached"
To facilitate installation, you may need to Warning
change additional settings: The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
1. Tilt the backrest slightly backward. tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
2. Mount child restraint system, see manufac- tems only. If other objects are attached, the
turer's information. mounts or attachment points can be dam-
3. Make sure that the child restraint system aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an- age to property. Only attach child restraint
chor on both sides. systems at the corresponding mounts for the
4. After installation, move the backrest back lower mountings or attachment points.
up slightly so that the child restraint system
rests lightly against the backrest.
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Child restraint systems with
tether strap Icon Meaning
The respective icon shows the

Safety information attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
Warning with this icon. It is located on
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used the rear seat backrest, the rear
for the child restraint system, the protective shelf or the rear seat.
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap Routing the retaining strap
does not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes the upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
1 Driving direction
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests 2 Head restraint
are locked. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
5 Rear shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
127
Attaching the upper retaining strap

to the attachment point
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports or along both sides of the
head restraint to the attachment point.
For the middle seat, guide it over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the at-
tachment point where applicable.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
Button in vehicle
Press the button. The LED is illumi-

nated when the safety function is
turned on.
The rear windows and doors are locked and
cannot be operated in the rear.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
128
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and options The electrical energy partially recharges the
high-voltage battery to increase the range.
This chapter describes model-specific equip- ▷ The rear electric motor drives the rear
ment, systems and functions that are available wheels.
now and will be available in the future, even if With xDrive, the vehicle features electrical
they are not available in the owned vehicle. all-wheel drive. As such, the front wheels
Additional information: are driven by a second electric motor.
Overview
BMW eDRIVE
Principle
BMW eDRIVE is the designation for the elec-
tric drive technology. The vehicle features a
high-voltage system that consists of an electric
motor on the rear axle and a high-voltage bat-
tery, among other things. With xDrive, a sec-
ond electric motor is located on the front axle. 1 High-voltage cables, orange
2 Charging socket
General information 3 Drive unit, rear
The system exhibits the following special fea- 4 High-voltage battery
tures:
5 With xDrive: drive unit, front
▷ Vehicle operation is emissions-free using
the electrical drivetrain.
▷ The special high-voltage battery supplies
Functions
the electric motors and the comfort features
with energy. Electric driving: eDRIVE
▷ The high-voltage battery is charged via a The vehicle is driven electrically.
charging cable, for instance when parked or The accelerator pedal can be used for acceler-
while driving utilizing energy recovery. ation and deceleration.
▷ The vehicle can be charged very rapidly at During deceleration, the electric motors act as
special charging stations. Charging is also alternators and charge the high-voltage bat-
possible at domestic socket outlets. tery. With a sensible driving style, this function
▷ On the go, the energy recovery ensures can be used for especially efficient energy re-
that only little energy is lost when braking. covery and comfortable driving, using just the
accelerator pedal.
▷ When the vehicle decelerates, the electric
motors act as alternators and convert the
kinetic energy released into electric energy.
129
CONTROLS Driving
Energy recovery: CHARGE Trip planning and special functions of

The high-voltage battery is charged while driv- the navigation system
ing through energy recovery. Several special functions of the navigation sys-
The electric motors act as alternators and con- tem support trip planning taking into account
vert the kinetic energy of the vehicle into elec- the electric range:
trical energy. ▷ The current range can be displayed in the
The high-voltage battery can be charged while navigation system map view.
driving in different situations: ▷ When entering a destination, charging sta-
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de- tions can be selected as points of interest.
pressed. The navigation system helps you to find
and add a charging station along the de-
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
sired route.
▷ The pressure on the accelerator pedal is
strongly reduced.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
Displays in the instrument cluster ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
The displays on the instrument cluster provide

During driving
information about the current state of the drive
and visualize the system's use. ▷ Activate Efficient mode to increase the ve-
hicle range.
Efficient mode, refer to page 139.
Displays, refer to page 149.
▷ Note the information on the expected
range.
Energy-saving driving and
maximizing the range Range prediction, refer to page 167.
▷ Note the information on the current driving
General information condition.
Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequisite Displays in the Live Vehicle menu, driving
for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE pro- condition, refer to page 168.
vides various functions that assist with an ▷ Note the information on the range.
energy-saving driving style. The eDRIVE func- Increasing the range, refer to page 306.
tions assist in checking the range and increase
it, if necessary. ▷ Note the information on the driving style.
Driving mode Efficient, refer to page 308.
Before driving ▷ Activate adaptive energy recovery.
eDRIVE allows pre-conditioning of the vehicle Adaptive recuperation, recuperative brak-
before starting the trip. The stationary climate ing, refer to page 307.
control provides more range than using full air ▷ Follow the Efficiency Coach instructions.
conditioning while driving.
Efficiency trainer, refer to page 309.
Depending on vehicle equipment: preheat-
ing/precooling during the charging process can
After the trip
provide maximum range when driving off.
▷ Charge the vehicle and plan the next trip.
Stationary climate control, refer to page 281.
130
Driving CONTROLS
Charge vehicle, refer to page 312. Start/Stop button

▷ Observe preparations extended stationary
periods.
Principle
Service life of the high-voltage battery, long
stationary periods, and taking the vehicle Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-
out of service, refer to page 323. ready state on or off.
BMW app General information

The BMW app provides mobility-based serv- Drive-ready state is switched on when you de-
ices and applications. press the brake pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.
Safety of the high-voltage system Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby
Follow the information on the safety of the
state is switched back on.
high-voltage system.
Drive-ready state cannot be switched on as
long as the charging cable is connected.
Safety of the high-voltage system, refer to
page 16.
▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.
Operating noises ▷ Standby state, refer to page 42.
Operating noises may occur due to the elec- ▷ Charging cable, refer to page 314.
trical system. For instance, these operating
noises may occur in the following situations: Acoustic pedestrian protection
▷ When cooling the high-voltage battery dur- Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
ing the charging process. market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection
▷ When cooling the high-voltage battery with generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-
the drive-ready state switched on. cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.
▷ When climatizing the car's interior. ▷ With a stationary vehicle and drive readi-
ness turned on, as soon as the selector
lever position P is exited.
High-voltage battery, long
stationary periods ▷ With electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
Observe the information on taking the vehicle
out of service and on longer idle periods. A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
environment. As a result, other road users,
Additional information: for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better
Service life of the high-voltage battery, long perceive the vehicle.
stationary periods, refer to page 323.
131
CONTROLS Driving
Drive-ready state in detail ▷ The state of high-voltage battery charge is

sufficient.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
Safety information
▷ Charging cable is detached.
Warning Driving
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away. 3. Engage selector lever position D, B or R.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured 4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.
State of charge in strong temperature
▷ Set the parking brake.
fluctuations
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations
turn the front wheels in the direction of
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage
the curb.
battery, it may not be possible to start the ve-
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, hicle again at the beginning of the next trip.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with Recharge vehicle with a low state of charge in
a wheel chock. time.
Turning on the drive-ready state Selector lever positions

Display
The engaged selector lever position is dis-
3. Press the Start/Stop button. played in the instrument cluster and on the
A signal tone sounds. Drive-ready state is selector lever.
switched on.
Gear position D
Display in the instrument cluster Selector lever position for normal driving.
The READY display indicates The vehicle drives off slowly when the brake
that the vehicle is ready for driv- pedal is released.
ing.
R reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Driving off
N neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
Driving is possible when the following prereq- power, for instance in car washes, in selector
uisites are met: lever position N.
132
Driving CONTROLS
Parking position P Engaging selector lever positions

Selector lever position for parking the vehicle.
In selector lever position P, the drivetrain is General information
blocked and the parking brake is engaged. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
Selector lever position P is engaged automati- you select a gear position or reverse, main-
cally in situations such as the following: tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off ready to drive off.
and selector lever position D, R or B is en-
gaged. Functional requirements
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the ▷ Only when the drive-ready state is switched
driver's door is opened, and neither brake on and the brake pedal is depressed is it
nor accelerator pedal are depressed when possible to change from selector lever posi-
drive-ready state is switched on and the tion P to another selector lever position.
selector lever is set to position D, R, or B. ▷ The selection lever position P cannot be
▷ With standby state turned off. changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the ▷ Before shifting out of selector lever position
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi- P, remove the charging cable from the vehi-
cle may begin to move. cle; otherwise, the gearshift request will not
be executed.
Parking brake, refer to page 141. Engage selector lever position R, N, D,
B
B, gear position with high energy
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
recovery
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
Principle direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
The selector lever automatically returns to
Selector lever position B is a gear position with
the center position when released.
a high energy recovery.
Changing between selector lever position D
General information and B: pull selector lever to D/B.
Selector lever position B offers the following

characteristics:
▷ High level of energy recovery when the ac-
celerator pedal is released.
▷ Major deceleration when releasing the ac-
celerator pedal, if necessary to a standstill
of the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle does not drive off when the
brake pedal is released.
133
CONTROLS Driving
Engaging selector lever position P Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
Press the button. 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

on the brake pedal.
The transmission lock is engaged and
the parking brake is engaged. 2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
When stopping the vehicle 4. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
Selector lever position D or R on, and a Check Control message is dis-
On inclines, the system prevents rolling back played.
against the set driving direction and provides The vehicle can roll.
drive-off support. Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after ap-
Selector lever position B prox. 35 minutes.
The system prevents the vehicle from rolling If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
away when the vehicle has come to a standstill to change the selector lever position.
and the accelerator pedal is not pressed.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Driving off
Engage a gear position and step on the accel- Electronic unlocking of the
erator pedal to drive off. transmission lock
The parking brake is released automatically.
General information
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Unlock the transmission lock electroni-
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a
General information hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
roll without its own power for a short distance, the vehicle against rolling away, for instance
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed. with a wheel chock.
134
Driving CONTROLS
Engaging selector lever position N ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three actively intervene where appropriate.
times without stepping on the brake.
Warning
3. Press the selector lever to position N.
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians
An appropriate Check Control message is
and other road users might pay less attention
displayed.
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
Position N is indicated on the selector lever. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic
area and secure it against rolling away. closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate.
Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical sys-
tem such as for cooling the high-voltage sys- Warning
tem might still be audible. Without energy recovery, the braking effect of
After stopping the vehicle: the electric motor is unavailable. The vehicle
could roll further than anticipated. There is a
1. Apply brake and engage the parking brake. risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
2. Press the Start/Stop button. conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
The READY indicator goes out and a signal and actively intervene where appropriate.
tone sounds.
If leaving the vehicle stationary for longer pe-
Accelerator pedal positions,
riods, follow the instructions in the Mobility
chapter. displays
Service life of the high-voltage battery, long
stationary periods, and taking the vehicle out
of service, refer to page 323.
Driving in detail: eDRIVE

Safety information
1 Deceleration and energy recovery,
CHARGE
DANGER 2 Rolling
The braking effect of the electric motor can 3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePOWER
be stronger than for a vehicle with combus-
tion engine. Abrupt braking and slow-down
may confuse other road users. There is a
risk of accident. Carefully release the acceler-
ator pedal. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
135
CONTROLS Driving
Deceleration and recuperative ▷ The vehicle is moving.

braking ▷ Selector lever position B, D or R is set.
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed or
Deceleration only slightly depressed.
The degree of the deceleration depends on The energy recovery is displayed in the instru-
the selector lever position, the energy recovery ment cluster.
setting and the driving situation. Additional information:
Depending on the degree of the deceleration, Power gauge, refer to page 160.
the brake lights will come on without stepping
on the brake pedal. Energy cannot be recovered in the following
situations, for instance:
Deceleration is very pronounced in selector
lever position B. ▷ Selector lever position N is engaged.
During the deceleration, energy is recovered ▷ While drive stability control systems are ac-
and the high-voltage battery is charged. tive or adjusting the vehicle, even though
this is not indicated by an indicator light.
Reduced deceleration ▷ The high-voltage battery is fully charged.
▷ When temperature of the high-voltage bat-
tery is very low or very high.
Warning
In winter the energy recovery may be tem-
Without energy recovery, the braking effect of
porarily unavailable after startup.
the electric motor is unavailable. The vehicle
could roll further than anticipated. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
Driving situations for energy recovery
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely If deceleration is foreseeable while driving, this
and actively intervene where appropriate. can be used for energy recovery.
The following driving situations may be suita-
In the event of danger, such as with locked ble for this:
wheels, energy recovery and thus deceleration ▷ Decelerating downhill.
is reduced in order to prevent unstable driving
▷ Deceleration before a red traffic light.
situations.
Avoid late or strong braking. Instead, deceler-
Energy recovery: CHARGE ate the vehicle using energy recovery.
Energy recovery is also called recuperation.
Strength of recuperative braking
With the CHARGE energy recovery, the electric
In selector lever position B, the energy recov-
motors act as alternators when decelerating
ery is high and the deceleration is pronounced.
and convert the kinetic energy of the vehicle to
electrical energy. For driving in selector lever position D, the
strength of recuperative braking can be ad-
The high-voltage battery is recharged in part
justed via iDrive.
through energy recovery.
▷ Depending on the equipment, adaptive en-
Energy can be recovered if the following condi-
ergy recovery: energy recovery and decel-
tions are met:
eration are automatically adapted to the re-
spective driving situation.
136
Driving CONTROLS
Adaptive recuperation, recuperative brak- battery. The ePOWER power gauge in the in-
ing, refer to page 307. strument cluster decreases.
▷ High energy recovery: The vehicle deceler- If the temperature increases further, park
ates fast, and more energy is returned to the vehicle until the high-voltage battery has
the high-voltage battery. cooled down.
▷ Average energy recovery. If the power gauge falls to 0, the drive-ready
▷ Low energy recovery: The vehicle deceler- state is switched off and the vehicle comes to a
ates more slowly, and less energy is re- stop.
turned to the high-voltage battery.
Setting the strength of energy recovery Launch Control

1. "MENU"
Principle
2. "Vehicle apps"
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
3. "Driving settings"
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
4. "Drivetrain and chassis" rounding conditions.
5. "Energy recovery in D"
6. Select the desired setting. General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
Heavily discharged high-voltage ponent wear since this function represents a
battery very heavy load for the vehicle.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis- Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
charged while driving, the drive power and with Launch Control.
some comfort features are reduced incremen- Do not use Launch Control when driving in the
tally in order to extend the range. vehicle.
Heated high-voltage battery Breaking-in period, refer to page 302.
With a stationary vehicle

Driving off with Launch Control
In isolated cases, when the vehicle is station-
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
ary, it is possible for the high-voltage battery to
overheat, for instance at extreme outside tem-
peratures and in direct sunlight. Drive-ready 2. Press the button.
state cannot be turned on if the high-voltage
3. "Switch mode"
battery is overheated.
4. Select drive mode: "SPORT".
A Check Control message is displayed.
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
Another message will indicate when drive-
the brake.
ready state is available again.
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way
While driving down and hold.
If the high-voltage battery overheats while

driving, the drive power is reduced incremen-
tally in order to cool down the high-voltage
137
CONTROLS Driving
A destination flag is displayed in the instru- Display in the instrument cluster

ment cluster.
7. Release the brake within a few seconds af-
ter the destination flag lights up.
The vehicle accelerates.
Launch Control remains active as long as
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-
celerator pedal is not withdrawn.
Sport Boost function ▷ Arrow 1: The function is active.

▷ Arrow 2: Countdown, the function is active.
Principle ▷ Arrow 3: The function is used for maximum
The function can be used for an upcoming ac- acceleration.
celeration, for example.
▷ Arrow 4: Display for additional currently
The system prepares the vehicle. available power.
The system may provide additional drive
power for a limited time.
Using the function
1. SPORT BOOST: Pull the shift paddle until
General information
this display appears, arrow 1.
This function is operated with the shift paddle
▷ The function is active.
on the steering wheel.
▷ A countdown is displayed on the instru-
Overview ment cluster, arrow 2.
2. Before the countdown changes to 0, press
the accelerator pedal.
▷ The vehicle accelerates and uses the
additional power provided as necessary.
▷ BOOST: This display is shown on the
instrument cluster, arrow 3.
▷ The instrument cluster shows how long
the additional power is available, ar-
row 4.
Shift paddle on steering wheel The countdown can be restarted, for example
if the function cannot be used immediately.
To restart the countdown, pull the shift paddle
again.
Stopping the function

The function is automatically stopped when
the countdown has run down to 0.
138
Driving CONTROLS
Deactivating the function Displays in the instrument cluster

SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the shift paddle If applicable, the driving mode
until this display goes out. selected is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
My Modes
Principle My Modes in detail
My Modes influence vehicle handling charac-
teristics and the staging of the overall experi- General information
ence in the interior. Various My Modes are available depending on
The vehicle can be adapted depending on the vehicle equipment.
situation using the various My Modes. My Modes that influence the handling charac-
teristics are also referred to as driving mode.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following Personal Mode
systems are affected, for instance: Driving mode for comfort oriented settings.
▷ Drivetrain.
Sport Mode
▷ Steering.
Driving mode for increased agility of the vehi-
▷ Chassis.
cle.
▷ Cruise control.
Individual settings can be entered, such as for
▷ Display in the instrument cluster. driving dynamics, chassis and drivetrain.
▷ Comfort features in the vehicle interior. "SPORT PLUS": with this setting under driving
▷ Drive sound. dynamics, the Dynamic Stability Control and
thereby the driving stability will be limited.
Overview ▷ Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 214.
Button in the vehicle ▷ Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 215.
Efficient Mode
Driving mode for a consumption optimized set-
ting with adaptive display.
Expressive Mode
Mode for impressive visualization and lively
ambient lighting effects in the vehicle interior.
My Modes Handling characteristics are set in a comfort-
oriented manner.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Relax Mode My Modes Design

Mode for relaxed driving with a pleasant am- Specific depictions of a mode can be shown on
biance. the Control Display under My Modes Design.
Handling characteristics are set in a comfort-
oriented manner.
1. Press the button.
Theater Mode 2. "My Modes design"
Mode for a luxurious entertainment experience
for rear-seat occupants. Operation in rear
Handling characteristics are set in a comfort-
oriented manner. General information
Some modes can be selected in the rear using
Selecting My Modes BMW Touch Command.
For safety reasons, it is not always possible to
change My Modes, e.g., when drive-off assis-
1. Press the button. tance is enabled or if vehicle handling is influ-
2. "Switch mode" enced as a result.
3. Select the desired mode.
Overview
Configuring My Modes
Some modes can be configured individually.

2. Select mode.
3. "Settings"
BMW Touch Command is located in the door

Changing the start mode handle of the rear doors.
Some modes can be set as the start mode.
The start mode set is enabled when drive
Selecting My Modes
readiness is switched on.
1. Tap on the icon.
2. "My Modes"
1. Press the button. 3. Select the desired mode.
2. Select mode. Additional information:
3. "Settings" BMW Touch Command, refer to page 57
4. "Set as start mode"
140
Driving CONTROLS
Parking brake Overview
Button in the vehicle

Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle Parking brake
against rolling away.
Setting the parking brake
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, With a stationary vehicle
the curb. Press the button.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, The LED lights up.

also secure the vehicle, for instance with
The indicator light in the instrument
a wheel chock.
cluster illuminates red.
The parking brake is engaged and
Warning transmission lock is engaged.
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger While driving
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the Use while driving serves as an emergency
following actions: braking function.
Press and hold this button. The vehicle
▷ Releasing the parking brake. brakes hard as long as the button is
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- pressed.
dows.
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
▷ Using vehicle equipment. and the brake lights illuminate.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not A Check Control message is displayed.
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when The parking brake is engaged and the trans-
exiting and lock the vehicle. mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-
ary.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Engaging the parking brake Using the parking brake via iDrive
automatically The parking brake can also be engaged or dis-
In some situations, the parking brake is en- engaged via iDrive. Additionally, further infor-
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic mation is displayed.
Hold.
1. "MENU"
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-
2. "Vehicle apps"
matically engaging the parking brake when the
drive readiness is turned off. 3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
1. "MENU"
5. "Parking brake"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Malfunction
5. "Parking brake"
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-
6. Select the desired setting. cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away
In selector lever position N, the parking brake before you exit.
will not be engaged automatically. A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
Releasing the parking brake stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle.
Releasing the parking brake manually
1. Turn on drive-ready state. After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after
2. Press the button while pressing on a power interruption, an initialization may be
the brake pedal. required.
The LED and the indicator light go out. 1. Turn on standby state.
The parking brake is released.
The transmission lock remains engaged 2. Press the button.
until a gear position is selected.
Releasing the parking brake 3. Press the button again after 2 sec-
onds.
automatically
The Check Control messages for the park-
The parking brake is released automatically
ing brake go out.
when you drive off.
Possible functional noises are normal.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The indicator light indicates that the
parking brake is ready for operation
again.
142
Driving CONTROLS
Automatic Hold
Warning
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati- themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
cally setting and releasing the brake, such as following actions:
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
is automatically held in place when it is station-
ary. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-
cle from rolling back when driving off. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
General information There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
The parking brake is automatically engaged leave children or animals unattended in the
under the following conditions: vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. exiting and lock the vehicle.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi-

cle is stationary. Overview
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
still using the parking brake. Button in the vehicle
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated.
Safety information
Warning
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away. Automatic Hold
▷ Set the parking brake. Activating Automatic Hold
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
the curb.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with The LED lights up.
a wheel chock. The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is activated.
143
CONTROLS Driving
After every vehicle restart, the last selected

setting is active.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
When driving and during operation of the turn
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
door is closed. in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
After stopping, the vehicle is automat- lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
ically secured against rolling away as
soon as the indicator light illuminates Blinking
green.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
Automatic parking brake application

Press the lever past the resistance point.
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle Triple turn signal activation
is exited. Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The indicator light changes from green The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
to red.
1. "MENU"
The parking brake is not set automatically if 2. "Vehicle apps"
the drive-ready state was switched off while 3. "Exterior lighting"
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
temporarily deactivated in this case.
5. "One-touch turn signal"
Deactivate Automatic Hold 6. Select the desired setting.
Press the button.

Brief blinking
The LED goes out.
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
The indicator light goes out.
to flash.
Automatic Hold is switched off.

High beams,
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press on the brake pedal when switching headlight flasher
off.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
144
Driving CONTROLS
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low Turning on window wiper system
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

cluster illuminates when the high
beams are turned on.
Window wiper system

Press the lever up until the desired position is
Safety information reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
Warning
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a When the journey is interrupted with the win-
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off continues, the wipers resume at their previous
when the wipers are in the folded-away state speed.
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-
age to property, among other potential dam-
age. Do not use the wipers when the window
is dry.
145
CONTROLS Driving
Turning off the window wiper Activating rain sensor

system and flick wipe
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-

Press the lever down or forward. row 1.
▷ Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1, Wiping operation is started.
until it reaches the 0 position. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in start.
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po- Deactivating rain sensor
sition when released.
Press lever back into the 0 position.
Rain sensor Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity
Safety information of the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
NOTICE Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Deactivate the rain
sensor in car washes.
146
Driving CONTROLS
Windshield washer system tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
Safety information tions.
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
Warning
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident. Only use the If the wipers start moving in the folded away
washer systems if the washer fluid cannot state, body parts can be jammed or damage
freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
needed. risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
NOTICE
on.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
NOTICE
other potential damage. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reser- If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
voir is empty. the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property,
Cleaning the windshield among other potential damage. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.
Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when
the wiper moves upward.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
147
CONTROLS Driving
Folding out the wipers

1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the

windshield.
Folding in the wipers

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
148
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle features and options center or by another qualified service center
or a repair shop.
Overview
Instrument cluster
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi- Instrument cluster
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperatures as well as indicator and warning Display ranges on the instrument
lights.
cluster
General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever
display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
1 Speedometer
Safety information
2 Driver assistance systems 218
Parking assistance systems 241
Warning
3 Driver Attention Camera 213
If the displays on the instrument cluster fail,
do not use the vehicle. There may be a risk 4 Check Control 159
of accident or risk of damage to property. Selector lever display 132
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe man- Selection lists 160
ner. If drive readiness is switched off and
Efficiency trainer 309
on again, the malfunction may be rectified
and it may be possible to continue driving. 5 Power gauge 160
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, have 6 Range 162
the system checked by an authorized service 7 Selector lever position 132
149
CONTROLS Displays
Outside temperature 163 Select the menu by tilting the thumbwheel

on the steering wheel where applicable.
8 Charging screen 163
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
Central display range 163
wheel on the steering wheel.
9 My Modes drive mode 139
10 Speed Limit Info 218 Settings
Speed Limit Assistant 237 Specific displays can be configured individu-
11 Time 166 ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
12 High-voltage battery charge state indicator 1. "MENU"
167 2. "Vehicle apps"
Additional information: 3. "Displays"
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 152. 4. "Instrument cluster"
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Live Vehicle
Operating Function
element Principle
Display the menu bar on the in- Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
strument cluster. own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-
hicle status or energy flow indicators.
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-
tion up or down. General information
Tilt knurled wheel in corre- Appropriate information is shown on the Con-
sponding direction: Move selec- trol Display depending on the driving situation.
tion to left or right. Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection. Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternat-
Configuring the layout ing order and, if necessary, depending on the
selected drive mode:
In Personal Mode drive mode, the layout in
the instrument cluster can be individually con- ▷ Vehicle status, refer to page 168.
figured and displayed. ▷ Current driving condition, refer to page 168.
▷ Sport displays, refer to page 169.
▷ Efficiency trainer, refer to page 309.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. ▷ Trip data, refer to page 164.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Static information
2. "LAYOUT" The following information may be shown per-
manently on the control display regardless of
the driving situation and driving mode set.
150
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Vehicle status. Overview

▷ Trip data.
Adjusting the display

In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-
tween an adaptive display with changing con-
tent and static content.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle" The protective glass of the Head-up display is
4. "Content" located between the steering wheel and the
5. Select the desired setting: windshield.
▷ "Adaptive content": different content is

displayed in varying order. Configuring a view
▷ "Trip data": Trip data is permanently The views for the Head-up Display can be set
displayed. independently of the display on the instrument
▷ "Vehicle status": Vehicle status is per- cluster, e.g., a reduced view.
manently displayed.
1. Press the button on the steering

BMW Head-up Display wheel.
Principle cluster.
2. "HEAD-UP"
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance Select the menu by tilting the thumbwheel
the speed. on the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
General information wheel on the steering wheel.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height of
the Head-up display can be stored using the Display
memory function.
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up Turning the Head-up display on/off
display in the Vehicle Care chapter. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
151
CONTROLS Displays
Overview 4. "Head-up display"

The following information is displayed on the 5. Select the desired setting.
Head-up display:
▷ Vehicle speed. Special windshield
▷ Navigation instructions. The windshield is part of the system.
▷ Check Control messages. The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable the system to function.
▷ Sport displays.
In the event of damage, have the special wind-
▷ Efficiency trainer.
shield replaced by an authorized service center
▷ Lists and messages. or by another qualified service center or a re-
▷ Driver assistance systems. pair shop.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Indicator/warning lights
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Principle
display is influenced by the following factors: Indicator and warning lights in the instrument
▷ Seat position. cluster display the status of some functions in
the vehicle. Indicator and warning lights indi-
▷ Objects on the protective glass of the
cate malfunctions in monitored systems.
Head-up display.
▷ Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the
General information
Head-up display.
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a
▷ Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
variety of combinations and colors.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
▷ Wet road. functioning and light up temporarily when
▷ Unfavorable light conditions. drive-ready state is turned on.
If the image is distorted, have the base set-
tings checked by an authorized service center Red lights
shop. Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
Settings buckled.
Individual settings can be entered for the Additional information:
Head-up display, such as for the height, bright-
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 114.
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-
plays in the Head-up display can be set up
separately such as for Driver Assistance. Airbag system
1. "MENU" Indicator light comes on briefly: indi-
2. "Vehicle apps" cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
3. "Displays" when drive readiness is switched on.
152
Displays CONTROLS
Indicator light illuminates continuously: there Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
is a malfunction. Have the vehicle checked im- sounds: collision with a person is imminent. In-
mediately by an authorized service center or tervene immediately yourself according to the
another qualified service center or repair shop. situation.
Additional information: Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 180. Warning function for pedestrians, refer to
page 191.
Parking brake
Forward Collision Warning
The parking brake is set.
Additional information: Indicator light illuminates: risk of col-
lision, e.g., with a vehicle. Increased
Parking brake, refer to page 141.
awareness is required.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
Brake system sounds: collision with a vehicle is imminent. In-
Malfunction in the brake system, brak- tervene immediately yourself according to the
ing assistance may be faulty. Continue situation.
to drive moderately. Avoid abrupt brak- Additional information:
ing, take longer braking distance into Warning function in a rear-end collision situa-
account. tion, refer to page 188.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by an authorized service center or another
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
qualified service center or repair shop.
detected from the right
Indicator light illuminates: risk of colli-
Emergency Stop Assistant
sion with vehicle crossing from the right
Emergency Stop function active. has been detected. Increased aware-
Additional information: ness is required.
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
page 205. sounds: collision with a crossing vehicle is im-
minent. Intervene immediately yourself accord-
ing to the situation.
Risk of collision
Indicator light illuminates or flashes in Warning function at intersections, refer to
conjunction with an acoustic signal if a page 192.
collision is imminent.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 185.
detected from the left
Indicator light illuminates: risk of colli-
Pedestrian Warning sion with crossing vehicle from the left
Indicator light illuminates: risk of colli- has been detected. Increased aware-
sion with a person has been detected. ness is required.
Increased awareness is required.
153
CONTROLS Displays
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal Have the system immediately checked by an
sounds: collision with a crossing vehicle is im- authorized service center or another qualified
minent. Intervene immediately yourself accord- service center or repair shop.
ing to the situation.
Additional information: Forward Collision Mitigation is limited
Warning function at intersections, refer to or has malfunctioned
page 192.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: function re-
Distance Control striction detected, e.g., due to low sun
or because the system has failed. You may
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
continue driving. If necessary, follow the in-
signal sounds: braking and evading.
structions from Check Control messages.
Distance control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving
Front Collision Warning switched off
Depending on the national-market ver-
Depending on the equipment and na-
sion: steering wheel icon flashes red or
tional-market version: the system is
lights up red. A signal sounds:
turned off.
The system is switched off.
Assisted Driving, refer to page 230.
Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting,

Yellow lights restricted, or has failed
Assisted Driving Indicator light pulsates: Dynamic Sta-

bility Control controls the drive and
The indicator light lights up and an brake forces. The vehicle is stabilized.
acoustic signal may sound: a system Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
interruption is imminent. the driving circumstances.
The indicator warning light flashes: lane boun- Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability
dary driven over. Control has malfunctioned or is initializing. No
Additional information: driving stabilization.
Assisted Driving, refer to page 230. Have the system immediately checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Antilock Braking System
System malfunction. Steerability is lim-
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 214.
ited during emergency braking.
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer
braking distance into account.
154
Displays CONTROLS
The Dynamic Stability Control center or another qualified service center or

deactivated or increased driving repair shop as needed.
dynamics activated ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
an authorized service center or another
Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-
vated, or increased driving dynamics is
activated. Additional information:
Additional information: Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 337.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 214. Steering system
▷ Setting for increased driving dynamics, re- Steering system may be faulty.
fer to page 215.
Have the system checked by an au-
thorized service center or another
Flat tire monitor qualified service center or repair shop.
The flat tire monitor reports tire pres-
sure loss in a tire. Lane departure warning
Reduce your speed and stop cau- Depending on vehicle equipment and
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering national-market version:
maneuvers.
Indicator light illuminates: function re-
Additional information: striction detected, e.g., due to low sun or be-
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 344. cause the system has failed. You may continue
driving. If necessary, follow the instructions
from Check Control messages.
Tire pressure monitor
Indicator light flashes: a warning is issued. The
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire system does not perform any steering inter-
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire ventions.
pressure or a flat tire. Follow the infor-
mation in the Check Control message.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.
The indicator light flashes and is then illumi-
nated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure
losses cannot be detected. Active Blind Spot Detection is limited
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with or has malfunctioned
the same radio frequency: after leaving the Depending on vehicle equipment and
area of the interference, the system auto- national-market version: function re-
matically becomes active again. striction detected, e.g., due to dirty ra-
▷ In the case of tires with special appro- dar sensors or because the system has failed.
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable You may continue driving. If necessary, follow
to complete the reset. Reset the system the instructions from Check Control messages.
again. Additional information:
▷ Wheel without wheel electronics installed: Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 199.
have it checked by an authorized service
155
CONTROLS Displays
Acoustic pedestrian protection Automatic High Beam Assistant

Acoustic pedestrian protection has Low beams are switched on and the
malfunctioned. Increased caution when Automatic High Beam Assistant is acti-
maneuvering. vated.
In case of repeated malfunctions, have the High beams are switched on and off automati-
system checked by an authorized service cen- cally depending on the traffic situation.
ter or another qualified service center or repair Additional information:
shop.
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
Additional information: page 175.
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to
page 131.
Lane departure warning
Depending on vehicle equipment and
Charging capacity limited
national-market version:
Additional information: The indicator light lights up: the system
Charge vehicle, refer to page 312. is switched on. A lane boundary has been de-
tected on at least one side of the vehicle and
the system is ready to intervene. Warnings will
Green lights be issued.
The system can perform steering interven-
Turn signal
tions.
Turn signal is on. Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-
Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator ing a steering intervention.
light indicates that a turn signal bulb Additional information:
has failed.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.
Turn signal, refer to page 144.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on. turned on. Warnings and, if necessary,
Additional information: steering interventions can occur within the sys-
tem limits.
Parking lights, low beams, refer to
page 172. Additional information:
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 199.
Low beams
Low beams are switched on. Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically
Parking lights, low beams, refer to Automatic Hold is ready to use. The
page 172. vehicle is automatically held in place
when it is stationary.
156
Displays CONTROLS
Automatic Hold, refer to page 143. Automatic Lane Change Assistant:

lane change in progress
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured Arrow icon for lane change green: the
against rolling away system is carrying out a lane change.
The vehicle is automatically secured Additional information:
against rolling away after stopping. Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
Additional information: page 233.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 143.
Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
Cruise Control lane change not possible
The system is active. Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: system detected a lane
Additional information: change request. Lane change not cur-
Cruise control, refer to page 222. rently possible.
Distance Control Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has page 233.
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle in front is Assisted Driving Plus
detected.
The system is active.
Indicator lamp is blinking: vehicle ahead is driv-
ing off.
Additional information: Additional information:
Distance control, refer to page 225. Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 235.
Speed Limit Assistant Blue lights

The detected speed limit can be ap- High beams
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a High beams have been switched on.
green checkmark is displayed. Additional information:
Additional information: High beams, refer to page 144.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 237.
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Assisted Driving High beams are switched on via the
The system supports the driver in Automatic High Beam Assistant.
keeping the vehicle within the lane. Additional information:
Additional information: Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
Assisted Driving, refer to page 230. page 175.
157
CONTROLS Displays
Gray lights Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to

page 185.
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an- Lane Change Warning restricted
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled. Depending on the equipment and na-
Additional information: tional-market version: the system is
Seat belts, refer to page 112. turned on. No warnings can be issued
temporarily. At least one functional require-
ment is not met, e.g. the minimum speed has
Distance Control not been reached.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions Additional information:
are not adequate for the system to Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 199.
work. The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you actively resume
control by pressing on the brake pedal or ac- Active Blind Spot Detection switched
celerator pedal. off
Additional information: Depending on the equipment and na-
Distance control, refer to page 225. tional-market version: the system is
turned off.
Assisted Driving
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 199.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon White lights
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Cruise Control with Distance Control
Assisted Driving, refer to page 230. No Distance Control displayed since
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Assisted Driving Plus
Distance control, refer to page 225.
The system is interrupted and will acti-
vate automatically as soon as all func-
tional requirements are met. Assisted Driving Plus
Additional information: The system is ready.
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 235. Additional information:
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to
Front Collision Warning switched off page 235.

turned off.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Check Control Displaying stored Check Control

messages
Principle 1. "MENU"
The Check Control system monitors functions 2. "Vehicle apps"
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the 3. "Vehicle status"
monitored systems. 4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a Display
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if Check Control
applicable, in the Head-up display.
At least one Check Control message is
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
displayed or stored.
a text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Text messages
Hiding Check Control messages Text messages in combination with an icon
An arrow icon next to the Check Control in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-
message indicates whether the Check Control trol message and the meaning of the indica-
message can be hidden. tor/warning lights.
Tilt the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to the left to hide Check Control Supplementary text messages
messages. Additional information, such as the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
Continuous display
With urgent text messages, the added text will
Some Check Control messages are displayed
be automatically displayed on the control dis-
continuously and are not cleared until the fault
play.
is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,
the messages are displayed consecutively. Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes- 1. "MENU"
sages are automatically displayed again after 2. "Vehicle apps"
approx. 8 seconds.
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Check Control"
Temporary display
5. Select the desired text message.
Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The 6. Select the desired setting.
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later. Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
159
CONTROLS Displays
Selection lists Display
Principle
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open An example:
on the Control Display. After opening the entertainment source, tilt the
thumbwheel to the left or right as needed to
Displaying and using the list change sources. Press the thumbwheel to con-
The selection lists can be displayed and op- firm the selection.
erated using the operating elements on the Turn the thumbwheel up or down to select the
steering wheel. desired entry in the list. Press the thumbwheel
to confirm the selection.
Control Function
elements Depending on the equipment version, the list
in the instrument cluster may differ from the
Change the entertainment illustration.
source.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed list. Power gauge
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls. Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently
Turn the knurled wheel: display drawn drive power as a percentage.
the list for currently selected en-
tertainment source or scroll up
Display
or down in the list.
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
Press knurled wheel: confirm se-
lection.
Needle in the area of arrow 1: display of the

energy recovered by coasting or when deceler-
ating.
160
Displays CONTROLS
Needle near arrow 2: Drive power in percent. Icon Description

The Sport Boost function is also displayed on Blue icon: cold drivetrain.
the power gauge.
White icon: increased drive sys-
Additional information: tem temperature, for instance
Sport Boost function, refer to page 138. due to sustained or high
power demand when driving
Energy recovery display on mountain roads.
Depending on vehicle equip-

Icon Meaning ment and national-market ver-
sion:
Low energy recovery.
Drive power limitation defined
Selector lever position D is en-
via the BMW Digital Key.
gaged.
Heavily discharged high-volt-
Average energy recovery.
age battery.
Selector lever position D is en-
gaged. System-related functional limi-
tation.
High energy recovery.
A Check Control message is
Selector lever position D or B is displayed in addition where ap-
set. plicable.
Adaptive recuperation is acti-
vated
Adaptive recuperation, refer to Standby state and drive-
page 307. ready state
The degree of the energy recovery depends on The lettering OFF in the in-
the settings for the energy recovery. strument cluster indicates that
Additional information: drive-ready state is switched off
and standby state is switched
Driving in detail: eDRIVE, refer to page 135.
on.
Reduced drive power READY indicates the drive-

The available power may be reduced due to ready state.
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-
cally adjusted accordingly.
In addition, the icons on the power gauge indi-
cate reduced drive power:
161
CONTROLS Displays
Additional information: Display

▷ Operating condition of the vehicle, refer to The range is continuously dis-
page 41. played in the instrument cluster.
Range
General information Range with active guidance
The expected range for the energy stored in The icon is displayed next to the range
the high-voltage battery is continuously dis- when guidance was started in the navigation
played in the instrument cluster. system. Information from the navigation sys-
Always make sure that the range is sufficient tem is taken into account for the calculation of
for the planned trip. The range is dynamic and the current range.
can abruptly change.
The range can be reduced or increased based Heavily discharged high-voltage
on the following factors: battery
▷ Driving style. The high-voltage battery is
▷ Traffic conditions. heavily discharged. The drive
power will be reduced. Heating
▷ Drive mode change.
and climate control functions will
▷ Climate and terrain conditions. be deactivated.
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
In this state, the exact range can no longer be
▷ After determination of a route through the
calculated. A short range may still be available
navigation system depending on the route
depending on the ambient conditions.
profile, route distance and selected speed.
Re-establishing the drive-ready state can help
▷ When exiting a route or recalculating a
increase the range slightly, for instance to re-
route.
move the vehicle from a hazardous area.
▷ By preheating/precooling the high-voltage
battery with active guidance to a DC charg-
State of charge in strong
ing station.
temperature fluctuations
Information about the current range can be
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations
displayed in the instrument cluster.
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage
Check Control messages indicate a limited battery, it may not be possible to start the ve-
range. hicle again at the beginning of the next trip.
Additional information: Recharge vehicle with a low state of charge in
▷ Range prediction, refer to page 167. time.
▷ Increasing the range, refer to page 306.
162
Displays CONTROLS
Outside temperature Charge vehicle, refer to page 312.
Overview
General information
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
1 Current charging capacity 320
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
2 Set charge target 319
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There 3 Set departure time 321
is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style End of charging time 320
to the weather conditions at low tempera-
4 Climate control 322
tures.
5 Current range 320
Current state of charge 320
Charging screen 6 Range when reaching the charging desti-

nation 320
7 Set or maximum current limit 312
Principle
The charging screen displays information
about the charging process in the instrument
cluster.
Central display range
General information General information

Some of the displays in the instrument cluster The following settings can be selected:
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's ▷ Reduced display.
Manual. ▷ Trip data, refer to page 164.
When the vehicle is locked, the most important ▷ Range prediction, refer to page 167.
information is displayed for a short period of
▷ Assisted View, refer to page 165.
time.
▷ With navigation system: route preview.
Display charging screen again:
▷ With navigation system: map view.
With the charging cable plugged in,
press the button on the vehicle key. ▷ Depending on vehicle equipment: Aug-
mented View.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec-
onds after locking. ▷ G-meter, refer to page 166.
▷ Entertainment.
163
CONTROLS Displays
Some contents for the central display range Display on the control display
can also be configured as a view in the Head-
up display. General information
Additional information: The following trip data is shown on the control
Head-Up Display, refer to page 151. display:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
Configuring the central display ▷ Average consumption depending on the
range configured interval.
The content of the central display range on the ▷ Travel time depending on the config-
instrument cluster can be configured individu- ured interval.
ally, for instance the trip data display.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the
configured interval.
1. Press the button on the steering ▷ Counter for energy recovery depend-
wheel. ing on the configured interval.
cluster.
Displaying trip data continuously
1. "MENU"
2. "CONTENT"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Select the menu by tilting the thumbwheel
on the steering wheel where applicable. 3. "Live Vehicle"
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb- 4. "Content"
wheel on the steering wheel. 5. "Trip data"

Trip data
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-
Principle ter.
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown dynamically or
permanently on the control display. ▷ Current consumption, arrow 1.
The values can be displayed and reset de- ▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
pending on different intervals. ▷ Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
▷ Total mileage, arrow 4.
164
Displays CONTROLS
Current consumption Using the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:

The current consumption display allows you to 1. Display trip data in the instrument cluster.
check the current energy consumption, e.g., to
drive efficiently.
2. Press and hold the knurled wheel
Average fuel consumption on the steering wheel until the values are
reset.
The average consumption is determined on
Via iDrive:
the basis of various distances.
1. "MENU"
Adjusting the display of the trip data 2. "Vehicle apps"
The intervals for the display of the trip data 3. "System settings"
in the instrument cluster and on the Control
4. "Time period for trip data"
Display are adjustable.
5. "Reset Individual"
1. "MENU"
The average values and counters are reset.
2. "Vehicle apps" Once the average values and counters have
3. "System settings" been reset, the following interval is automati-
4. "Time period for trip data" cally activated:
5. "Values" "Since Individual ( )"

▷ "Since start of trip ( )": the values are au- Assisted View
tomatically reset approx. four hours af-
ter the vehicle has come to a standstill.
Principle
▷ "Since last charge ( )": the values are
With Assisted View, information on driver as-
automatically reset after charging.
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-
▷ "Since factory": the values since the strument cluster with a vehicle animation.
time of the factory delivery are dis-
Information on parking and maneuvering is
played.
displayed in the Assisted View whenever the
▷ "Since Individual ( )": the values since parking assistance system is active.
the last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
Safety information
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at Warning
any time: The system cannot serve as a substitute for
"Since Individual ( )" the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
165
CONTROLS Displays
braking at any time, and actively intervene System limits

where appropriate.
The system's detection capability is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system
Permanent display are taken into account.
You can configure how Assisted View is dis- Additional information:
played on the central display range and have it ▷ Cameras, refer to page 36.
shown permanently. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
Central display area, refer to page 163
G-meter
Temporary display
With the temporary display, Assisted View is General information
always shown when driver assistance systems The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap-
are active, regardless of how the central dis- plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
play range is configured. on the vehicle occupants while driving.
1. "MENU" The display can be configured on the central
display range of the instrument cluster.
2. "Vehicle apps"
The values are automatically reset whenever
3. "Displays"
you start a new drive.
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. "Display Assisted View when Driver
Central display area, refer to page 163
Assistance is active"
Manually reseting g-meter values

Display
1. Display the g-meter on the instrument clus-
ter.
2. Press and hold the knurled wheel

on the steering wheel until the values are
reset.
Date and time

An example with active Driver Assistance: the
Various settings can be applied for the date
indicator and warning lights for the distance
and time display such as the date format.
control and the Automatic Lane Change Assis-
tant indicate a lane change to the next lane. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
At the same time, the lane change to the next market version, the time zone can be set and
lane is shown with animation in the Assisted automatic time setting can be activated. With
View. automatic time setting, the time, date and, if
166
Displays CONTROLS
necessary, the time zone are updated auto- General information

matically.
The current range is influenced by many fac-
1. "MENU" tors, including speed.
2. "Vehicle apps" The range trend shows the expected develop-
3. "System settings" ment of the range with the current driving style.
The range trend is based on the average con-
4. "Date and time" sumption that is calculated for the directly trav-
5. Select the desired settings. eled route section.
State of charge indicator ▷ Range, refer to page 162.

▷ Increasing the range, refer to page 306.
Safety information
Overview
Warning
Even when it is indicated that the high-volt-
age battery is discharged, the high-voltage
system is always still under high voltage.
There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do
not touch or change live parts, e.g., orange
high-voltage cables, even when the batteries
are discharged.
▷ Current range, arrow 1.

Display ▷ Range trend, arrow 2.
When standby and drive readi- ▷ Possible range with very low energy con-
ness are turned on, the availa- sumption, arrow 3.
ble battery charge state of the ▷ Possible range with very high energy con-
high-voltage battery is continu- sumption, arrow 4.
ously displayed in percent in the
instrument cluster.
Range prediction with active
In case of temperature fluctuations, the battery
charge state may change.
guidance
With active guidance, the distance to the des-
tination and the expected charge state of the
Range prediction high-voltage battery when the destination is
reached are also displayed.
Principle
The range prediction indicates the extent to
which the range can be influenced with the
current driving style. This supports an efficient
driving style.
167
CONTROLS Displays
Icon Description Displaying the vehicle status

continuously
The expected battery charge
state when the destination is 1. "MENU"
reached is displayed next to 2. "Vehicle apps"
the icon. 3. "Vehicle status"
The icon is displayed when
route guidance to a charging Overview
post was started on the navi-
gation system. Icon Description
The icon is displayed when "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of

route guidance was restarted the flat tire monitor, refer to
on the navigation system. In- page 344.
formation from the navigation
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
system is taken into account
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
for the calculation of the cur-
refer to page 337.
rent range.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes-
Setting the units of sages, refer to page 159.
measurement "Required services": displaying
service notifications, refer to
Depending on the national-market version, you page 169.
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature. Current driving condition
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" General information
3. "System settings" The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
4. "Units"
menu on the control display.
The following states can be displayed:
▷ Driving.
Vehicle status ▷ Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING".
▷ "CHARGING BATTERY"
General information ▷ Adaptive recuperation.
The status can be displayed and actions per- Depending on the situation, additional in-
formed for several systems, such as for Check formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-
Control. played.
Depending on the setting, the vehicle status is
displayed dynamically or continuously on the
Control Display.
168
Displays CONTROLS
Functional requirements ▷ Torque.

▷ Personal Mode or Efficient Mode drive ▷ Power.
mode must be selected. ▷ Speed, electric motor.
▷ With Live Vehicle, the following setting ▷ Temperature, electric motor.
must be selected:
"Adaptive content"
Service notifications
Display
Principle
The function displays the service notifications
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After turning on the drive readiness, the next
service appointment or the distance remaining
until the next service is displayed briefly in the
instrument cluster.
An example: A service advisor can read out the current
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1. service notifications from your vehicle key.
The high-voltage battery is charged when the
vehicle is decelerating, arrow 2. Display
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
Sport displays play.
1. "MENU"
Principle 2. "Vehicle apps"
The Sport displays especially support a sporty 3. "Vehicle status"
driving style. 4. "Required services"
Maintenance work and legally mandated
Functional requirements inspections are displayed.
▷ Sport Mode must be selected. 5. Select a desired entry to call up detailed
▷ With Live Vehicle, the following setting information.
must be selected:
"Adaptive content" Entering appointment dates
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
Display be entered.
The sport displays are displayed in the Live Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
Vehicle menu on the control display. set correctly.
The following information is displayed: 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
169
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
170
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and options Functions via iDrive
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Icon Function

ment, systems and functions that are available Automatic headlight control.
Additional information: Low beams.
Parking lights.
Lights and lighting
Lights off.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle

Left roadside parking light.
Right roadside parking light.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Icon Function
Icon Function Interior lighting.

Parts of the exterior lighting.
Exterior lighting menu.
Pathway lighting.

Low beams.
Lights off.
Automatic headlight control
Lights off.
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
171
CONTROLS Lights
General information Turning on parking lights

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can 1. "MENU"
cause the lights to be turned on. 2. "Vehicle apps"
If the low beams are switched on manually, the 3. "Exterior lighting"
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
4. "Parking light"
Activate automatic headlight control The indicator light in the instrument

cluster lights up.
Press the button on the light switch el-
ement. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
The icon in the button lights up green.
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
The indicator light in the instrument battery and it would then be impossible to
cluster is illuminated when the low switch on drive-ready state.
Turning off parking lights
System limits The following options are available to turn off
the parking lights:
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions. ▷ Press the button on the light switch
For example, the sensors are unable to detect element.
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
light switch element.
Parking lights, low-beams ▷ Turn off light via iDrive.
and roadside parking lights ▷ Turn on drive-ready state.
After the drive-ready state is switched on,
the automatic headlight control will be acti-
General information
vated.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
Low beams
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
Turning on low beams
Parking lights Press the button on the light switch el-
ement.
General information
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
The parking lights can only be switched on in
state is switched on.
the low speed range.
cluster lights up.
172
Lights CONTROLS
Press the button again to switch on the low 3. "Exterior lighting"

beams when the standby state is switched on. 4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on the equipment, select the
Turning off low beams
following setting:
▷ "Welcome and goodbye"
low beams can be turned off in the low speed
range: When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
▷ "BMW Iconic Glow"
▷ Press the button on the light switch
The radiator grille lighting can only be
element.
adjusted when the vehicle is stationary
and the drive-ready state is switched
▷ Press and hold the button on the off.
light switch element.
▷ Turn off light via iDrive. Turning on the welcome light
▷ Automatically on approach.
Roadside parking lights ▷ During unlocking.
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
1. "MENU" with the vehicle locked.
2. "Vehicle apps" Depending on the settings, the interior
3. "Exterior lighting" lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
4. "Left roadside park. light" or "Right
roadside park. light" The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
Welcome lights LED light carpet
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Activating/deactivating welcome
light Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
173
CONTROLS Lights
Pathway lighting 4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-
tional-market version:
Principle
▷ "Daytime driving lights"
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
turns on for a certain period of time after leav- ▷ "Rear daytime driving lights"
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area ▷ "BMW Iconic Glow"
surrounding the vehicle.
Switching pathway lighting on Adaptive lighting functions

▷ After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward. Principle
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
lumination of the road.
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
General information
Setting the duration The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
1. "MENU"
the equipment version:
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Adaptive Light Control.
3. "Exterior lighting"
▷ Cornering light.
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Pathway lighting" Activating the adaptive lighting
6. Select the desired setting. functions
Press the button on the light switch el-
Daytime driving lights ement.
The LED in the button lights up.

General information The adaptive lighting functions are active
The daytime driving lights light up when drive- when the drive-ready state is switched on.
ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating daytime Adaptive Light Control

driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are General information
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti- Depending on the steering-wheel angle and
vate the daytime driving lights in front. other parameters, the high beams follow the
course of the road.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
174
Lights CONTROLS
Cornering light The system responds to light from oncoming

traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
Principle ies.
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous The high beams can be switched on and off
roads or when turning, an additional cornering manually at any time.
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a Functional requirements
certain speed.
▷ Automatic headlight control is activated.
General information ▷ Low beams are switched on.
The cornering light is automatically switched

on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
Activating Automatic High Beam
where applicable, the use of turn signals. Assistant
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights 1. "MENU"
may be automatically switched on regardless 2. "Vehicle apps"
of the steering-wheel angle. 3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Additional settings"
Adaptive headlight range 5. "Automatic High Beams"
control The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
The adaptive headlight range control feature beams are switched on.
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
The headlights are automatically changed be-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
tween low beams and high beams.
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the system
Automatic High Beam switches on the high beams.
Assistant Interruption of the journey with activated Au-
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic
Principle High Beam Assistant remains activated when
continuing the journey.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically The Automatic High Beam Assistant is de-
switches the high beams on or off depending activated when manually switching the high
on the traffic situation. beams on and off.
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when-
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
175
CONTROLS Lights
Safety information
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident. If adjustments have been made
and the sensitivity has been modified, make
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis- sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1. blinded. Switch off the high beams manually
if required.
Deactivating Automatic High Beam

Assistant Functional requirements
▷ Setting at standstill only.
▷ Light is turned off.
Increasing sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1, or
pull the turn signal lever backward when the Resetting the sensitivity
high beams are switched on, arrow 2.
Push the turn signal lever to the front again
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the ready state.
turn signal lever is not possible.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
General information replace the driver's personal judgment of when
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam to use the high beams. In situations that re-
Assistant can be adjusted. quire this, therefore dim manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow-
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
176
Lights CONTROLS
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, Overview

such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such Buttons in the vehicle
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with Interior lighting menu
stickers, etc.
Instrument lighting Reading lights
Functional requirement Interior lights

The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-
ness and with turned on parking lights or low
beams.
Turning interior lights on/off
Setting the brightness Using the button:
1. "MENU" Press the button.

2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting" To switch off permanently: press the button
4. "Cockpit brightness at night" and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
5. Select the desired setting. Via iDrive:
1. "MENU"
Interior lighting 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
General information 4. "Reading light"
Depending on the equipment version, interior 5. Tap on the icon.
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically Turning reading lights on/off
controlled. Using the button:
Press the button.
177
CONTROLS Lights
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read- 3. "Interior lighting"

ing lights are located next to the interior lights 4. If necessary, "Ambience"
in the front and rear.
5. "Ambient lighting"
Via iDrive:
1. "MENU" Turning ambient light on/off

2. "Vehicle apps" The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
3. "Interior lighting" hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
4. "Reading light"
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
5. Tap the desired seat. it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
The brightness of the reading lights can be unlocked.
adjusted when they are turned on.
Selecting the color
Changing settings 1. "MENU"
Depending on vehicle equipment, individual 2. "Vehicle apps"
settings can be applied to specific seats via
iDrive or BMW Touch Command. 3. "Interior lighting"
Via iDrive: 4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Color"
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting" Setting the brightness
4. "Reading light" 1. "MENU"
5. Select the desired settings. 2. "Vehicle apps"
Via BMW Touch Command: 3. "Interior lighting"
1. "Lighting" 4. If necessary, "Ambience"
2. "Reading lights" or "Ambience" 5. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"
3. Select the desired settings. 6. Select the desired setting.
Dynamic light
Ambient light Certain situations, for example incoming calls
or obstacles detected when opening doors, are
General information indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is
Depending on the equipment version, lighting disabled, the light effects are still displayed.
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's 1. "MENU"
interior.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Activating/deactivating ambient 3. "Interior lighting"

light 4. If necessary, "Ambience"
1. "MENU" 5. "Lighting events"
2. "Vehicle apps" 6. Select the desired setting.
178
Lights CONTROLS
Reduced for night drive

Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
Speaker lighting
Principle
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
General information
When the speakers are muted, the speaker
lighting is turned off. When the ambient light-
ing effects are enabled, the speakers light up
white.
Turning speaker lighting on/off

The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
179
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
front passenger by responding to frontal im- protects the side of the body in the chest and
pacts in which seat belts alone would not pro- lap area.
vide adequate protection.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
180
Safety CONTROLS
Ejection Mitigation taining a comfortable grip on the steering

The head airbag system is designed as an wheel.
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
through side windows during rollovers or side legs in the footwell and does not support
collision events. them on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
Knee airbag away from the side airbag.
Depending on the national-market version: ▷ There should be no additional persons, an-
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event imals or objects between an airbag and a
of a frontal impact. person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
Protective effect senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
General information attach brackets or cables, for instance for
navigation devices or mobile phones.
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents. ▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
Information on optimum protective them in any way.
effect of the airbags ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
Warning
other objects to the front seats that are not
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy- specifically suited for seats with integrated
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag versions.
airbag system cannot provide protection as
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
intended and may cause additional injuries
jackets, over the backrests.
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on ▷ Never modify either the individual compo-
achieving the optimum protective effect of the nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. ▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the Even when you follow all instructions very
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the closely, injury from contact with the airbags
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low The ignition and inflation noise may lead
as possible when the airbag is deployed. to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
hands can be crossed over the steering Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
wheel. Select the settings so that the ities may affect the air bag system; contact
shoulder rests against the backrest when BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
crossing the hands and the upper body tion.
is as far back as possible while still main-
181
CONTROLS Safety
Warnings and information on the airbags are Setting the front seat positions
also found on the sun visors.
The power that deploys the driver's/front pas-
senger airbags depends on the position of the
Operational readiness of the airbag driver's/front passenger seat.
system To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
Safety information spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Warning Additional information:
Individual components can be hot after de- Seats, refer to page 106.
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Automatic deactivation of
the front passenger airbags
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure, Principle
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
vation can detect if the front passenger seat is
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
occupied.
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the Accordingly, the front and knee airbags, as
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem- well as the front passenger side airbag de-
bled and scrapped by an authorized service pending on the model, are activated or deacti-
center or another qualified service center or vated.
repair shop.
Safety information

Warning
When drive-ready state is turned on,
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
the warning light in the instrument
tion, the system must be able to detect
cluster lights up briefly, thereby indicat-
whether a person is sitting in the front pas-
ing the operational readiness of the entire air-
senger seat. The entire seat surface must
bag system and the seat belt tensioners.
be used for this purpose. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Make sure that the
Malfunction front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
footwell.
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is turned on.
▷ The warning light lights up continu- Functional requirements
ously.
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
Have the system checked. seat surface:
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
182
Safety CONTROLS
unless they are specifically determined to Display Function

be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
The indicator light is contin-
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
uously illuminated when the
can press against the seat from below.
seat is not occupied or when a
▷ Sit upright in the seat with your back child is detected on the seat in
against the backrest. a provided child restraint sys-
▷ Sit down with your feet touching the floor. tem as intended. The airbags
on the passenger's side are
Installing child restraint systems not activated.
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied The indicator light does not
seat surface of the front passenger seat: light up when, for instance, a
correctly seated person of suf-
▷ Pay attention to the specifications and the
ficient size is detected on the
operating and safety information of the
seat. The airbags on the pas-
child restraint system manufacturer when
senger's side are activated.
using child restraint systems.
▷ Make sure that the seat surface of the child
Check the status of the indicator light before
restraint system rests as flat as possible on
and also while driving when the front passen-
the seat surface.
ger seat is occupied.
▷ Move the head restraint up or remove it to
ensure that the child restraint system rests
Fault of the automatic deactivation
as flat as possible against the rear seat
backrest.
system
▷ Observe the maximum size of the child re- When transporting older children and adults,
straint system, for example to avoid possi- the front passenger airbags may be deacti-
ble touching the roof. vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
indicator light for the front passenger airbags
Before transporting a child on the front pas- lights up.
senger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger In this case, change the seat position so that
seat, see Children. the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator light goes out.
More information: installation of child restraint
systems, refer to page 124. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear seat.
Indicator light for the front
Occupancy detection
passenger airbags
The occupancy detection meets the statutory
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
the passenger airbags under certain condi-
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei- tions.
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly lights up and then indicates whether
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
183
CONTROLS Safety
Collision warning systems tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and

actively intervene where appropriate.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has Turning on/turning off collision
different systems that can help prevent an im- warning systems
minent collision. Depending on national-market version, some
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to of the systems are automatically activated
page 185. whenever you start driving.
▷ Exit warning, refer to page 194. The following functions are adjustable.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 196. 1. "MENU"
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to 2. "Vehicle apps"
page 199.
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 202.
4. "Driver Assistance"
▷ Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
5. "Safety and warnings"
page 204.
▷ Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 205.
Resetting the settings
Safety information The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
delivery.
Warning
1. "MENU"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 2. "Vehicle apps"
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of 3. "Driving settings"
the system, it cannot independently react 4. "Driver Assistance"
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation 6. "Reset to recommended settings"
braking at any time, and actively intervene System limits
where appropriate.
Safety information
Warning Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. it may react too late or in a manner that is not
Due to its limits, the system may not issue consistent with normal use. There may be a
warnings or responses, or these may be is- risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
sued late or in a manner that is not consis- Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of information in this Owner’s Manual regarding
184
Safety CONTROLS
the scope of the system’s operation and limi- ▷ Warning function at intersections, refer to
tations. page 192.
▷ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 193.
Detection capability
Safety information
Objects are only considered if they are within
the detection range of the installed sensors Warning
and are detected by the system. The system cannot serve as a substitute for
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
Thus, a system response might not come or to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
might come late. accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
System limits of the sensors closely, be ready to take over steering and
Additional information: braking at any time, and actively intervene
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36. where appropriate.
Forward Collision Mitigation Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
Principle substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help Due to its limits, the system may not issue
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be warnings or responses, or these may be is-
avoided, the system may help reduce the se- sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
verity of the accident. tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
The system can issue a warning of a possible
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
General information
Warning
Depending on the equipment version, the For-
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the Individual functions may not work correctly
following functions: when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
abled or Cruise Control switched on. There is
▷ Warning function in rear-end collision situa-
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
tions, refer to page 188.
Warning and Cruise Control before towing.
▷ Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer
to page 189.
▷ Warning function for turning with oncoming Sensors
traffic, refer to page 190. Depending on the equipment, the system is
▷ Warning function for pedestrians, refer to controlled by the following sensors:
page 191.
185
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Camera behind the windshield. 6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"

▷ Front radar sensor. 7. "Off"
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
Setting the warning time
Speed range 1. "MENU"
The system issues a warning of a possi- 2. "Vehicle apps"
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx. 3. "Driving settings"
3 mph/5 km/h.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. 6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
Some functions are deactivated earlier. 7. Select the desired setting.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed ▷ "Early"
drops below these values again. ▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are dis-
Turning the Forward Collision played.
Mitigation on/off The more sensitive the warning time is set
to be, the more warnings will be displayed.
Turning on the system automatically Therefore, there may also be an excess of un-
Depending on the national-market version, the warranted warnings and responses.
system is automatically active after every de- The system checks for visual impairments. De-
parture. pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster
Turning on system manually captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility
The system is activated by setting the warning and field of vision also affect the timing of the
time. warnings.
Turning the warning signal on/off
Setting the warning time, refer to page 186.
System warning signals can be turned off, de-
Turning system off manually pending on vehicle equipment.
Depending on national-market version, the ad- 1. "MENU"

justment can only be made when the vehicle is 2. "Vehicle apps"
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
successively on the Control Display.
1. "MENU"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
2. "Vehicle apps"
7. "Warning tone"
186
Safety CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
The following icons are shown on the instru-
with the situation.
ment cluster and, depending on vehicle equip-
ment, on the Head-up Display: ▷ A red icon lights up:
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Icon Meaning
Depending on vehicle equipment and ▷ A red icon flashes:
national-market version:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
Icon illuminates yellow: function re- diately.
striction detected, e.g., due to low
▷ A warning signal sounds:
sun or because the system has failed.
You may continue driving. If neces- There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
sary, follow the instructions from diately.
Check Control messages. ▷ Automatic brake intervention:
Depending on vehicle equipment and Depending on the equipment and situation
national-market version: in case of an imminent danger of collision,
the system can also intervene with an auto-
The icon lights up yellow or gray: The
matic brake intervention and automatically
system is switched off.
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete stop.
Risk of collision, for instance with a When the brake pedal is pressed quickly and
person. hard, the maximum braking force of the vehicle
is used.
Risk of collision, for instance with an
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead. Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
crossing from the right. necessary.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
crossing from the left.
A brake intervention can be canceled by step-
ping on the accelerator pedal with sufficient
General risk of collision.
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
steering.
Depending on the equipment and situation,
The image of the respective icon may vary be- the brake intervention can occur up to approx.
cause the system may detect multiple objects. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
Warning function only a brief brake intervention will occur.
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-
spective hazardous situation.
187
CONTROLS Safety
System limits Warning function in forward

Safety information collision situations
Principle
Warning
The warning function in forward collision situa-
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
tions warns of a possible risk of collision and
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
may brake independently.
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property. In the event of an accident, the system may
Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the reduce impact speed.
information in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi- General information
tations.
Detection capability
Objects are only considered if they are within
the detection range of the installed sensors
and are detected by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors. Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
Thus, a system response might not come or tection range.
might come late.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
System limits of the sensors
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
Additional information: may vary with the current driving situation.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36. The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
Functional limitations style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
The system may be limited in the following tions occur less frequently.
situations:
▷ In tight curves. Safety information
▷ With limitation of the driving stability control Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
systems. ward Collision Mitigation”.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is
switched on via the Start/Stop button. Display in the instrument cluster
A warning icon is displayed when a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
188
Safety CONTROLS
Icon Meaning General information

Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information: Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
System limits of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
General information may vary with the current driving situation.
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter. Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
Detection range ward Collision Mitigation”.
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance: Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap- A warning icon is displayed when a collision
proached at high speed. with a detected vehicle is imminent.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of Icon Meaning
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
hicle is detected.
Warning function for General risk of collision.
oncoming traffic
Principle Warning function
The warning function for oncoming traffic can
warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom- In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake
ing vehicles and may brake independently. intervention is triggered.
In the event of an accident, the system may Additional information:
reduce impact speed. Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 185.
189
CONTROLS Safety
System limits warnings may vary with the current driving sit-
uation.
General information
Safety information
sion Mitigation" chapter. Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected, Display in the instrument cluster
for instance: A warning icon is displayed when a collision
▷ Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed. with a detected vehicle is imminent.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual front view. Icon Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-

Warning function for turning hicle is detected.
with oncoming traffic General risk of collision.
Principle
There is a risk of an accident with oncoming
Warning function
vehicles when turning across the oncoming
lane. The system may prevent such accidents. The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
In the event of an accident, the system may Additional information:
reduce impact speed. Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 185.
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde- System limits
pendently, if needed.
General information
General information Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
for instance:
▷ Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
▷ Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

Upper speed limit
tection range.
The system is active when the own speed is
The system issues a warning of a possible risk below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds
from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of
190
Safety CONTROLS
Warning function for Display in the instrument cluster

pedestrians A warning icon is displayed when a collision
with a detected pedestrian is imminent.
Principle Icon Meaning
At speeds that are common in towns and cit- Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
ies, the warning function warns the driver of a
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and
cyclists and brakes automatically if necessary. General risk of collision.
In the event of an accident, the system may
reduce impact speed.
General information Warning function

System limits
General information
tection range when on a straight line. Detection range
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de- The detection range consists of the following
tection range when turning. parts:
▷ Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.
▷ With side radar sensors in front: side areas,
of collision with pedestrians at speeds above
arrows 2.
approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information for instance:
ward Collision Mitigation”.
191
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes. At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-

▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-
because of their contour or posture. fic is detected.
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height. The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
Upper speed limit prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the system The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-
responds to pedestrians when the vehicle rent driving situation.
peed is below 50 mph/80 km/h.
Safety information
Warning function at ward Collision Mitigation”.
intersections
Principle A warning icon is displayed when a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function Icon Meaning
can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
sion with crossing traffic at intersections and
from the right.
junctions, and brakes automatically if neces-
sary.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
In the event of an accident, the system may from the left.
reduce impact speed.
General information
Warning function
System limits
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de- General information
tection range.
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can sion Mitigation" chapter.
be detected by the system as soon as these
vehicles enter into the detection range of the
Detection range
system.
for instance:
192
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden, Safety information

e.g. by buildings.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side view. ward Collision Mitigation”.
▷ Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
tions. Functional requirements
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
Upper speed limit
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
The system responds to crossing vehicles vehicle.
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
A warning icon is displayed when a collision
Evasion Assistant with a detected vehicle or detected pedestrian
is imminent.
Principle Icon Meaning

The Evasion Assistant can support the driver Warning when a vehicle is detected.
in making evasive maneuvers in certain situa-
tions, such as when obstacles or persons sud-
denly appear. Warning when a pedestrian is de-
tected.
General information
Warning for unknown obstacles.
Warning function with evasion

support
A warning is displayed when there is an im-
minent risk of collision due to the vehicle ap-
proaching another object at a high speed.
The system issues a warning and intervenes Intervene in case of a warning.
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma- The system is designed to provide assistance
neuver is possible. by taking evasive action when there is a risk of
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in collision.
front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle A message in the instrument cluster and, de-
equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-
also monitored. play signals the evasion support.
If the system identifies space alongside the ve-
hicle, it supports an evasive maneuver made System limits
by the driver by safely performing automatic
steering movements. General information
193
CONTROLS Safety
Detection range The system monitors the surrounding area of

The following situations may not be detected, the vehicle for a limited time after getting in or
for instance: after parking.
▷ Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap- A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-
proached at high speed. ous warning functions.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes. Sensors
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such The system is controlled by the following sen-
because of their contour or posture. sors:
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height. ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
Exit warning sors, side, front.
Turning the exit warning on/off

Principle
The Exit warning can help prevent accidents. Turning on the system automatically
The system can warn the occupants when The exit warning activates automatically after
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli- departure if the function was switched on at
sion with approaching objects is detected. the completion of the last trip.
General information Turning the system on/off manually

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
6. "Exit warning"
7. "Off"
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor Adjusting the exit warning
the area behind the vehicle.
1. "MENU"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
2. "Vehicle apps"
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen- 3. "Driving settings"
sors are located in the front bumpers. 4. "Driver Assistance"
194
Safety CONTROLS
6. "Exit warning" Acute warning

7. Select the desired setting. In the event of an acute warning, the light in
the exterior mirror flashes, as does the ambi-
Turning the warning signal on/off ent light, depending on vehicle equipment. In
1. "MENU" addition, a signal tone sounds.
2. "Vehicle apps" There is a risk of collision when opening the

doors.
4. "Driver Assistance" Door functions
5. "Safety and warnings" In vehicles with electrical door locks, unlocking
6. "Exit warning" is delayed.
7. "Warning tone" On vehicles with automatic doors, opening of
the doors is canceled.
Displays
System limits
Light in the exterior mirror
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Detection range
for instance:
▷ Fully or partially hidden objects.
▷ Stationary or very slow objects.
The light in the exterior mirror warns of a pos-
▷ Pedestrians.
sible collision.
Functional limitations
Ambient light The system may be limited in the following
Depending on the equipment, warnings are situations:
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte- ▷ The speed of an approaching vehicle is too
rior. fast or too slow.
▷ In curves.
Warning function
▷ In case of fully or partially hidden objects.
Prewarning
In the event of a prewarning, the light in the ex-
terior mirror illuminates, and the ambient light
flashes depending on vehicle equipment.
An object was detected in the opening area.
195
CONTROLS Safety
Lane Departure Warning not jerk the steering wheel in response to a

warning.
with active return
Principle Warning
The lane departure warning alerts when the Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
lane. Due to its limits, the system may not issue
An automatic steering intervention may help warnings or responses, or these may be is-
keeping the vehicle in its lane. sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
General information accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
for the lane departure warning to be active.
Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
tection range.
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
The system issues a warning starting at a min- ▷ Front radar sensor.
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-
▷ Radar sensor, side, front.
specific and displayed on the control display.
▷ Radar sensor, side, rear.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.
Turning the Lane Departure
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
Warning on/off
fore exiting the lane.
Turning on the system automatically
Safety information Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute Turning on system manually
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess- The system is activated by setting the warning
ing road and traffic situations. There is a time.
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate. Do Setting the warning time, refer to page 197.
196
Safety CONTROLS
Turning system off manually Setting the intensity of the steering

Depending on vehicle equipment and national- wheel vibration
market version, you must successively confirm 1. "MENU"
the switch-off on the Control Display. 2. "Vehicle apps"
1. "MENU" 3. "Driving settings"
2. "Vehicle apps" 4. "Driver Assistance"
3. "Driving settings" 5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
4. "Driver Assistance" 6. "Vibration intensity"
5. "Safety and warnings" 7. Select the desired setting.
6. "Lane Departure Warning" The setting is applied to all collision warning
7. "Off" systems.
Setting Lane Departure Warning Depending on the national-market

version: turning steering intervention
Setting the warning time on/off
1. "MENU" 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings" 3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings" 5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning" 6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting. 7. "Steering intervention"
▷ "Expanded" Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
A warning and steering intervention al-
ter every driving off.
ways occur when the system detects
that the vehicle is intending to exit the
lane or drive over a road marking. Display in the instrument cluster
▷ "In dangerous situations" Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
In case of an interrupted road mark-
equipment and national-market version.
ing: the warning and steering interven-
tion occur when crossing the lane is de-
tected as being unintended or the radar
sensors detect an oncoming vehicle.
Depending on national-market version,
if there is continuous lane marking: a
warning and steering intervention occur
when the system detects that the vehi-
cle is about to unintentionally exit the
lane or drive across a lane marking.
197
CONTROLS Safety
Icon Meaning Steering intervention

Depending on the equipment and the national-
The icon is illuminated green: the
market version: if a lane marking is crossed
system is turned on. A lane boundary
in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h,
has been detected on at least one
the system intervenes with a brief active steer-
side of the vehicle and the system
ing intervention in addition to vibrating. The
is ready to intervene. Warnings will
system thus helps keep the vehicle in the lane.
be issued. The system can perform
The steering intervention can be noticed on
steering interventions.
the steering wheel and can be manually over-
Icon flashes green: the system is per- ridden at any time. During an active steering
forming a steering intervention. intervention, the display in the instrument clus-
ter will blink.
Icon illuminates yellow: function re-
striction detected, e.g., due to low For instance, the steering intervention will be
sun or because the system has failed. suppressed in the following situations:
You may continue driving. If neces- ▷ With hard accelerating or braking.
sary, follow the instructions from ▷ When blinking.
Check Control messages.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
Icon flashes yellow: a warning is ac- ▷ In driving situation with high driving dynam-
tively being issued. The system does ics.
not perform any steering interven-
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting
tions.
or restricted.
▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
tion by the vehicle systems.
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster. Warning signal
Additional information: Depending on the national-market version: in
the event of multiple active steering interven-
Assisted View, refer to page 165. tions by the system within 3 minutes with-
out the driver's intervention at the steering
Warning function wheel during the steering intervention itself, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
If you leave the lane signal will sound at the second steering inter-
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates vention, a continuous warning will sound.
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
setting. played.
In addition, the icon begins to flash. The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor- End of warning

responding direction before changing the lane, For instance, the warning or an active steering
a warning is not issued. intervention will be canceled in the following
situations:
198
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Automatically after a few seconds. Active Blind Spot Detection

▷ When returning to your own lane.
with active return
▷ With hard accelerating or braking.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
Principle
▷ When blinking.
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting. in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
▷ Immediately following a steering interven- behind in the adjacent lane.
tion by the vehicle systems. The light in the exterior mirror emits warnings
▷ With manual steering intervention. at different steps.
▷ When another driver assistance system is An automatic steering intervention may help
activated, if applicable. keeping the vehicle in its lane.
▷ Lane boundaries are not detected.
▷ When the system limits are reached.
General information
System limits
General information
The system may be limited in the following
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
situations:
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, minimum speed.
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
The minimum speed is country-specific and
daries such as in construction areas.
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in menu.
snow, ice, dirt or water.
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads. cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
objects. light in the exterior mirror lights up dimly.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in The system will warn in the previously named
front of you. situations prior to a lane change. The light
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
switched on via the Start/Stop button. wheel vibrates.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting When turning at a speed of up to approx.
or restricted. 12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. Depending on the
national-market version, a yellow icon is also
illuminated.
199
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information 4. "Driver Assistance"

Follow the safety information in the "Forward 5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
Collision Mitigation" chapter. 6. "Vibration intensity"
Sensors The setting is applied to all collision warning
The system is controlled by the following sen- systems.
sors:
▷ Camera behind the windshield. Depending on the national-market
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. version: turning steering intervention
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen- on/off
sors, side, front. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection 3. "Driving settings"
on/off 4. "Driver Assistance"
1. "MENU" 5. "Safety and warnings"
2. "Vehicle apps" 6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
3. "Driving settings" 7. "Steering intervention"
5. "Safety and warnings" Display in the instrument cluster
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection" Different system statuses are displayed on
7. Select the desired setting. the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
equipment and national-market version.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot Icon Meaning
Detection
The icon is illuminated green: the
system is turned on.
Setting the warning time
Warnings and, if necessary, steering
1. "MENU"
interventions can occur within the
2. "Vehicle apps" system limits.
Icon illuminates yellow: the system is
4. "Driver Assistance" turned on.
5. "Safety and warnings" No warnings can be issued tempo-
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection" rarily. At least one functional require-
ment is not met, e.g. the minimum
speed has not been reached.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
200
Safety CONTROLS
Icon Meaning An acute warning is given when the following

conditions are met:
Icon illuminates yellow: function re-
▷ Another vehicle is located in the critical
striction detected, e.g., due to dirty
area.
radar sensors or because the system
has failed. You may continue driving. ▷ Your own vehicle is approaching the other
If necessary, follow the instructions lane.
from Check Control messages. ▷ Depending on the system setting when the
turn signal is turned on.
Icon illuminates gray: The system is
turned off. The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- Steering intervention

market version, information for the system is Depending on the national-market version:
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru- when there is no response to the vibration
ment cluster. of the steering wheel at speeds of up to
Additional information: 130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking
Assisted View, refer to page 165. is crossed, the system engages the active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The
Warning function
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
The steering intervention occurs when a mini-
mum speed is reached. The minimum speed is
displayed on the control display.
Flashing of the light

A flashing of the light in exterior mirror during
vehicle unlocking serves as a system self-test.
System limits
sible collision.
General information
Prewarning ing systems" chapter.
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indi-
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot Upper speed limit
or approaching from behind. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
Acute warning temporarily.
In case of an acute warning, the steering wheel If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
briefly vibrates and the light in the exterior mir- 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
ror blinks brightly.
201
CONTROLS Safety
Displaying warnings General information

Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
uations.
situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed Radar sensors monitor the space next to the
much faster than your own. vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads. speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered, The minimum speed is country-specific and
for instance by stickers. displayed on the control display.
Depending on the national-market version: the If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
steering intervention may be limited, for in- to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
stance in the following situations: with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, collision. For this purpose, the system issues a
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun- warning with a blinking LED in the exterior mir-
daries such as in construction areas. ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in steering wheel. If necessary, the system will
snow, ice, dirt or water. carry out an active steering intervention.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.

Safety information
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects. Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If the camera is impaired.
The camera behind the windshield determines
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is the lane boundary positions.
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
The camera must detect the lane markings for
A Check Control message may be displayed the side collision mitigation with steering inter-
when the system is limited. Depending on the vention to be active.
national-market version, a yellow icon is also
illuminated.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
Side collision mitigation sors:
Principle ▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
The side-collision warning helps to avoid im- ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
minent side collisions.
202
Safety CONTROLS
Turning the side collision warning Warning function

on/off
1. "MENU" Light in the exterior mirror
2. "Vehicle apps"
6. "Side collision warning"
Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration
sible collision.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Acute warning
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the
4. "Driver Assistance" exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel
5. "Feedback via steering wheel" vibrates.
6. "Vibration intensity" A Check Control message is displayed at the
7. Select the desired setting. same time.
The setting is applied to all collision warning

Steering intervention
systems.
Displays in the instrument cluster if necessary, the system engages the active
steering intervention to prevent a collision and
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The
market version, information for the system is steering intervention can be noticed on the
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru- steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
ment cluster. den at any time.
Assisted View, refer to page 165. System limits
General information
situations:
203
CONTROLS Safety
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads. ▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning

▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, flashers will be switched on.
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun- ▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
daries such as in construction areas. are triggered.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water. Safety information
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white. Follow the safety information in the "Forward
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by Collision Mitigation" chapter.
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Sensors
front of you. The system is controlled by the radar sensors
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive readiness is on the sides and rear.
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed Turning rear-end collision
when the system is limited. preparation on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
Rear-end collision
The system is deactivated in the following sit-
preparation uations:
▷ When driving in reverse.
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national- System limits
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be- General information
hind. Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
General information
The system function may be limited in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is
very slow.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-

hicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
204
Safety CONTROLS
Emergency Stop Assistant An immediate emergency call can be triggered

on the Control Display.
The following is performed automatically with
Principle the emergency stop function:
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer- ▷ A display is shown on the instrument clus-
gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the ter.
vehicle to a standstill.
▷ The system takes over vehicle handling un-
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.
General information
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
The Emergency Stop function is triggered au-
tomatically. ▷ An emergency call is triggered, depending
on vehicle equipment.
The function is activated from a speed of ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
Activating/deactivating Emergency
When the system is activated, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
Stop Assistant
lane guidance. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Safety information 3. "Driving settings"
Warning 5. "Safety and warnings"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 6. "Emergency stop"
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
Canceling the emergency stop
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested function
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- The driver can cancel the emergency stop
tions. function by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
For instance, the emergency stop function will
Activating the emergency stop be canceled in the following situations:
function ▷ When steering.
When the system detects that the driver is no
▷ When blinking.
longer fit to drive or is ignoring warnings, the
Emergency Stop function is enabled automati- ▷ If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
cally. The active function is displayed on the ▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys-
instrument cluster. tem.
The emergency stop function can also be acti- ▷ If the emergency stop function on the Con-
vated by voice control. trol Display is interrupted.
Additional information: ▷ When switching the selector lever position
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to at a standstill.
page 53.
205
CONTROLS Safety
At standstill Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
monitored as well.
tem will carry out the following settings:
The system indicates approaching road users.
▷ The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
In case of a risk of collision when driving in re-
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
verse, the system will provide assistance with
▷ The central locking system is unlocked. an automatic brake intervention.
Displays in the instrument cluster Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Icon Status
Safety information
Icon illuminates red: emergency stop
function enabled.
Warning
System limits the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
The system cannot replace the driving per- the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
formance of a driver who is fit to drive. the system, it cannot independently react
Cross traffic warning with tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
braking function closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap- Sensors
proaching from the side are detected sooner The system is controlled by the following sen-
by the cross traffic warning than is possible sors:
from the driver's seat.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
General information
sors, side, front.
Turning on/turning off the cross

traffic warning manually
The cross traffic warning and brake interven-
tion can be turned on and off.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by
sensors.
5. "Parking"
206
Safety CONTROLS
6. "CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING" Visual warning

Turning on the cross traffic warning
automatically
If the system was activated on the control dis-
play, it is automatically turned on as soon as
the Park Distance Control or a camera view is
active and a selector lever position is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the front system
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi-
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.
cles are detected by the rear sensors and your
Depending on the national-market version, the own vehicle is moving in reverse.
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
Turning off the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system is automatically turned off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain distance covered is ex-
ceeded.
Warning function In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-

tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
General information detected by the sensors.
The respective display is called up on the Con-
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the Display in camera image
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
Depending on the direction of travel, the view

to the front or back is displayed in the camera
image.
207
CONTROLS Safety
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the The function allows the documentation in
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de- the event of an accident or theft of the vehi-
tected by the sensors. cle.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your ▷ Manual storage of the recording.
own vehicle. The function allows the documentation of
traffic situations.
Acoustic warning The assistance systems' cameras are used to
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone record, e.g., Panorama View.
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re- Additionally, the following parameters are
spective direction. stored for the trip:
Depending on the national-market version, the ▷ Date.
signal tone will already sound when the gear ▷ Time.
position is engaged.
▷ Vehicle speed.
System limits ▷ Global Positioning System coordinates.
System limits of the sensors Data protection

Additional information: The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
regulations of the country in which the system
is to be used. The user is responsible for the
Functional limitations use of the system and compliance with respec-
The function can be limited, for instance in the tive applicable regulations.
following situations: The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
▷ In tight curves. confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow constraints on use of the system in your state
or a very fast speed. or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
the capture range of the sensors.
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
BMW Drive Recorder about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
the vehicle.
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video Functional requirements
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
▷ Standby or drive readiness is switched on.
document surrounding traffic.
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
General information ▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
Video recordings can be saved in different ▷ Recording type was selected.
ways: ▷ Recording time was selected.
▷ Automatic storage of the recording. Theft notification:
208
Safety CONTROLS
▷ The theft notification was activated in the Manual recording

Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-
corder menu. Using the button
▷ Data transfer is activated.
▷ BMW app is installed on the mobile device.
▷ BMW app is linked with the ConnectedDrive
account.
▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
Activating/deactivating the BMW

Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
Press and hold this button.
before the first use of the recording function.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps" Via iDrive
3. "Drive Recorder" Start the recording:
4. Accept Privacy Policy.
1. "MENU"
5. "Settings"
2. "All apps"
6. "Allow recording"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
Recording functions 5. "Start recording"

Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
Automatic recording The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
The recording is automatically stored when the onds before and after storage is triggered.
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.
▷ In case of accident: Recording playback and
administration
The system saves recordings made up to
30 seconds before and after storage was Stored video recordings can be played back,
triggered. exported and deleted.
▷ In case of theft: For your own safety, the video recording is
only displayed on the Control Display up to ap-
Depending on the selected recording dura-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
tion, the system saves the recording after it
versions, the video recording is only displayed
has been triggered.
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
When the alarm system is triggered, a no- tor lever is in the P position.
tification is sent to the BMW app and the
video can be downloaded in reduced qual- 1. "MENU"
ity to a mobile device. 2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recordings"
209
CONTROLS Safety
5. Select desired recording. ▷ Mobile device is connected to the vehicle

6. If necessary, select camera. via WLAN and Bluetooth® audio.
▷ BMW app is installed on the mobile device.
Settings ▷ BMW app is linked with the ConnectedDrive
account.
General information
Various settings can be applied. Recording
The recording can be started and stopped
Recording type manually.
1. "MENU" Start the recording:
2. "All apps" 1. "MENU"
3. "Drive Recorder" 2. "All apps"
4. "Settings" 3. "Drive Recorder"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Recording"
5. "Start recording"
Recording time
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps" Cameras
3. "Drive Recorder" Different cameras can be selected.
4. "Settings"
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Recording on a mobile device 3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"
Principle 5. "Cam. selection"
Depending on the equipment, video recordings 6. Select desired camera.
can be stored directly on a mobile device, such
as a smartphone or USB storage. System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not
General information
be possible to store recordings if the damage
The length of the video that can be stored de- to the vehicle is too great or the power supply
pends on the available memory capacity on was interrupted.
the mobile device.
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system
Functional requirements has been triggered.
▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
▷ Drive Recorder is activated.
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:
210
Safety CONTROLS
Active Protection Function

Depending on vehicle equipment: In critical ac-
cident situations, the following individual func-
Principle
tions become active as needed:
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
▷ Automatic closing of the windows. The win-
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
dows remain open with a small gap.
or collision situations.
▷ Automatic Positioning of the backrest for
General information the front passenger seat.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- ▷ Comfort seats in rear: Rear seat backrest is
market version, Active Protection consists of positioned automatically.
various PreCrash functions. Systems can be returned to the desired set-
The system is used to detect certain critical tings following a critical driving situation with-
driving situations that might lead to an acci- out accident.
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
PostCrash – iBrake
▷ Emergency braking.
▷ Severe understeering.
Principle
▷ Severe oversteering.
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash
Certain functions of several systems can, iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec- standstill without intervention by the driver.
tion triggering:
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic General information
brake intervention.
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster. further collision and its consequences.
▷ Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions. At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
Safety information automatically.
Warning Harder vehicle deceleration

The system cannot serve as a substitute for In certain situations, it may be necessary to
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
system limits, critical situations might not be automatic braking allows.
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con- brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and will be higher than the brake pressure that is
actively intervene where appropriate. achieved by the automatic braking function.
Automatic brake actuation is interrupted.
211
CONTROLS Safety
Canceling automatic braking ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering

behavior.
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance when ▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length
making an evasive maneuver. of trip.
Cancel automatic braking: ▷ Attention of the driver through the Driver
Attention Camera.
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the sys-
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
tem is active and can also display a break rec-
ommendation.
Fatigue alert
Break recommendation
Principle Setting break recommendation
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert- The fatigue alert is active automatically each
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo- time the drive-ready state is switched on and
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The can thus display a break recommendation.
system recommends a break.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Safety information
1. "MENU"
Warning 2. "Vehicle apps"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 3. "Driving settings"

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 4. "Driver Assistance"
one's physical state. An increasing lack of 5. "Safety and warnings"
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
6. "Fatigue Alert"
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested 7. Select the desired setting.
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
Function with the recommendation to take a break.
The system is switched on each time drive- During the display, various settings can be se-
ready state is switched on. lected.
After starting the trip, the system is trained to After a break, another break recommendation
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati- cannot be displayed until after approximately
gue can be detected. 45 minutes.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account: System limits
System functionality may be limited. If system
functionality is limited, either no warning is is-
sued or an incorrect warning is issued. The
212
Safety CONTROLS
system function may be limited in the following Depending on the equipment, the instrument
situations: cluster has up to 3 infrared light sources. De-
▷ When the time is set incorrectly. pending on the light conditions, they can be
visible when the vehicle is in standby mode.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
▷ When the road condition is poor.
▷ With sunglasses with high protection from
▷ In the event of strong side winds. infrared light.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of
a break during longer trips on highways.
Driver Attention Camera

Principle
Depending on the equipment, a camera in the
instrument cluster monitors the driver activity
or the driver's direction of view.
General information
For support by assistance systems, the atten-
tion of the driver is analyzed by evaluating the
head position and eye opening of the driver.
For full operability, make sure that the field of
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-
structed.
Overview
213
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Principle
now and will be available in the future, even if Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep the
they are not available in the owned vehicle. vehicle on a steady course by reducing drive
power and by brake interventions on individual
wheels.
General information
Antilock Braking System The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for instance:
▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
Principle
▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
can lead to understeering.
of the wheels during braking.
The vehicle maintains its steerability even dur- Safety information
ing emergency braking, which increases the
active driving safety.
The Antilock Braking System is ready after Warning
each time drive readiness is turned on. The system cannot serve as a substitute for
Brake assistant the system, it cannot independently react
The brake assistant applies maximum brak- accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
ing assistance when the brake is depressed tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
quickly. It reduces the braking distance to a closely, be ready to take over steering and
minimum during emergency braking. The ad- braking at any time, and actively intervene
vantages of the Antilock Braking System are where appropriate.
thereby utilized.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of emergency braking.
Adaptive brake assistant

In combination with Cruise Control with Dis-
tance Control, this system ensures that the
brakes respond even more rapidly with brake
actuation in critical situations.
214
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Overview Indicator/warning lights

Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Button in the vehicle Stability Control is deactivated.
Indicator light pulsates: Dynamic Sta-

bility Control controls the drive and
brake forces. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic

Stability Control has malfunctioned or
is initializing. No driving stabilization.
My Modes
Have the system immediately checked by an
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
When Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,
Setting for increased driving
driving stability is reduced while accelerating dynamics
and when cornering.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Principle
Stability Control as soon as possible.
"SPORT PLUS": This setting is used to adjust
the vehicle for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence.
The Dynamic Stability Control and thereby the
2. "Switch mode"
driving stability are limited during acceleration
3. "SPORT" and when cornering.
4. "Settings"
5. "Driving dynamics" Overview
6. "DSC OFF"
Button in the vehicle
Dynamic Stability Control is activated when
changing to another drive mode.
"SPORT": the last setting applied to Dynamic
Stability Control remains saved in the mode.
Display
In the instrument cluster

DSC OFF: Displayed on the instrument cluster
when Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
215
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
My Modes Drive-off support

Principle
Activating/deactivating increased The function supports driving off in certain sit-
driving dynamics uations on difficult ground, such as snow or
sand.
General information
2. "Switch mode"
When driving off on difficult road conditions,
3. "SPORT" such as snow or loose ground, the drive-off
4. "Settings" support provides the best possible traction.
5. "Driving dynamics" The function provides maximum drive power
with adapted driving stability in the low speed
6. "SPORT PLUS"
range.
Dynamic Stability Control is activated when
changing to another drive mode.
Activating/deactivating the drive-off
"SPORT": the last setting applied to Dynamic support
Stability Control remains saved in the mode.
1. "MENU"
Display 2. "Vehicle apps"
Indicator/warning lights 4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
The indicator light illuminates: in- 5. "Drive-off support"
creased driving dynamics activated. 6. "Activate once" or "Deactivate"
The drive-off support remains active until it is
Automatic program change deactivated or the driving mode is changed.
The increased driving dynamics will be deacti-
vated automatically, for instance in the follow-
ing situations:
xDrive
▷ When the Distance Control is activated.
Principle
▷ In case of a brake intervention by the assis-
tance systems. xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve-
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and other
▷ If the suspension control system fails. suspension control systems, such as Dynamic
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. Stability Control, further optimizes traction and
driving dynamics.
General information
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
the front and rear axles as required by the driv-
ing situation and road conditions.
216
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Because of the needs-based use of the all- instance, this results in a harmonious lane
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a re- change.
duction in consumption. In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur-
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
Automatic Differential Brake driver intervenes, for instance in case of over-
steering.
Principle
Automatic Differential Brake controls the driv- Setting
ing power by automatic brake intervention on The system offers several different settings.
individual wheels. With the driving modes of the My Modes, the
system can be set to comfortable or dynamic.
General information Additional information:
The function works in the same way as a My Modes, refer to page 139.
differential lock and improves traction on a
loose surface, for example. The system de-
tects when a wheel begins to spin and auto-
Using tire chains
matically brakes this wheel. In order to guarantee free movement of the
wheels when operating with tire chains, rear
The driving power is diverted to the wheel with
axle steering must be turned off when tire
better traction.
chains are mounted.
As a result, the driving power is transferred
more efficiently to the wheels during accelera-
tions. Rear axle steering during operation with tire
chains, refer to page 336.
Integral Active Steering Malfunction

Principle Steering system may be faulty.
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-
neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more
direct steering response possible. In the event of a malfunction, the steering
wheel must be turned further at lower speeds.
General information The response of the vehicle is more sensitive
in higher speed ranges.
The Integral Active Steering is a combination
of the variable steering ratio of the front axle There is no longer support of the Integral Ac-
and the rear axle steering. tive Steering in critical driving situations.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu- Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
verability at low speeds by turning the rear Have the system checked by an authorized
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the service center or another qualified service cen-
front wheels. ter or repair shop.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned
in the same direction as the front wheels. For
217
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and options 6. "Speed warning"
7. "Warning above:"
This chapter describes model-specific equip- 8. Select the desired setting.
now and will be available in the future, even if Applying current speed as the
speed warning
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Speed warning 4. "Driver Assistance"
Principle 6. "Speed warning"
The speed warning can be used to set a speed 7. "Adopt current speed"
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
Speed Limit Info
General information
Another warning occurs when the set speed Speed Limit Info
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by
3 mph/5 km/h. Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
Activating/deactivating the speed speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
warning necessary, the Head-up display.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
4. "Driver Assistance" well as overhead sign posts.
5. "Safety and warnings" Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
6. "Speed warning" and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
Adjusting the speed or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
1. "MENU"
The system may also show speed limits that
2. "Vehicle apps"
apply to routes that are not signposted if the
3. "Driving settings" navigation system has current map data.
218
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
For information on the current map version 7. "Speed limits"

and map updates, see Map update in the Nav- 8. "Show current limit"
igation system chapter.
Additional information: Display
▷ Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6. Speed Limit Info
Safety information Icon Description
Current speed limit.

Warning Depending on the national-
The system cannot serve as a substitute for market version, it is possible
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing to switch between the units of
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of measurement.
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of No data on current speed limit
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- available.
closely, be ready to take over steering and Speed Limit Info not available.
where appropriate.
If the detected speed limit is exceeded and
warnings are enabled, the display flashes and
Sensors
an acoustic signal sounds.
The system is controlled by a camera behind
Enabling warnings:
the windshield.
1. "MENU"
Displaying Speed Limit Info 2. "Vehicle apps"
General information
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden
via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending 5. "Driving"
on the national-market version, Speed Limit 6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
Info is continuously displayed in the instrument 7. "Warning when speeding"
cluster.
8. "Acoustic warning"
Displaying Speed Limit Info

Settings
1. "MENU"
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Driving"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
219
6. "Speed Limit Assistant" General information

7. Select the desired setting. Depending on the equipment, the speed con-
trol systems include the following individual
System limits systems.
▷ Cruise control, refer to page 222.
System limits of the sensors
▷ Distance control, refer to page 225.
▷ Assisted Driving, refer to page 230.
▷ Camera, refer to page 36.
▷ Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 235.
Functional limitations Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the individual systems are en-
The system function may be limited and may hanced with additional functions.
provide incorrect information in the following
situations: Some functions can be operated via voice con-
trol.
▷ Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint. Additional information:
▷ Traffic signs do not comply with the stand- BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
ard. page 53.
▷ In areas that are not included in the naviga-

tion system map data.
Safety information
▷ If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable. Warning
▷ When roads deviate from the navigation, The system cannot serve as a substitute for
such as due to changes in road layout. the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
front of you. the system, it cannot independently react
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
signs applied to them. tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. closely, be ready to take over steering and
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a paral- braking at any time, and actively intervene
lel road are detected. where appropriate.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
Speed control systems when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
Principle a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
The speed control systems provide support
when driving.
220
Overview Icon Speed control system
Assisted Driving: Cruise control with

Buttons on the steering wheel
Distance Control, Steering Assistant,
and Lane Guidance.
Button Function
Assisted Driving Plus: System for
Turn last active speed control sys-
driving on highways.
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems. The activated function is shown in green.
Select the desired speed control The function is displayed in white when it can
system. be activated.
The function is displayed in gray if it has mal-
Store current speed. functioned or if the functional requirements
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug- have not been met.
gested speed manually.
Interrupting speed control systems
Set speed.
automatically
Depending on the system, speed control
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-
Turning on/selecting speed control stance in the following situations:
systems ▷ When moving from selector lever position D
to P, N, or R.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting.
1. Turn on: press the button.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ "SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased
2. Select: when the system active, driving dynamics are activated.
press the button repeatedly until the de-
▷ When braking manually.
sired speed control system is displayed in
the toolbar in the instrument cluster. ▷ When the accelerator pedal is pressed all
the way down.
Icon Speed control system
Interrupting speed control systems
Cruise control.
manually
Distance control. ▷ Press the button.
▷ Press button to select another

speed control system.
221
Continuing speed control systems Cruise Control

Press the button.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
Turning off speed control systems justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
automatically
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
The speed control systems turn off automati- needed.
cally when the drive readiness is turned off.
General information
Turning off speed control systems
The system can be activated starting at
manually 20 mph/30 km/h.
Press and hold this button. Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise
The speed control systems are turned Control settings can change under certain
off and the displays extinguish. conditions. For instance, the acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Adjusting speed values Safety information

Press the corresponding button repeat-
edly until the desired value is set.
Warning
▷ Press the corresponding button up to the The system cannot serve as a substitute for
resistance point to increase or decrease the the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
set speed by 1 mph/1 km/h. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
▷ Press the button past the resistance point the system, it cannot independently react
to change the set speed by a maximum of to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
5 mph/10 km/h. accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
A mark is displayed on the where appropriate.
speedometer for the set speed.
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive. Warning
▷ Gray marking: system is in- The use of the system can lead to an in-
terrupted. creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
▷ No marking: system is switched off. uations, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ With high traffic volume.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
222
There may be a risk of accident or risk of In vehicles without distance control: turn on the
damage to property. Only use the system if Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering
driving at constant speed is possible. wheel.
1. If necessary, press the button.

Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of 2. If necessary, press the button re-
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely Cruise control is active. The current speed is
and actively intervene where appropriate. maintained and stored as set speed.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark on the speedometer is
Overview
set to the current speed.
Buttons on the steering wheel When the Cruise Control is turned on, the driv-
ing mode may change.
Button Function
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
tem on/off.
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
systems.
Select the desired speed control
Speed control systems, refer to page 220.
system.
Store current speed.

Adjusting the speed
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug- Store/maintain speed
Press the button in the interrupted
Set speed. state.
When the system is switched on, the current

speed is maintained and stored as the set
Turning on the Cruise Control speed.
In vehicles with distance control: change the The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control ometer.
without distance control.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
Additional information: be turned on.
Distance control, refer to page 225. When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,
the current speed can also be stored by press-
ing a button:
223
Press the button. At the current speed

Press the button to continue Cruise
Control at the current speed.
Changing the speed
Press the corresponding button until Speed Limit Assistant: at the
the set speed is set. suggested speed
If active, the displayed speed is stored When a speed is suggested, press the
and the vehicle reaches the stored speed button to accept the Cruise Control at
when the road is clear. the suggested speed.
The maximum speed that can be set depends
on the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Pressing the button to the resistance point and
holding it: vehicle accelerates or decelerates
Display in the speedometer
without pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle ▷ Green marking: system is ac-
maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch tive, the marking indicates
beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle the desired speed.
to accelerate more rapidly. ▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
Continuing cruise control
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
At the stored speed
An interrupted cruise control can be continued Indicator light
by calling up the stored speed. ▷ Indicator light green: system is ac-
Make sure that the difference between current tive.
speed and stored speed is not too large be- ▷ No indicator light: the system is
fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, turned off or interrupted.
unintentional deceleration or acceleration may
occur.
Displays in the Head-up display
Press the button with the system inter-
rupted. Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
Cruise control is continued with the stored val- up Display.
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value System limits
is deleted and cannot be called up again: The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
▷ When the system is switched off. speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle
▷ When selecting another speed control sys-
may exceed or drop below the set desired
tem.
speed in some situations; for instance, on
downhill or uphill grades.
224
Distance control
Warning
Principle
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi- Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to against rolling away.
the Cruise Control.
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto- ▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
matically. turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that ▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
the set distance to the vehicle ahead is main- also secure the vehicle, for instance with
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the a wheel chock.
given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
Warning
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed. The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
and actively intervene where appropriate.
given system limits.
Otherwise, drive off independently, such as by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-
ing the button for the speed setting on the Warning
steering wheel. Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
Safety information instance in the following situations:
▷ When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
Warning
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
The system cannot serve as a substitute for lane.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of ▷ When approaching stationary vehicles at
the system, it cannot independently react speed.
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation intervene where appropriate.
where appropriate.
225
Overview Turning on Cruise Control with

distance control
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function 1. If necessary, press the button.

tem on/off. 2. If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until distance control is selected.
systems. Cruise control with distance control is active.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
Select the desired speed control set speed.
system.
The selected distance to a vehicle driving
ahead is maintained.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
light up and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Set speed. When the distance control is turned on, the
driving mode may change.
Adjusting the speed

Sensors
The speed can be set with the buttons on the
steering wheel.
sors:
Cruise control, refer to page 222.
Additional information: Interrupting Cruise control with
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36. distance control automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
Application range following situations, for example:
The system is best used on well-maintained ▷ When braking manually.
roads.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and ▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
the vehicle equipment. ▷ "SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased
The system can also be activated when sta- driving dynamics are activated.
tionary. ▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting.
▷ Driver's seat belt and driver's door are
opened.
▷ The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
226
▷ The detection range of the radar is im- Adjusting the distance

paired, for instance by contamination or 1. "MENU"
heavy precipitation.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the 3. "Driving settings"
system. 4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Turning the speed control system 6. "Distance control"
off/interrupting 7. "Distance"
The speed control system can be turned off or 8. Select the desired setting.
canceled automatically or manually.
Additional information: Automatic adaptation of the distance
Speed control systems, refer to page 220. Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: the system can be adjusted so
Continuing cruise control that the distance to the vehicle driving in front
An interrupted cruise control can be continued is automatically adjusted within the configured
by calling up the stored speed. distance according to the traffic situation or the
ambient conditions, for instance poor visibility.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large be- 1. "MENU"
fore calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, 2. "Vehicle apps"
unintentional deceleration or acceleration may
occur.
5. "Driving"
Cruise control, refer to page 222.
6. "Distance control"
Distance 7. "Situational distance control"
Safety information Changing between Cruise Control

with/without Distance Control
Warning
Safety information
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There Warning
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to The system does not react to traffic driv-
property. Be aware to the surrounding traffic ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to stored speed. There may be a risk of accident
the traffic and weather conditions and main- or risk of damage to property. Adjust the set
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
by braking. needed.
227
Changing over the Cruise Control mode Indicator/warning lights

Turning Cruise Control without distance control
on or off: Icon Description
1. "MENU" Vehicle icon white:

2. "Vehicle apps" No distance control display, as the
accelerator pedal is being pressed.
4. "Driver Assistance" Green icon:
5. "Driving" A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
6. "Distance control"
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
7. "Switch to Cruise Control"
in front is detected.
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.
Vehicle icon flashes green:
Displays in the instrument cluster Vehicle in front drove off.
Icon flashes gray:

General information The conditions are not adequate for
Depending on the equipment version, the dis- the system to work.
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
Display in the speedometer resume control by pressing on the
▷ Green marking: system is ac- brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
tive, the marking indicates
Vehicle icon flashes red and a signal
the desired speed.
sounds:
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
terrupted, the marking indi-
ver, if necessary.
cates the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Displays in the Head-up display
Set speed
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up Display.
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the dis-
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active in the fol-

lowing situations:
228
▷ Cruise Control with Distance Control Merging vehicles

switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-Up Display, refer to page 151.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
System limits of the sensors If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

merges into your lane, the system may not be
Additional information: able to automatically restore the selected dis-
▷ Cameras, refer to page 36. tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 37. lected distance in certain situations, including
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi-
Detection range cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Cornering

tection range.
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
When the set speed is too high for a curve,

Deceleration the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves
The system does not decelerate in the follow- may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
ing situations: curve at an appropriate speed.
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving The system has a limited detection range. Sit-
road users. uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-
▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traf- cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
fic lights. detected very late.
▷ For cross traffic.

▷ For oncoming traffic.
229
Assisted Driving
Principle
Assisted Driving enhances the distance con-
trol with a Steering Assistant with lane guid-
ance. The system helps keep the vehicle in its
lane. For this purpose, the system executes
supporting steering movements, for instance
When you approach a curve the system may when cornering.
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel- General information
erates you may compensate for it by briefly Depending on the speed, the system orients
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-
pedal the system is reactivated and controls cles in front.
speed independently.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off Safety information
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades. Warning
▷ In front of bumps in the road. The system cannot serve as a substitute for
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
Weather the system, it cannot independently react
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle detection. closely, be ready to take over steering and
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that braking at any time, and actively intervene
are already recognized. where appropriate.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or evading.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle
may exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations; for instance, on
downhill or uphill grades.
230
Overview ▷ The sensor system calibration process is

complete.
Buttons on the steering wheel ▷ Distance control is active.
▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
Button Function
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
Turn last active speed control sys- ▷ Depending on the equipment:
tem on/off.
Side-collision warning is active.
systems. Turn on Assisted Driving
Select the desired speed control
system.
1. If necessary, press the button.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug- 2. If necessary, press the button re-
gested speed manually. peatedly until Assisted Driving is selected.
Set speed. Steering wheel icon lights up gray.

Sensors System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled.
sors: Steering wheel icon lights up green.
▷ Camera behind the windshield. The system is active.
When the system is switched on, the Forward
▷ Depending on the equipment: Collision Mitigation and, depending on the
Radar sensors, side, front. equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-
▷ Depending on the equipment: tive.
Radar sensors, side, rear.

Interruption Assisted Driving
automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
Functional requirements following situations:
▷ Depending on the equipment: speed below ▷ Depending on the equipment: at a
130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h. speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or
▷ Sufficient lane width. 110 mph/180 km/h.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim. ▷ After releasing the steering wheel.
▷ Sufficiently wide curve radius. ▷ With strong steering intervention.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane. ▷ When leaving own lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off. ▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
231
▷ When the lane is too narrow. Icon Description

▷ If a lane boundary is not detected and there
Yellow steering wheel icon:
is no vehicle driving in front.
The hands are not grasping the
▷ The Cruise Control with distance control is
steering wheel. The system is still ac-
interrupted.
tive.
▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
Grab the steering wheel with your
tened.
hands.
Steering wheel icon lights up gray.
Red steering wheel icon and a signal
sounds:
The hands are not grasping the
System activates automatically as soon as all steering wheel. System interruption is
function conditions are fulfilled. imminent.
The system reduces the speed to a
Displays in the instrument cluster standstill if applicable.
It is possible that the system will
Icon Description not execute any supporting steering
Gray steering wheel icon: movements.
The system is on standby. Grab the steering wheel with your

hands.
Green steering wheel icon:
The system is activated. Depending on the equipment and national-
The system supports the driver in
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
display area of the instrument cluster.
Yellow flashing steering wheel icon: Additional information:
Lane boundary driven over. Assisted View, refer to page 165.
The steering wheel vibrates where
applicable. Displays on the steering wheel
Yellow steering wheel icon and a sig-
nal sounds, if applicable:
System interruption is imminent.
Depending on the national-market

version: steering wheel icon flashes
red or lights up red. A signal sounds:
System is switching off.
Depending on the equipment, the two LEDs

above the keypads illuminate analog to the
displays in the instrument cluster.
232
The steering wheel displays can be turned Hands on the steering wheel
on/off as required. The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
1. "MENU" wheel contact in the following situations:
2. "Vehicle apps" ▷ Driving with gloves.
3. "Driving settings" ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
6. "Light elements" cannot be activated or effectively used, for in-
7. Select the desired setting. stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
Displays in the Head-up display ▷ Depending on the equipment, with auto-
Depending on the equipment, the system in- matic formation of emergency lanes.
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
▷ Within city limits.
up display.
Weather
System limits
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
General information
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
The system cannot be activated or meaning-
boundaries.
fully used in certain situations.
▷ Short-term interruptions in case of already
Safety information detected vehicles and lane boundaries.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
Warning vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or or evading.
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Automatic Lane Change
Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
Assistant
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations. Principle
The Automatic Lane Change Assistant also
assists when changing lanes on multi-lane
System limits of the sensors roads.
▷ Cameras, refer to page 36. General information
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 37. The system uses the Assisted Driving sensors.
233
Safety information Turning on/turning off Automatic

Lane Change Assistant
Warning 1. "MENU"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 2. "Vehicle apps"
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 3. "Driving settings"
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of 4. "Driver Assistance"
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of 5. "Driving"
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- 6. "Assisted Driving"
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation 7. "Automatic Lane Change"
braking at any time, and actively intervene Changing lanes
where appropriate.
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or 2. Press the turn signal lever in the required
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and direction to the pressure point for signaling
local laws. briefly.
Additionally, the Assisted Driving notices ap-
ply.
▷ The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving are met.
Assisted Driving, refer to page 230. Supporting steering movement in the desired
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy- direction can be felt a short time later.
clists and with physical barriers to oncom- After the lane change, the system helps keep
ing traffic, such as crash barriers. the vehicle in the new lane.
▷ A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient
distance behind your own vehicle since be- Canceling a lane change
ginning the drive.
The lane change can be canceled by steering
▷ Lane boundaries are detected. movement into the opposite direction or by op-
▷ Maximum speed approx. erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.
110 mph/180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
234
Displays in the instrument cluster ited time. Information on how long Assisted
Driving Plus will be available is provided before
Icon Description and during sale of the vehicle. Assisted Driving
Plus may be canceled earlier due to technical
Steering wheel icon and lane change or legal requirements. More information on the
arrow icon are green: availability of Assisted Driving Plus can be re-
The system carries out a lane quested from an authorized service center.
change.
Steering wheel icon is green and line

Safety information
for lane marking on respective side is
gray: Warning
The system detected the lane change The system cannot serve as a substitute for
request. Lane change not currently the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
possible. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
Depending on the equipment and national- to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
market version, information for the system is accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
displayed in the Assisted View in the central tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
display area of the instrument cluster. closely, be ready to take over steering and
Additional information: braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Assisted View, refer to page 165.
System limits
Warning
The limits of the Assisted Driving system ap-
The system is only intended for use on
ply.
roads with structural separations, such as
Additional information: highways. Because of the system limits, the
Assisted Driving, refer to page 230. system can also remain active on roads with-
out structural separations and may not react
as expected. There is a risk of accident. De-
Assisted Driving Plus activate the system if it is enabled on roads
without structural separations.
Principle
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
Assisted Driving Plus provides vehicle control
the use of this function may be prohibited or
assistance on highways.
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
Supporting steering movements take place local laws.
without the driver actively steering.
Additionally, the Assisted Driving notices ap-
ply.
General information
The system uses the buttons on the steering
wheel and the Assisted Driving sensors.
Assisted Driving Plus is enabled when the ve-
hicle is delivered and only available for a lim-
235
Functional requirements Turning Assisted Driving Plus on/off

▷ Assisted Driving Plus is available. 1. "MENU"
▷ The functional requirements for Assisted 2. "Vehicle apps"
Driving are met. 3. "Driving settings"
Assisted Driving is active and the LED dis- 4. "Driver Assistance"
plays on the steering wheel are switched
5. "Driving"
on.
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"
▷ The emergency stop assistant is activated
on the control display and the functional Assisted Driving Plus is automatically offered
requirements for the emergency stop assis- when Assisted Driving is active and all func-
tant are met. tional requirements for Assisted Driving Plus
are met.
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 205. Press the button repeatedly until As-
▷ The navigation data must be up to date. sisted Driving Plus is selected.
The automatic map update setting must be Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
activated in the data protection menu. steering wheel.
Data protection, refer to page 67. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
▷ The function must be available in the coun- shown in green.
try in which the vehicle is driven. The system begins to assist the driver with
▷ Driving on a road like a highway without vehicle control.
pedestrians or cyclists and with physical When the system is switched on, the following
barriers to oncoming traffic, such as crash functions are enabled:
barriers.
▷ Forward Collision Warning.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
▷ Sufficiently wide curve radius.
▷ Lane departure warning.
▷ Lane markings in the form of lane marking
lines are detected. ▷ Adapting the speed to the route.
▷ Speed below approx. 85 mph/135 km/h. If necessary, a larger distance is set for Dis-
tance Control.
▷ Antennas on the roof must not be covered,
e.g., with roof cargo or snow.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
▷ The systems in the vehicle, e.g., the At-
tention Assistant and the Driver Attention
Camera recognize that the driver is rested.
236
Displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, the system in-
Icon Description formation can also be displayed in the Head-
Indicator light green: system is active. up display.
Navigation system displays

Indicator light gray: the system has Roads on which Assisted Driving Plus supports
been interrupted and will activate au- vehicle guidance can be displayed in the navi-
tomatically as soon as all functional gation system.
requirements are met.
1. "NAV"
White indicator light: the system can 2. "Suggestions"
be activated.
Depending on the equipment and national- System limits

market version, information for the system is The system limits of the following systems ap-
displayed in the Assisted View in the central ply:
display area of the instrument cluster.
▷ Assisted Driving
▷ Driver Attention Camera
▷ Fatigue alert
Displays on the steering wheel Additional information:

▷ Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 213.
▷ Fatigue alert, refer to page 212.
Speed Limit Assistant

Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
The two LEDs above the keypads light up de- speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
pending on the situation. plied.
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted. General information
Grab the steering wheel with your hands. When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
▷ Red: system will be deactivated. Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
Grab the steering wheel immediately with following systems:
your hands.
▷ Cruise control.
Additional information: ▷ Distance control.
237
▷ Assisted Driving. Turning Speed Limit Assistant

▷ Assisted Driving Plus. on/off
The speed value is suggested as the new de- 1. "MENU"
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed 2. "Vehicle apps"
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated. 3. "Driving settings"
Safety information 5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
Warning 7. "Speed limits"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 8. Select the desired setting:
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of can be applied manually.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
closely, be ready to take over steering and ▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
braking at any time, and actively intervene version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
where appropriate. Limit Assistant will be turned off.
If necessary, other proactive comfort
functions will be turned off.
Warning Additional information:
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted Speed Limit Info, refer to page 218.
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic Displays in the instrument cluster
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
and actively intervene where appropriate. ter when the system and a speed control sys-
tem are activated.
Overview Icon Function
Detected change of a speed limit with

Buttons on the steering wheel immediate effect.
Depending on the national-market
Button Function
version, it is possible to switch be-
Accept suggested speed manually. tween the units of measurement.
Indicator light illuminates green: the

Set speed, refer to Cruise Control. detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
238
Manual adoption System limits

A detected speed limit can be applied man- Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
ually to the active speed control system. Limit Info system.
When the SET icon is displayed, press Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
the button. Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to
the Cruise control with distance control.
Speed adjustment
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to
Principle page 220.
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is ▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
applied exactly or with a tolerance. page 36.
General information
Adapting the speed to the
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up route
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim- Principle
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or The system can be configured so that with
deactivated. active distance control, the vehicle adapts the
speed automatically to the route.
Setting the speed adjustment For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
1. "MENU" following situations as necessary:
2. "Vehicle apps" ▷ Before making turns.
3. "Driving settings" ▷ Before a roundabout.
4. "Driver Assistance" ▷ Before a curve.
5. "Driving" ▷ In front of an exit ramp on highways or
6. "Speed Limit Assistant" highway-like roads.
Safety information
▷ "Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance
for speed adjustments, which applies to
all speed limits. Warning
▷ "2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti- The system cannot serve as a substitute for
vate additional speed adaptation. the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
▷ "Adjust speed limits": with activated the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
additional speed adjustment, set the the system, it cannot independently react
tolerance for speed limits up to to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
40 mph/60 km/h. accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
239
braking at any time, and actively intervene 4. "Driver Assistance"

where appropriate. 5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
Additionally, the Cruise Control, distance con-
trol and Assisted Driving notices apply. 7. "Cornering speed"
Additional information: 8. Select the desired setting.
▷ Cruise control, refer to page 222.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Distance control, refer to page 225.
Depending on the equipment and national-
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
Functional requirements display area of the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise Control and distance control are acti- Additional information:
vated.
▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
▷ With navigation system: guidance is acti- System limits
vated.
Depending on the national-market version or
The use of navigation software via Apple country in which the vehicle is currently being
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func- driven, the function may not be available.
tional limitations, for instance deviations
The system does not respond at all or with
with navigation instructions.
limitations to the route ahead when the navi-
▷ The function must be available in the coun- gation system is unable to clearly identify the
try in which the vehicle is driven. position of the vehicle.
Additionally, the limits of the Cruise Control,
Adapting speed automatically to distance control, Assisted Driving and Speed
route Limit Assistant systems apply.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"
Adjusting the cornering speed

The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-
ing on national-market version.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
240
Parking CONTROLS
Parking
Vehicle features and options ▷ Memory Parking, refer to page 261.
▷ Remote control, refer to page 264.
This chapter describes model-specific equip- ▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 265.
now and will be available in the future, even if Safety information
Warning
Parking assistance systems the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
General information accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
The parking assistance systems include differ- tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
ent individual systems. The individual systems closely, be ready to take over steering and
provide support with assistance functions, sen- braking at any time, and actively intervene
sors and different camera views when parking where appropriate.
and maneuvering or driving in reverse.
Overview
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 246.
▷ Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer Button in the vehicle
to page 246.
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 246.
▷ Side view, refer to page 247.
▷ 3D view, refer to page 247.
▷ Car wash view, refer to page 248.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 248.
▷ Activation points, refer to page 249.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 249. Park assistance button
▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 250.
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.
▷ Active Park Distance Control, refer to Sensors
page 253.
The parking assistance systems are controlled
▷ Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 254. by the following sensors:
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 255.
241
CONTROLS Parking
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump- Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ers. ings or a part of it is depicted.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side. Depending on the national-market version, ei-
▷ Radar sensors, side, front. ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-
era perspective is displayed.
▷ Front camera. Turning display on/off
▷ Rearview camera. General information
Additional information: The parking assistance systems view switches

off automatically when driving forwards or if a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
Operating concept With reverse

The camera-based individual systems are op- When drive readiness is switched on, the dis-
erated with the function bars on the control play is automatically switched on if selector
display. The camera views can be viewed by lever position R is engaged.
selecting the appropriate icon.
Some parking assistance systems can be set Via Parking Assistant button
individually in the Park menu.
Press the button.
Calling up Park menu

1. "MENU"
Via iDrive
2. "Vehicle apps"
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Parking"
5. "Parking"
6. Select the desired settings. Display in the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster shows displays of some
Display parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-
tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.
Principle
The parking assistance systems view helps
with parking and maneuvering by displaying
the Park Distance Control and a variety of
camera perspectives.
General information
Depending on the equipment, one or more
cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
242
Parking CONTROLS
Parking view
1 Status of parking assistance systems

2 Assisted View 1 Toolbar, left
3 Selection menu 2 Camera image
3 Selection window
Display on the control display 4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Semi-automatic camera perspective
General information
6 Side view
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the
activated parking assistance system, the con- 7 Toolbar, right
trol display will vary.
Toolbar, left
Assistance view
Different views and settings can be selected
via the left toolbar depending on the equip-
ment.
▷ "Parking view"
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera
images or the Park Distance Control view
are displayed.
▷ "Assist view"
A stylized view of the vehicle in top view is
1 Toolbar, left displayed.
2 Camera image ▷ "Panorama view"
3 Selection window The cross traffic view is displayed.
4 Toolbar, right ▷ "More"
▷ "3D view"
A three-dimensional visualization is dis-
played.
▷ "Car wash view"
The display of your own lane can be
turned on for easier driving into the car
wash.
▷ "Camera cleaning"
243
CONTROLS Parking
Cleaning of the front camera and rear- Icon Meaning

view camera can be switched on as
needed. White: an available maneuver is se-
lected but is not being performed.
▷ "Settings"
Functional requirements have not
Settings can be entered in the Park been met or the functions transfer
menu. has been completed.
Green: parking assistance system is
Toolbar, right
active. The functions are adopted
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed depending on the system activated.
in the right toolbar.
Memory Parking records the ma-
▷ Status of the parking assistance systems.
neuver to be stored.
▷ Available parking methods of the Automatic
Parking Assistant.
Additional displays
▷ Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
▷ Functions of the Memory Parking. General information
▷ Additional information in case of malfunc- Additional displays can be shown in the cam-
tions. era image of the display of the parking assis-
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make
Status of parking assistance parking and maneuvering easier.
systems
The status of the following parking assistance Turning additional displays on/off
systems is displayed: Several additional displays can be active at the
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant. same time.
▷ Memory Parking. 1. "MENU"

▷ Back-up Assistant. 2. "Vehicle apps"
The icons are shown on the control display in 3. "Driving settings"
the right toolbar and in the status area in the 4. "Driver Assistance"
instrument cluster. In addition to the icon, a
5. "Parking"
message is shown on the control display.
Icon Meaning
The icon indicates the following

meanings:
No search for parking assistance
system offers.
No other parking assistance sys-
tems available.
Parking assistance systems have
failed.
Search for parking assistance sys-

tem offers is active.
244
Parking CONTROLS
Parking aid lines Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help estimate the space re- Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
quired when parking and maneuvering on level The obstacles detected by the Park Distance
roads. Control are shown by marks in the camera im-
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted age.
to the steering wheel movements depending Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
on the steering-wheel angle. green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed camera image identify areas that are currently
on the camera image together with pathway not shown, such as an open door.
lines.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos- System limits
sible turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after Safety information
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle. Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
Using parking aid lines it may react too late or in a manner that is not
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning consistent with normal use. There may be a
circle line leads to within the limits of the risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
parking space. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
the green pathway line covers the corre-
tations.
sponding turning circle line.
245
CONTROLS Parking
System limits of the sensors Functional requirements

Additional information: ▷ The trunk is fully closed.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36. ▷ The camera area is clean and clear.
Non-visible areas Deactivated rearview camera

Because of the camera angle, the areas under When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras. instance when the trunk is open, the camera
image is displayed with gray shading.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by Semi-automatic camera
the system. perspective
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
Principle
mate the distance to the objects on the control
display. Depending on the parking direction and en-
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera
Protruding cargo or a rear-mounted luggage
perspective is displayed with the areas in front
rack can limit the detection range of the cam-
of or behind the vehicle.
era.
General information
Malfunction
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
A camera failure is displayed on the Control
Display.
The detection range of the failed camera is
shown shaded on the control display. Automatic camera
perspective
Rearview camera
Principle
Principle The automatic camera perspective shows a
The rearview camera helps when reverse steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the ing direction.
vehicle is shown on the Control Display. This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
Additional views can be shown on the display, ing situation.
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.
General information
General information As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- changes to a fixed display of the area in
tance systems" chapter. front of or behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to side protection.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
246
Parking CONTROLS
the system uses a semi-automatic camera The system does not detect whether an obsta-
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
automatic camera perspective when reverse still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per- display after a certain time. The area next to
spective will then be maintained for the current the vehicle must be newly captured.
parking operation.
tance systems" chapter. Side view
Side protection Principle
The side view helps when positioning the vehi-
Principle cle at the curb or when other obstacles are on
The side Park Distance Control is automati- the side by displaying the side surroundings.
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows General information
obstacles located next to the vehicle. The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
General information sible obstacles.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- The side view can be selected for the right or
tance systems" chapter. left vehicle side.
Display tance systems" chapter.
3D view
Principle
When 3D view is selected, a circle is displayed
on the control display.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle. General information
▷ No marks: no obstacles were detected. The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon.
▷ Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles. To exit the function, select another camera
function in the left toolbar.
System limits tance systems" chapter.
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
247
CONTROLS Parking
Car wash view camera and the rearview camera capture the
area around the side of the vehicle to improve
the view.
Principle The camera image shows different levels of
The car wash view assists when entering a car distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
wash. ble for distance estimations.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function
General information can be used when driving forward or in re-
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- verse.
tance systems" chapter. Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
Turning the car wash view on/off
Sensors
1. Press the button. The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
2. "More"
3. "Car wash view"
▷ Depending on the equipment: front camera.
Display
Turning the panoramic view on/off

2. "Panorama view"
Display
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving

into a car wash.
Panorama View
Principle Yellow lines on the screen display identify the
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view bumpers of your own vehicle.
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-
intersections. tion, the camera image of the rearview camera
or front camera will be displayed.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The front
248
Parking CONTROLS
Activation points Using activation points

The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
Principle
Positions at which panorama view should 1. "MENU"
switch on automatically can be saved as acti- 2. "Vehicle apps"
vation points. 3. "Driving settings"
General information
5. "Parking"
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
6. "GPS-based"
Depending on national-market version, the ac-
tivation points can be used when driving for-
ward or in reverse. Editing activation points
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance You can rename or delete specific activation
systems chapter. points or all of them.
Functional requirements 1. Press the button.

▷ A GPS signal must be received.
2. "Panorama view"
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile must be ena-
3. "Manage points"
bled.
A list of all saved activation points is dis-
▷ The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
played.
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to
a stored activation point. 4. Select the desired setting.
Storing activation points Door opening angle

1. Drive the vehicle to the position where the
system should switch on and stop.
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
2. Press the button. opening angle indicator is displayed automati-
3. "Panorama view" cally.
4. "Activation point" If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
The current position is displayed. view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
5. "Save activation point"
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
Activation points are saved with the following
proaching road users.
information, for example:
▷ With the city/town. General information
▷ With the city/town and the street. Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
▷ With the GPS coordinates. tance systems" chapter.
You can rename the location and street infor-
mation created automatically.
249
CONTROLS Parking
Display Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Data transfer must be activated.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is Data protection, refer to page 67.
displayed in selector lever position P. ▷ The BMW app must be installed on the mo-
bile end device.
System limits ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
be activated.
display for technical reasons.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 68.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not overlap with any other
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
other objects. View
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding The function can be activated or deactivated
objects may be closer than they appear on the individually or together with other functions.
Control Display.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Remote 3D View 3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Principle 5. Select the desired setting.
The BMW app and the camera pictures in the After the activation, Remote 3D View can
parking view, such as automatic camera per- be accessed in the BMW app.
spective, enable the display of the vehicle’s
surroundings on a mobile device. Functional limitations
The function displays a snapshot of the situa- The system may not be fully functional or may
tion. not be available in the following situations:
▷ With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
General information fields in the display indicate areas that are
For reasons of data protection, the function not recorded by the system.
can only be used three times within two hours.
▷ With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
▷ When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
250
Parking CONTROLS
▷ The vehicle moves faster than walking

speed. Warning
▷ In case of missing or weak Internet connec- Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
tion. Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Park Distance Control Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
Principle is not yet active.
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
Sensors
in front of or behind the vehicle.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sors:
sonic sensors can also be reported.
ers.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m. Turning Park Distance Control
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
on/off
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm. Turning on the system automatically
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic The system switches on automatically in the
warning is issued as early as a distance to the following situations:
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. ▷ When drive readiness is turned on when
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- engaging selector lever position R.
tance systems" chapter. ▷ While approaching detected obstacles
if the speed is lower than approx.
Safety information 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
You may switch automatic activation when ob-
Warning
stacles are detected on and off.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 1. "MENU"
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of 2. "Vehicle apps"
the system, it cannot independently react 3. "Driving settings"
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation 5. "Parking"
closely, be ready to take over steering and 6. "Automatic PDC activation"
where appropriate.
251
CONTROLS Parking
Turning off the system automatically Adjusting the volume

When driving forward, the system turns off au- The volume of the acoustic warning can be
tomatically as needed when a certain distance adjusted.
or speed is exceeded.
1. "MENU"
Turning the system on/off manually 2. "Vehicle apps"
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
5. "Parking"
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
6. "PDC signal volume"
If the system is manually switched on when 7. Set the desired value.
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
Turning off the acoustic warning
system cannot be turned off manually when
acoustic warning can be turned off for an ac-
the reverse gear is engaged.
tive parking operation.
After starting the parking operation, press
Acoustic warning
the icon in the right-hand toolbar.
General information The acoustic warning will be turned on again
automatically for the next drive.
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a
Visual warning
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
General information
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones. The approach to an object is displayed on the
Control Display and in the instrument cluster
When the distance to a detected object is less
as soon as the system is activated.
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded. Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance The detection range of the sensors is rep-
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating resented by shaded, ring-shaped surfaces.
continuous tone will sound between the front Green, yellow, and red markings indicate when
and rear speakers. obstacles are detected in the detection zone.
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning
are turned off when selector lever position P is circle lines and obstacle markings are shown
engaged. for a better estimation of the space required.
Depending on national-market version, the in- When equipped with cross traffic warning: de-
termittent tones are switched off after a short pending on vehicle equipment, a warning is
time when the vehicle is stationary. also shown for vehicles approaching at the
rear and front from the side.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
252
Parking CONTROLS
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle viously detected by the sensors when passing
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve- by.
hicle. The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-
Display ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings hidden after a certain time. The area on the
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be- side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
hind the vehicle. Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ranted warnings.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
View behind vehicle. Malfunction

An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
The detection range of the sensors is
not displayed on the control display.

Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
View next to vehicle.
▷ Shaded area: detection range of sensors.

▷ Gray shaded area: no obstacles were de-
Active Park Distance Control
tected in the detection range.
▷ Colored marks in shaded area: obstacles
Principle
were detected in the detection range. The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
▷ Shaded area interrupted: the area next to tiates emergency braking if there is an acute
the vehicle has not yet been detected. risk of collision.
System limits General information

Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
General information vented under all circumstances.
The function for protecting the vehicle sides The function is available below walking speed
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre- when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
253
CONTROLS Parking
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the During continued driving in this surrounding
brake intervention. No emergency braking is situation, no further emergency braking will
performed. occur.
After emergency braking to a stop, further The system will be turned on again automati-
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro- cally for the next drive.
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as Settings
needed.
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, will be protected by the system.
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time. 1. "MENU"
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- 2. "Vehicle apps"
tance systems" chapter. 3. "Driving settings"
Safety information 5. "Parking"
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
Warning 7. Select the desired setting.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing Display
the system, it cannot independently react As soon as the system detects an ob-
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of stacle, an icon is displayed with a cor-
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- responding message.
closely, be ready to take over steering and System limits
where appropriate. General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
Sensors tance systems" chapter.

sors: Drive-off monitoring
ers.
Principle
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-
itoring reduces the drive power when driving
Turning off Active Park Distance off.
Control temporarily
After emergency braking, the function can be General information
temporarily turned off on the control display.
When obstacles are detected in close range in
1. "Obstacle detected. Emergency braking." front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
braking.
254
Parking CONTROLS
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi- 4. "Driver Assistance"

cle, the system will brake. 5. "Parking"
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- 6. "Drive off monitoring"
7. "Drive off monitoring"
Safety information A Check Control message is displayed where

applicable.
Warning system is automatically turned on again at the
The system cannot serve as a substitute for next drive.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of Canceling reduced drive power
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation ▷ The accelerator pedal is released.
closely, be ready to take over steering and ▷ After the accelerator pedal has been de-
braking at any time, and actively intervene pressed completely twice.
where appropriate. ▷ A specific distance has been traveled.
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by
Sensors covering a certain distance, the drive power is
released gradually.
sors:
Display
ers. As soon as the system detects an ob-
stacle, an icon is displayed with a cor-
responding message.
▷ Selector lever position D, B or R is engaged
System limits
when the vehicle is stationary.
General information
▷ Obstacles are detected in close range in
front of or behind the vehicle. Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
▷ The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,
nearly to the end point.
▷ The accelerator pedal is immediately ap- Automatic Parking Assistant
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-
tion and obstacle detection.
Principle
Turning drive-off monitoring on/off The Automatic Parking Assistant supports
driving into and driving out of parallel and per-
1. "MENU"
pendicular parking spaces.
2. "Vehicle apps"
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
3. "Driving settings" increases the comfort and range of uses of
255
CONTROLS Parking
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to

the parking methods of the Automatic Parking
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are
marked with lines is possible.

This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software Reverse or forward parking perpendicular to
updates. This also applies to individual func- the road, perpendicular parking.
tions of the system.
Information on whether a function is currently
available in the vehicle and if or when the
function can be installed in the vehicle can be
obtained from an authorized service center or
other qualified service center.
General information Driving out of parallel parking spaces.

Parking methods
The system supports the following functions:
Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.
Operation
The operating principle and operation of the
Reverse parking parallel to road, parallel park- system is divided into the following steps:
ing. ▷ Parking space search.
▷ Turning on.
▷ Parking.
▷ Driving out of parking spaces.
Parking space search is always active when
the vehicle is slowly moving straight forward.
256
Parking CONTROLS
Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on With Automatic Parking Assistant Professional,
both sides of the vehicle. the parking operation can be carried out using
When the system is active, the status of the remote control from a smartphone.
system and necessary instructions are dis- Additional information:
played. Remote control, refer to page 264.
Safety information
Warning
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
orientates itself on the following limits when
searching for a parking space:
▷ Bordering objects. braking at any time, and actively intervene
▷ Parking space lines. where appropriate.
▷ Curbs.
NOTICE
Parking operation
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
The system calculates the best possible option
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,
for driving in or out of parking spaces with
among other potential damage. Watch sur-
parking lines and takes control of the following
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
functions while parking:
where appropriate.
▷ Steering.
▷ Acceleration and braking.
▷ Changing gears. Sensors
The parking operation when pulling in is auto- The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
matic. by the following sensors:
When driving out of parallel parking spaces, ▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it ers.
reaches a position where it can be driven out ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
of the parking space without further steering The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
movements. is additionally controlled by the following cam-
When driving out of perpendicular parking eras:
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the ▷ Front camera.
parking space to enable continued driving in
▷ Exterior mirror camera.
the desired direction.
257
CONTROLS Parking
Functional requirements detected in the surrounding area of the ve-

hicle.
Measurement of parking spaces ▷ The vehicle was manually parked in reverse
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap- and objects in the immediate vicinity of the
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. vehicle are detected. The distance to a de-
tected curb is at least 6 inches/15 cm.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than your vehicle.
Suitable parking space
General information:
Turning the Automatic Parking
Assistant on/off
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Via Parking Assistant button
▷ Gap between two objects, each with a mini-
mum length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. Press the button.
▷ Minimum length of adjoining objects ap-
prox. 3 ft/1 m. The current status of the parking assistance
Parallel parking to the road: systems is displayed in the right toolbar.
▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx. With reverse
2.6 ft/0.8 m. Engage selector lever position R.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. The current status of the parking assistance
Perpendicular parking: systems is displayed in the right toolbar.
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m. Via iDrive
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length. 1. "MENU"
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces 2. "Vehicle apps"
must be estimated by the driver. Due to 3. "Parking"
technical limitations, the system is only able The current status of the parking assis-
to approximate the depth of perpendicular tance systems is displayed in the right tool-
parking spaces. bar.
Parking lines:
Parking space must be clearly marked with Displays
lines.
Parking methods
Parking operation The sequence of the displayed icons corre-
▷ Doors and cargo area are closed. sponds to the prioritized parking option.
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened. The direction of the arrow changes for the
icons for parking methods for driving out of a
Leaving parking spaces parking space.
▷ The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant and an object is
258
Parking CONTROLS
Icon Meaning Parking space search

Reverse lengthwise parking, right. ▷ Parking space search is always active when
driving straight forward at a speed of up to
Reverse lengthwise parking, left. approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of
max. 5 ft/1.5 m to parked vehicles.
Reverse perpendicular parking.
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is
Forward perpendicular parking. switched on and parking space search
is activated. Search for suitable parking
Turning parking operation display spaces.
on/off ▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed and
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac- an acoustic signal sounds.
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the ▷ Different icons are shown on the control
camera image on the control display. display for selecting the parking method.
1. "MENU"
Parking using the Automatic
2. "Vehicle apps"
Parking Assistant
1. Press the button or engage reverse
5. "Parking"
gear.
6. "Show assistance info"
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
Turning the signal tone on/off
Parking space search is activated.
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces
The status of the parking space search and
can be turned on and off.
possible parking spaces are displayed on
1. "MENU" the control display and in the instrument
2. "Vehicle apps" cluster.
3. "Driving settings" 2. On the control display: select an offered

parking operation. You can switch to an-
other parking operation as needed.
5. "Parking"
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
6. "Sound when available" parking operation with the thumbwheel on
the steering wheel.
Signal tone of Park Distance Control Green: the system takes control of the
Depending on national-market version, an parking operation.
intermittent tone for Park Distance Control 3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
sounds during an automatic parking operation. play or in the instrument cluster.
A continuous tone will sound when the dis- The speed can be reduced with the brake.
tance to a detected object is less than approx. Other interventions will cancel the system.
8 in/20 cm.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
259
CONTROLS Parking
The end of the parking operation is indi- ▷ Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
cated on the control display and in the in- in succession.
strument cluster. ▷ While lightly pressing the accelerator pedal
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if and simultaneously moving the steering
needed. wheel.
▷ Step on the brake pedal and operate the
Driving out of a parking space using selector lever at the same time.
the Automatic Parking Assistant The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled
1. Turn on drive-ready state. without engaging selector lever position P.
Driving can continue immediately.
2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press Canceling Automatic Parking

button or engage reverse gear.
Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
displayed.
such as the following:
3. On the control display: select the desired
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel
parking method.
or takes over steering.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or
parking method with the thumbwheel on
the selector lever.
the steering wheel.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster. ▷ When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
Green: the system takes control of ma- ▷ With open cargo area.
neuvering. ▷ With open hood.
The speed can be reduced with the brake. ▷ With the doors open.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver
A message will be displayed at the end of assistance systems.
the maneuver.
▷ When changing over to another function on
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits the Control Display.
driving out of parking space and driving off
▷ When the view on the control display is
as usual.
overlaid with messages.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road.
off automatically.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
Canceling Automatic Parking ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
Assistant manually overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
pear.
celed manually at any time, e.g.:
▷ With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by Park Distance Control.
▷ When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
260
Parking CONTROLS
When the system is automatically aborted, se- ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured

lector lever position P is engaged. parking space.
A Check Control message is displayed where ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
applicable. of a port.
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may
Continuing the parking operation be detected or suitable parking spaces may
If parking or leaving a parking space has been not be detected at all.
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed. Malfunction
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again A Check Control message is displayed.
and follow the instructions on the control dis- The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-
play or in the instrument cluster. tioned. Have the system checked by an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
System limits service center or repair shop.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis- Memory Parking
Principle
No parking assistance The Memory Parking provides support for re-
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of- curring parking and maneuvering situations.
fer assistance in the following situations: Parking and maneuvering operations can be
▷ In tight curves. recorded and then carried out automatically by
▷ For diagonal parking spaces. the system.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking
spaces that are only marked with lines on Vehicle features and options
the ground. The system orients itself ac- This system may not be available in the
cording to objects. owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
▷ For special parking lots such as pay parking tional equipment, the national-market version
lots with automatic locking mechanisms, or the option for later enabling and software
coin parking or mechanical parking sys- updates. This also applies to individual func-
tems. tions of the system.
Functional limitations available in the vehicle and if or when the
The system may be limited in the following function can be installed in the vehicle can be
situations: obtained from an authorized service center or
other qualified service center.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. Additional information:
▷ On slippery ground. Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
261
CONTROLS Parking
General information Detection range

A recurring maneuver is driven manually and
thereby recorded.
When the vehicle reaches the activation area
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-
trol display or in the instrument cluster.
After the activation, the system takes control
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver
automatically.
The maneuver can be performed remotely us- The detection range for a maneuver is divided
ing remote control on a smartphone. into the following areas:
Additional information: ▷ Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will
begin with the localization in the back-
Remote control, refer to page 264.
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m
Follow the information in the "Parking assis- around the distance covered of a recorded
tance systems" chapter. maneuver.
▷ Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-
Safety information prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,
the stored maneuver can be displayed on
Warning the control display. A manual approach is
thereby possible up to the activation range,
arrow 3.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of ▷ Activation range, arrow 3: the maneu-
the system, it cannot independently react ver on the control display can be activated
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m. After
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- the activation, the system takes control of
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation the vehicle and carries out the maneuver
closely, be ready to take over steering and automatically.
where appropriate. Sensors
sors and cameras:
NOTICE
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto ers.
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene ▷ Front camera.
where appropriate. ▷ Top view cameras.
262
Parking CONTROLS
Recording maneuver If necessary, enter the desired name for the

recorded maneuver.
General information 7. "Save recording"
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ- Do not move the vehicle until the recording
ent locations. has been stored.
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-
corded. Performing stored maneuver
Identical maneuvers under different ambient 1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range
conditions can be recorded, such as light con- and stop. The control display and instru-
ditions. ment cluster indicate that a stored maneu-
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov- ver can be activated.
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible. 2. : activate stored maneuver.
In total, a distance covered of approx. Green: after activation, the system takes
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible control of the vehicle and performs the ma-
maneuvers can be recorded. neuver automatically. If applicable, follow
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less the instructions on the control display or in
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded. the instrument cluster.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Recording maneuver Other interventions will cancel the system.
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from At the end of the parking operation, selec-
which a maneuver must be recorded and tor lever position P is set.
stop.
Canceling the Memory Parking
manually
The vehicle can be controlled manually during
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-
displayed.
tions:
3. "Record new path"
▷ Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi- in succession.
tion.
▷ When lightly pressing the accelerator pedal
The maneuver is recorded. and slightly moving the steering wheel at
When recording a route, do not drive faster the same time.
than 9 mph/15 km/h. ▷ Step on the brake pedal and operate the
While recording, the distance covered will selector lever at the same time.
be displayed. The Memory Parking is canceled without en-
When the maximum distance covered or gaging selector lever position P. Driving can
the maximum speed is reached, a message continue immediately.
will be displayed and a signal tone will
sound. Canceling the Memory Parking
5. With a stationary vehicle: "Save recording" automatically
6. "Name:" The system automatically cancels in situations
263
CONTROLS Parking
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel System limits

or takes over steering.
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or General information
the selector lever. Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
▷ When the driver's seat belt is not fastened. tance systems" chapter.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With open hood.
The system does not provide support when
▷ With the doors open.
towing a trailer.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver
System limits can cause functional limitations,
assistance systems.
such as in the following situations:
▷ When the system limits of the ultrasonic
▷ With poor GPS reception.
sensors and cameras are reached.
▷ When changing over to another function on
the Control Display. ▷ In case of recorded maneuvers where the
system minimum distance to objects can-
not be maintained.
▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing
▷ In case of obstacles.
and driving the distance covered, for in-
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road. stance other tires or changed ambient con-
▷ When the lane is too narrow. ditions like light conditions or weather.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-
In the event of an automatic cancellation of neuvers when driving into the activation
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a area.
complete stop and selector lever position P is ▷ In multi-story parking garages, for record-
engaged. ings at different parking levels, or for re-
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if cordings that run over several parking lev-
needed. Turn the Memory Parking on again els.
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Remote control
Editing stored maneuvers
Individual or all maneuvers can be deleted or Principle
renamed. With remote control, the vehicle can be driven
remotely when parking and maneuvering using
1. "MENU"
the Memory Parking and Automatic Parking
2. "Vehicle apps" Assistant Professional.
3. "Driving settings" The maneuver is performed independently,
4. "Driver Assistance" outside the vehicle, using a smartphone. This
5. "Parking" makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.
6. "Recorded paths" You can continue a maneuvering operation

that has already begun at any time with re-
7. Select the desired setting. mote control.
264
Parking CONTROLS
Vehicle features and options Performing a parking operation with

This system may not be available in the remote control
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op- 1. Engage selector lever position P.
tional equipment, the national-market version
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and
or the option for later enabling and software
trunk.
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system. 3. Open remote control in the BMW app and
maneuver forward or backward, or select
the desired parking method.
available in the vehicle and if or when the
function can be installed in the vehicle can be 4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.
obtained from an authorized service center or Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are
other qualified service center. present.
Additional information: When you have finished parking, engage
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. selector lever position P and switch off drive
readiness.
General information
Note the information in the Automatic Parking Back-up assistant
Assistant and Memory Parking chapter.
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized
Principle
use.
The Back-up Assistant assists when driving in
The low-beam headlights are switched on for
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight
the duration of the maneuver.
or confusing parking or street situations.
Functional requirements Vehicle features and options

▷ All occupants have left the vehicle.
This system may not be available in the
▷ Doors and cargo area are closed. owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
▷ The smartphone is compatible with remote tional equipment, the national-market version
control. or the option for later enabling and software
▷ The BMW app must be installed on a com- updates. This also applies to individual func-
patible smartphone. tions of the system.
▷ The BMW app must be linked to a Connect- Information on whether a function is currently
edDrive account. available in the vehicle and if or when the
function can be installed in the vehicle can be
▷ Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart- obtained from an authorized service center or
phone. other qualified service center.
▷ The distance between vehicle and smart- Additional information:
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.
▷ A valid digital key must be set up for the
vehicle.
General information
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90. the last distance covered. This stored distance
265
CONTROLS Parking
can be driven in reverse with automated steer- ▷ Back-up Assistant Professional: sufficiently
ing. bright light conditions on the saved route.
The system takes over the steering. The speed ▷ Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-
must be controlled by the driver using the ac- eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.
celerator pedal and the brake.
Back-up Assistant: a maximum of 164 ft/50 m Driving in reverse with automated
are stored. steering
Back-up Assistant Professional: a maximum of 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
656 ft/200 m are stored.
2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
Safety information The parking assistance systems view is

displayed.
3. "Start back-up Assistant"
Warning
The length of the distance covered is dis-
The system cannot serve as a substitute for played on the control display and in the in-
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing strument cluster.
If applicable, follow the instructions on the
control display or in the instrument cluster.
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- 4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
closely, be ready to take over steering and tor pedal and the brake.
braking at any time, and actively intervene Green: the system takes control of
where appropriate. steering.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
NOTICE In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, instructions for Park Distance Control.
among other potential damage. Watch sur- 5. Right before the end of the stored distance
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene covered, a signal tone will sound and a
where appropriate. message is displayed.
Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle,
such as by shifting to forward gear.
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered. Canceling the Back-up Assistant
▷ To store the distance covered, do not drive manually
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
266
Parking CONTROLS
▷ "Cancel" verse. For example, this includes the following

▷ Press the button. factors:
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant ▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
automatically covered.
The system automatically cancels in situations ▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients, in-
such as the following: clines or slippery road surface.
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel ▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing
or takes over steering. and driving the route, for instance other
▷ When shifting from reverse to another se- tires or changed ambient conditions like
lector lever position. weather.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver ▷ Back-up Assistant Professional: for
assistance systems. changed light conditions.
▷ After an extended period of time when the Also follow the information on system limits in
vehicle is stationary. the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
▷ When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
▷ In case of a slippery surface.
▷ When the vehicle is rolling, such as on a
slope.
▷ In case of changed ambient conditions.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Reversing Assistant Professional: If sensor
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164
ft/50 m.
System limits
▷ The maximum speed when driving in re-
verse is limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
A warning occurs at a speed of approx.
4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function will be canceled.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
267
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort

Adjusting the vehicle height may result in
trapped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
Additional information: property. When adjusting the vehicle height,
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. make sure that the areas of movement
around the vehicle and at the wheel housing
are free.
Chassis components
The chassis components are optimized for the Overview
vehicle and its application range and thereby
ensure the best possible driving experience. Button in vehicle
Two-axle ride level control

Principle
Air suspension ensures best possible driving
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a var-
iable adjustment of the front and rear axles,
the suspension is adjusted to the vehicle con-
dition.
Self-leveling suspension
General information
Regardless of the load, the vehicle will be
maintained at the configured vehicle level. Display
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle ▷ LED off: Normal level.
level can be set to different levels: ▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted.
▷ Normal level: for normal road condition. ▷ LED illuminated: Raised level.
▷ Increased level: in the event of poor road ▷ LED flashes rapidly: level adjustment not
conditions or unevenness. possible.
All doors are closed.
268
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Setting Long stationary periods

The system offers different shock absorber During long stationary periods, the vehicle may
settings ranging from comfortable travel to lower itself. This is not a malfunction.
sporty driving. When the drive-ready state is switched on with
The shock absorber settings are assigned to the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the
the different driving modes of the My Modes. normal level automatically.
Additional information: Depending on the condition of the vehicle, rais-
My Modes, refer to page 139. ing to normal level may take several minutes.
Activating/deactivating self-leveling System limits

suspension ▷ It is not possible to change the level during
sporty driving.
The system can be deactivated, e.g., to
change a wheel or for towing. ▷ It may not be possible to change the level if
the axles are limited.
Deactivate system:
▷ It may only be possible to raise the vehicle
Press and hold the button for approx. level in the drive-ready state.
7 seconds, until the LED flashes rap-
idly. ▷ If the state of charge of the vehicle battery
is too low, a level change may not be possi-
To activate system: ble.
Press the button and hold for approx. ▷ If level adjustment is activated frequently in
7 seconds, then release. quick succession, the system switches off
to prevent overheating and is temporarily
The self-leveling suspension is automatically unavailable or operates with a delay. Let
activated after driving off at speeds above ap- the system cool down, if needed.
prox. 6 mph/10 km/h. ▷ If the payload is increased, the highest driv-
ing level may be disabled or automatically
Adjusting the level manually exited in order to protect the system.
Press the button.

Malfunction
When the button is activated at a certain In case of a malfunction, the vehicle will have
speed, the vehicle is raised to the elevated changed handling characteristics or a noticea-
level. bly reduced driving comfort.
Have the system checked by an authorized
Adjusting the level automatically service center or another qualified service cen-
The vehicle will lower automatically in the fol- ter or repair shop.
lowing situations:
▷ My Modes: "SPORT".
▷ At higher speeds.
Executive Drive Pro
When a set vehicle level is exited due to the Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted ac- chassis. The system combines a high level of
cording to the selected driving mode. driving comfort with dynamic handling charac-
269
CONTROLS Driving comfort
teristics and minimizes roll tendency when cor-

nering.
Drive sound
Executive Drive Pro consists of Active Roll Sta- Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
bilization and Integral Active Steering. market version, the drive sound can be ad-
Additional information: justed.
Integral Active Steering, refer to page 217. 1. "MENU"
Active Roll Stabilization, refer to page 270. 2. "Vehicle apps"
Active roll stabilization 4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "IconicSounds"
Principle 6. Select the desired setting.
Active roll stabilization reduces the body’s ten- In some driving modes, the function is disa-
dency to roll when cornering rapidly or making bled.
quick evasive maneuvers.
General information
The roll tendency of the vehicle is balanced out
by permanent adjustment on the front and rear
axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
Agility and driving comfort are increased under
all driving conditions.
Setting
The system offers different settings ranging
from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
The settings are assigned to the different driv-
ing modes of My Modes.
My Modes, refer to page 139.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving style
is used.
270
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. SYNC program.
Air conditioning control Seat heating.

Panel heating.
Overview
Seat cooling.
Functions via climate control menu
Icon Function Steering wheel heating, refer to

page 120.
Automatic program.
The functions can also be operated via voice,

Temperature. such as Temperature.
Buttons, automatic climate control

Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-

trol. Icon Function
Defrost function.
Fresh air.
Rear window defroster.
271
CONTROLS Climate control
Rear automatic climate control View on the control display
Icon Function 1 Toolbar

2 Climate control functions, driver's side
Switching on/off
3 Climate control functions, passenger's side
4 Climate control bar
Automatic program.
Calling up climate control functions

Temperature. Via climate control bar:
"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the cli-
mate control bar.
Air flow. Or:
1. "MENU"
Air distribution. 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Climate control"
Seat heating. Turning the air conditioning system

Panel heating. on/off
Seat cooling. 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "All climate functions"
The complete air conditioning system is turned
on/off with the last settings.
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
272
Turning rear automatic climate Automatic program

control on/off
Principle
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
▷ Automatic climate control is turned on.
ble climate, which can be modified with the
▷ Defrost function is deactivated. desired temperature and individual settings.
The automatic program cools, ventilates or
Turning rear automatic climate control heats the vehicle interior automatically.
on/off
General information
Via iDrive
Depending on the equipment, the automatic
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
program provides the best possible settings
2. "Settings" for climate control functions depending on
3. "Rear climate control" the outside temperature, interior temperature,
4. Activating/deactivating"Rear climate sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-
control". perature setting:
The rear automatic climate control can be ac- ▷ Air flow.

tivated with standard setting for temperature ▷ Air distribution.
and AUTO program: ▷ Temperature.
"Activate with default settings" ▷ Seat and panel heating.
▷ Seat cooling.
Via BMW Touch Command
▷ Steering wheel heating
1. Tap on the icon.
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen.
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
3. Tap on the icon. ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-
4. Select the desired setting. cupants.
▷ If only the driver’s seat is occupied, the
Locking the rear automatic climate temperature set on the driver’s side is auto-
control operating elements matically applied to all other zones.
1. "CLIMATE MENU" ▷ If another seat is occupied, the temperature
last set there is restored.
2. "Settings"
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
3. "Rear climate control"
trols the automatic program in order to prevent
4. "Lock rear climate control" window condensation to the extent possible.
The interior air conditioning can continue to
run even if the drive-ready state is switched
off and the vehicle is not locked. This feature
provides improved comfort at very high or low
outside temperatures when making brief stops
during a trip. Depending on the air conditioning
setting selected, the air conditioning can stop
273
after a maximum of 15 minutes or by locking not necessary to manually change the desired
the vehicle. intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
Condensation may leak below the vehicle
while the air conditioning is running. Example of function
When the automatic program is turned on, the
Turning the automatic program intensity of the seat heating can be adjusted:
on/off 1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
1. "CLIMATE MENU" climate control bar.
2. "Automatic program" 2. Seat heating.
3. Select the desired setting. 3. Select desired setting, for example, "HIGH".
The individually selected settings of the cli-
Switching the rear climate control mate control functions are stored and auto-
automatic program on/off matically set up again, such as after the vehicle
is started again.
Via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU" Display
2. "Settings" The indicator in the climate control bar pro-
vides information about the temperature differ-
ence between the configured desired tempera-
4. "Automatic climate" ture and current interior temperature.
5. Select the desired setting. ▷ The red or blue bar next to the temperature
display indicates the progress of heating or
Via BMW Touch Command cooling.
1. Tap on the icon. ▷ The desired interior temperature is reached
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen. as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
3. "AUTO" Active climate control functions such as seat
heating are displayed as icons in the climate
control bar.
Setting the intensity Active climate control functions are highlighted

in color in the climate control menu.
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of individual climate control functions
can be individually adjusted. Temperature
Each climate control function has multiple lev-
els that can be adjusted individually, such as:
Principle
▷ "LOW"
The automatic climate control cools or heats
▷ "MEDIUM" to the configured temperature and then keeps
▷ "HIGH" the temperature constant.
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity. General information
Based on the stored data models, the intensi- Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
274
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad- 1. Tap on the icon.
just the set temperature.
2. Set the desired temperature:
Setting the temperature ▷ Raise the temperature.

▷ Lower temperature.
The temperature can be set in-
dividually for driver and front
passenger in the air conditioning
Adjusting the footwell temperature
bar.
General information
Set the desired temperature: The air temperature in the footwell can be ad-
justed.
▷ Raise the temperature.
This does not change the set interior tempera-
▷ Lower temperature.
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Configuring the temperature Adjusting the footwell temperature

adjustment 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
When the automatic program is switched on,
2. "Settings"
the heating and cooling speed can be adjusted
as follows: 3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
▷ "BALANCED". 4. "Temperature adjustment for footwell"
This setting enables a smooth, low-noise 5. Increase or decrease temperature.

adjustment of the interior temperature.
▷ "DYNAMIC". Air conditioning
The setting enables a quick adjustment of
the interior temperature with a high air vol-
ume.
Principle
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-
Setting the rear automatic climate midified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
control temperature
Via iDrive Functional requirement

Standby or drive readiness is switched on.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
Switching the cooling function on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
4. Set the desired temperature.
2. "A/C"
Via BMW Touch Command 3. Select the desired setting.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and
The temperature can be set in-
the side windows may fog up briefly when
dividually for the driver's side
drive-ready state is switched on.
and front passenger side.
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
275
Maximum cooling In the automatic recirculated-air control, out-

side air is drawn in or the interior air is circu-
lated, depending on the outside air quality.
Principle The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
The function enables a quick and intense cool- air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
ing of the interior. mode.
General information Turning air recirculation on/off

The system is set to the lowest temperature, 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode. 2. The current operating mode is displayed in
Rear automatic climate control: the toolbar. Select the desired setting in the
The function is automatically activated in the toolbar:
rear when the SYNC program is turned on. ▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ "Fresh air"
▷ "Auto air recirculation"
The function is available with outside tempera-
Depending on vehicle equipment, air recircula-
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
tion will turn off automatically based on ambi-
drive-ready or standby state switched on.
ent conditions in order to prevent window con-
densation.
Turning maximum cooling on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "MAX A/C" Air flow
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
General information
area. Open the vents. The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed.
Air recirculation mode Adjusting the air flow

1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Principle 2. Air flow.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- 3. Select the desired setting.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
vehicle battery.
system then recirculates the interior air.
Adjusting the air volume of the rear

General information
climate control
If there is window condensation, turn off the air
recirculation.
Via iDrive
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
air is directed into the interior.
2. "Settings"
276
4. "Fan" SYNC program

Via BMW Touch Command

Principle
When the SYNC program is activated, the set-
1. Tap on the icon.
tings for the driver's side can be transferred to
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen. the passenger's side and to the rear.
3. Tap on the icon.
4. Select desired setting, for example, General information
"MEDIUM". The following settings can be transferred:
▷ Increase air flow. ▷ Temperature.
▷ Reduce air flow. ▷ Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
Air distribution settings ▷ Automatic program.
Turning the SYNC program on/off

General information
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-
quired in manual mode. 2. "SYNC"
Adjusting the air distribution The program is switched off automatically if
1. "CLIMATE MENU" the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed.
2. Air distribution.
The selected air distribution is displayed. Defrost function
Adjusting the air distribution of the Principle
rear climate control With the defrost function, ice and condensation
The function is operated via BMW Touch Com- are quickly removed from the windshield and
mand. the front side windows.
1. Tap on the icon.
General information
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen.
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
3. Tap on the icon.
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-
4. Air distribution. densation.
5. Select the desired setting. The air distribution is directed toward the
windshield and the front side windows.
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor. Make sure that air can
flow to the windshield.
277
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear Additional information:
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro- Automatic program, refer to page 273.
vide maximum performance.
Automatic climate control
Turning the defrost function on/off
Press the button. Overview
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
Rear window defroster

Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear
window. Turning the seat heating on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
Functional requirement climate control bar.
Standby or drive readiness is switched on. 2. Seat heating.
Turning the rear window defroster
If Efficient mode is activated, heater output is
on/off
reduced.
Press the button. Additional information:
The LED is illuminated with rear win- Efficient mode, refer to page 308.
dow defroster switched on.
The rear window defroster switches off auto- Rear automatic climate control
matically after a certain period of time.
If pre-conditioning is turned on, the rear win-
Overview
dow defroster is activated as needed.
Seat heating
Principle
The system heats seats and panels as
needed.
General information BMW Touch Command is located on the door

handle of the rear doors.
Seat heating can also be used without panel
heating. Deactivate panel heating as neces-
sary.
278
Switching the seat heating and panel Rear climate control

heating on/off
1. "Seats" Overview
2. "Seat climate"
4. Tap on the icon.
Seat cooling
Principle BMW Touch Command is located on the door
The system cools the seat and backrest sur- handle of the rear doors.
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat
temperature.
Switching the seat cooling on/off
1. "Seats"
Overview
2. "Seat climate"
4. Tap on the icon.
Panel heating
Principle
The interior is quickly and energy efficiently
Climate control
heated with radiant heat.
Switching the seat cooling on/off

General information
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the center of the
climate control bar. The elements of the panel heating are
integrated in the doors, the glove compartment
2. Seat cooling. lid and in the lower area of the instrument
3. Select the desired setting. panel.
If Efficient mode is activated, cooling output is The heat is supplied without direct contact to
reduced. the heated surface.
Additional information: The set desired temperature heats the surfa-
Efficient mode, refer to page 308. ces more or less.
279
Switching panel heating on/off Front ventilation

The panel heating can be switched on or off in
addition to the seat heating.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
Setting the panel heating

1. "CLIMATE MENU" ▷ Change the air flow direction, arrow 1.
2. Seat heating. ▷ Adjustment of the air volume at the vent,
arrow 2.
Adjusting the rear climate control Ventilation in the rear

panel heating
The function is operated via BMW Touch Com-
mand.
1. "Seats"
2. "Seat climate"
▷ Change the air flow direction, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-
Ventilation ing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Principle
The ventilation system offers individual ranges
of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation
to optimize the air flows in the vehicle.
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set desired temperature.
280
Ventilation in the rear, on the side ▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.

▷ Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Pre-conditioning
▷ Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar- Principle

row 1. Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle in-
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos- terior to a comfortable temperature prior to
ing of the air vents, arrow 2. starting the trip depending on the inside and
outside temperature. Snow and ice may be re-
moved more easily.
Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the General information
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
The pre-conditioning can be switched on and
sengers.
off directly or via a preset departure time.
Depending on the equipment, the following cli-
Air quality mate control functions are controlled automati-
cally:
▷ Panel heating.
General information
▷ Steering wheel heating
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components: ▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment. ▷ Mirror heating.
▷ Interior filter. The air automatically exits through the air
vents to the windshield, the side windows, the
▷ Air conditioning system to control the
upper body area and into the footwell.
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode. The system switches off automatically after
approx. 30 minutes or when the drive-ready
▷ Stationary climate control.
state is activated.
Interior filter If pre-conditioning is used during the charg-

ing process, less air conditioning capacity will
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh be required while driving. This optimizes the
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation range.
mode.
Depending on the equipment: Functional requirements
▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in- ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
flowing air.
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced. charged or a charging cable is connected.
281
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis- and the planned departure time to allow a suf-
charged, it can take some time after con- ficient period of time for the climate control.
necting the charging cable before the pre- Pre-conditioning will be turned off automati-
conditioning is functional. cally a few minutes after the set departure
▷ Time and date are set correctly. time.
▷ The ventilation air vents are open.
Setting the departure time
Turning on/turning off the pre- 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
conditioning 2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
Turning on/turning off via iDrive
4. "Departure plan"
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
5. Set the desired departure time.
2. "Settings"
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. Select the desired setting. Activating the departure time
To turn on the pre-conditioning prior to a de-
Automatic switch-off parture time, the respective departure time
To ensure the minimum range of the vehicle, must be activated beforehand.
the stationary climate control may be automat-
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
ically switched off, for instance after repeated
activation or due to an insufficient state of 2. "Settings"
charge of the high-voltage battery. After turn- 3. "Pre-conditioning"
ing off due to an insufficient state of charge, 4. "Pre-conditioning for depart."
charge the high-voltage battery. The pre-con-
ditioning is then available again.
Display
Climate control for departure time Icon Description
General information Icon in the center console

at the top.
Departure times can be set with time and day
of the week. Icon lights up: heating op-
eration is switched on.
The switch-on point is determined automati-
cally based on the temperature. Icon in the center console
On the desired weekdays, the system will be at the top.
turned on promptly before the set departure Icon lights up: a departure
time. time is activated.
The departure time is preselected in two steps: Icon flashes: pre-condition-
▷ Set departure times. ing is switched on.
▷ Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting/activating the departure time
282
Activating with BMW app

An appropriate BMW app with remote function
can be used to turn on the pre-conditioning
directly or via a preset departure time.
283
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Additional information: Compatibility
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
Integrated universal remote remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
control versal remote control.
Additional questions are answered by:
Principle ▷ An authorized service center or another
The integrated universal remote control in the qualified service center or repair shop.
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
General information An authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop will be glad to
The integrated universal remote control re-
answer additional questions.
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro- Control elements on the interior
grammed with the desired functions. mirror
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
▷ LED, arrow 2.
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury, ▷ Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-
for example, body parts becoming jammed in trolled system, arrow 3.
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
284
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Programming the integrated Press and hold the button on the interior
universal remote control mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
Functional requirement If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
with the special features for rolling code
be fully charged at the time of programming
radio systems.
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control. ▷ LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
Programming individual buttons pleted.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- Repeat steps 3 to 5.

controlled system.
Special feature of the rolling code
2. Turn on standby state.
wireless system
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
▷ Program available button: the integrated universal remote control and the
Press the button. system also have to be synchronized.
▷ Program already assigned button: Refer to information on synchronization in the
Press and hold the button for approx. operating instructions of the remote-controlled
20 seconds. system.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly 1. Program the desired button on the interior
begin flashing orange. mirror.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the 2. Locate and press the synchronizing button
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to on the remote-controlled system, such as
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the garage door.
on the interior mirror. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
The required distance depends on the step.
hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held second person.
transmitter. 3. Press and hold the programmed button on
Canada: if programming with the hand-held the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the If necessary, repeat this step up to three
interior mirror button and repeatedly press times in order to end synchronization. Once
and release the hand-held transmitter but- synchronization is complete, the program-
ton for 2 seconds. med function will be carried out.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
▷ The LED lights up green: programming Operation
completed. After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
Release button. tem can be operated with the button on the
▷ The LED flashes green rapidly: the interior mirror.
hand-held transmitter was detected but
programming is not complete.
285
Press and hold the desired button of the re-

mote-controlled system within range until the
Sockets
function is triggered.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
Principle
illuminated green during the transmission of The socket can be used for electronic devi-
the radio signal. ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
General information
vidually. The total load of all sockets must not exceed
Press and hold the two outer buttons on 140 watts at 12 volts.
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green connectors.
rapidly.
All stored button assignments will be deleted. Safety information
Sun visor Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation de-
Glare shield vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
Fold the sun visor down or up. or be thrown around in the car's interior dur-
ing unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make
Glare shield from the side sure that devices and cables are not in the
airbag's area of unfolding.
Folding the sun visor out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
NOTICE
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window. Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the
3. Shift it back to the desired position.
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
electrical system. There is a risk of damage
Folding the sun visor in
to property, among other potential damage.
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun In the case of a discharged vehicle battery,
visor. contact an authorized service center or other
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
286
In the front center armrest

NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket
cover again after using the socket.
Front center armrest

Two USB ports are located in the center arm-
rest.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
The center armrest contains a socket.

In the rear center armrest
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
USB connections, see Owner’s Manual for Two USB ports are located in the center arm-
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication. rest.
Properties:
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charging current: max. 3 A / 45 W.
287
BMW Travel & Comfort Installing optional accessories

System 1. Slide the cover all the way up.
General information
USB ports and mounts for attaching special
accessories, e.g., universal holders for tablets
or clothes hangers, are located on the back-
rests of the front seats.
Properties of the USB ports:
▷ For charging mobile devices. 2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per sembly Instructions.
seat.
Further information is available from an au- Wireless charging tray
Principle
Overview The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General information
Quick charging functions are supported de-
pending on the mobile device.
The integrated fan permits cooling of the de-
vice to be charged.
When inserting the device to be charged, en-
The mounts and USB ports are located behind sure that there are no objects between the de-
the marked covers. vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
The charging process is displayed as fol-
lows:
▷ Tray in center console: charging indicator
on Control Display.
The charge indicator is shown alternately in
the status field with additional status infor-
mation.
▷ Tray in rear center armrest: charging dis-
play on BMW Touch Command.
288
Safety information
Warning
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device
and the tray can become very hot. Placing
storage devices or electronic cards, such as
chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or 1 Storage area
cards for signal transmission, between the
2 Fan
device and the tray may impair the card func-
tion. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. When charging mobile devi- Functional requirements
ces, make sure there are no objects between
▷ The device to be charged must be certified
the device and the tray.
according to the Qi standard.
▷ Charging function is turned on.
Warning
▷ The mobile phone cannot exceed a max-
When charging mobile devices in the wire-
imum size of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x
less charging tray, an electromagnetic field
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.
is created. This may cause damage to pace-
makers, implanted defibrillators, and similar ▷ Use only protective sleeves and covers up
devices. There is a risk of injury or death. to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm;
When loading mobile devices with your upper otherwise, the charging function may be
body area, maintain a distance of at least impaired.
2 inches/5 cm to the wireless charging tray. ▷ Storage tray in the rear center armrest:
The rubber mat is located in the storage
compartment.
Overview
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located
Tray across in the center console:
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
display is pointing upwards.
▷ The tray in the rear center armrest: the cen-
ter armrest remains folded down.
Turning the charging function on/off
Control Display
The charging function for the front and rear
trays can be switched on and off on the Control
1 Storage area Display.
2 Fan
1. "MENU"
Storage tray in the rear center armrest: 2. "Vehicle apps"
289
3. "System settings" System limits

4. "Wireless charging tray" The charge current may be reduced or the
5. "Wireless charging" charging process may be temporarily inter-
rupted in the following situations:
BMW Touch Command ▷ Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-
The charging function for the rear tray can face of the tray and mobile phone.
be switched on and off via BMW Touch Com- ▷ If there are objects between the mobile
mand. phone and the wireless charging tray.
1. "Telephone" or "Wireless chrg." ▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
2. If necessary, "Wireless charging"
structions on the control display and in the
3. "Activate charging" instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
Inserting the mobile phone
Tray in the center console Interior camera

Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up. Principle
The interior camera can be used to record the
Tray in the rear center armrest vehicle interior.
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray General information
with the display facing up. The interior camera can provide the following
functions:
Forgotten warning ▷ Snapshot.
Photos can be taken, saved, and displayed.
General information
▷ Remote Inside View.
A warning can be given if when leaving the ve-
hicle, a Qi-certified mobile phone was forgot- The vehicle interior can be recorded with a
ten in the wireless charging tray in the center BMW app.
console. ▷ Anti-theft recorder.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in- If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle
strument cluster. interior is automatically recorded. The re-
cording can be shown using the BMW app.
Activating forgotten warning function
1. "MENU" Data protection
2. "Vehicle apps" The permissibility of recording and using re-
3. "System settings" cordings is contingent upon the statutory regu-
lations of the country in which the system is to
4. "Wireless charging tray" be used. The user is responsible for the use
5. "Mobile phone reminder" of the system and compliance with respective
applicable regulations.
290
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Data protection, refer to page 67.
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory ▷ The camera is activated.
constraints on use of the system in your state
To transfer recordings to mobile devices:
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system ▷ Data transfer is activated.
should be verified in regular intervals, espe- ▷ Mobile device is connected to the vehicle
cially when borders are frequently crossed. via WLAN.
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must Remote Inside View/Anti-theft recorder:
be informed about the system. In addition, in- ▷ Privacy Policy accepted.
formation about the system is required when
handing off the vehicle. ▷ BMW app is installed on the mobile device.
▷ BMW app is linked with the ConnectedDrive
Data transfer and data storage account.
The data transfer and data storage of the me- ▷ Vehicle is parked and locked.
dia recordings depends on the recording func- ▷ Anti-theft recorder: equipped with alarm
tion. system.
Snapshot: Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible
▷ Data transfer to a mobile device, connec- and are not partially or completely covered, for
tion to the vehicle via WLAN. instance by face masks.
▷ Data is stored in the vehicle and assigned
to the BMW ID or a driver profile. Overview
Remote Inside View:
▷ Data transfer with the BMW app to a mo-
bile device, connection with the Connected-
Drive account.
▷ Data is stored in the BMW app and after
the data transfer in the mobile device.
Anti-theft recorder:
▷ Data transfer with the BMW app to a mo-
bile device, connection with the Connected- The interior camera is located on the head-
Drive account. liner.
▷ Data is stored in the vehicle and after the Additional information:
data transfer in the mobile device.
Around the headliner, refer to page 35.
More information on the scope and content of
data processing is available on the Internet in
Activating/deactivating interior
the ConnectedDrive privacy notices/service de-
scriptions. camera
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,
Functional requirements the recording function and, if necessary, data
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm
Snapshot:
the query on the control display.
▷ Privacy Policy accepted.
Follow applicable legal regulations.
291
The recording function or data transfer can be Displaying and managing

deactivated or activated. recordings
1. "MENU" Saved recordings can be displayed, transferred
2. "All apps" and deleted in the vehicle.
3. "Snapshot" In some national-market versions, the record-
ings are only shown on the control display
4. "Settings"
for up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h for your own
5. Select the desired setting. safety.
Snapshot 1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Recording mode 3. "Snapshot"
4. "Gallery"
Recording Function
5. Select the desired recording.
mode
"Single Shortly after triggering, a
Scan the QR code shown in the display to
photo" photo will be taken.
transfer recordings to a mobile device. The re-
"Smile" When the system detects a cording is transferred when the pop-up on the
smile, a picture will be taken. mobile device is opened. The mobile device
must be connected to the vehicle via WLAN.
"Self-timer After the timer has expired, a
(3 sec.)" photo will be taken.
Settings
"Burst Shortly after triggering, a ser- 1. "MENU"
mode" ies of pictures will be taken.
2. "All apps"
3. "Snapshot"
Take picture
4. "Settings"
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
An individual gesture can be assigned for re-
3. "Snapshot"
cordings with the interior camera.
4. "Photo"
5. Select desired recording mode. Remote Inside View
6. Triggering a photo. Recordings from the vehicle interior can be dis-
Depending on the selected recording mode, played on a mobile device with the BMW app
the photo is taken shortly after triggering, to check the vehicle interior, e.g., for forgotten
when a smile is recognized, or if the timer has objects.
elapsed.
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be Anti-theft recorder
displayed as a preview. If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle
interior is automatically recorded using the in-
terior camera. The BMW app notifies you of
the recording. The recording can be shown on
a mobile device.
292
Occupying the seats

The interior camera is also used for the detec-
tion of occupied seats.
When all doors are closed, the interior camera
switches on automatically on a regular basis.
The system analyzes the vehicle interior to
detect occupied seats. No media recordings
are made in the process. Two infrared light
sources next to the camera lens light up while
the interior camera is active. Depending on the
lighting conditions, the infrared light sources
may be visible.
293
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options the event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately af-
ter using it.
Opening the glove compartment
Safety information
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can
Press the button.
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving, such as in the event of an accident, The glove compartment opens auto-
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk matically.
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that The light in the glove compartment switches
are connected to the vehicle via a cable. on.
For technical reasons, the glove compartment
is locked for approx. one minute after being
NOTICE repeatedly operated.
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of Closing the glove compartment
damage. Do not use anti-slip pads. Fold the lid closed.
Locking the glove compartment

Use the valet parking mode to lock the glove
Glove compartment compartment.
Safety information Valet parking mode, refer to page 94.
Warning Malfunction
Folded open, the glove compartment pro- The glove compartment is unlocked electri-
trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the cally. The glove compartment can be unlocked
glove compartment can be thrown into the manually in the event of a malfunction or dur-
car's interior while driving, for instance in ing a BMW Remote Software Upgrade, for
294
Storage compartments CONTROLS
instance to obtain an item that is urgently Safety information

needed.
1. Open the front passenger door. Warning

2. Remove the instrument panel side cover Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
using a suitable blunt object. glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
closed storage compartments.
Front center armrest

3. Press the sound insulation downward or re-
move it.
General information
4. Using a suitable object such as a screw-
A storage compartment is located in the center
driver, press the locking bolt inward.
armrest between the seats.
Opening the center armrest
5. Pull the object out of the opening again.

The glove compartment opens.
After manually unlocking the glove compart-
Press the button.
ment, have the locking system checked by an
service center or repair shop. Closing the center armrest
Press both lids down until they engage.
Storage compartments in
the doors Rear center armrest
General information General information

There are storage compartments in the doors. A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
295
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Folding down the center armrest or risk of damage to property. Do not force
objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not
transport hot beverages.
Opening the cup holder
Fold the center armrest forward on the handle.
Opening the center armrest
Pull the cover backward until it engages.
Closing the cup holder

Tap the cover on the handle. The cover closes
automatically.
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the lid up, Rear cup holder
arrow 2.
Safety information
Closing the center armrest
Press the lid down until it engages. Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
Front cup holder damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Safety information Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or
Warning
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may or risk of damage to property. Do not force
damage the cup holders or be thrown about objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. transport hot beverages.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury
296
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Safety information
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest Warning
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
damage. Press back the covers before the struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
center armrest is folded up. accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not
obstruct the driver's view.
Opening the cup holder
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-
cles, from the coat hooks.
2. Press the button. The cup holder extends

automatically.
Closing the cup holder

Push the cup holder back until it engages.
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles
and on the door pillar in the rear.
297
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Warning
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
ment, systems and functions that are available thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
now and will be available in the future, even if the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
they are not available in the owned vehicle. sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
Additional information: and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
Loading NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
Safety information There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Make sure that no
fluids leak in the cargo area.
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause Steps for determining correct load
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char- limit
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re- 1. Locate the statement “The combined
ducing directional stability, lengthening the weight of occupants and cargo should
braking distances and changing the steering never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
response. There is a risk of accident. Pay vehicle’s placard.
attention to the permitted load-carrying ca-
2. Determine the combined weight of the
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per-
driver and passengers that will be riding in
mitted gross vehicle weight.
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
Warning
4. The resulting figure equals the available
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
be thrown through the vehicle interior while equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
driving, such as in the event of an accident, 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk amount of available cargo and luggage
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
are connected to the vehicle via a cable. 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
298
Cargo area CONTROLS
available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
area
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine General information
how this reduces the available cargo and Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
luggage load capacity of your vehicle. such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.
Payload
Overview
The maximum payload is the sum of the

weight of the occupants and the cargo. The lashing eyes are located on the loading sill
The greater the weight of the occupants, the and on the side walls of the trunk.
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo Multifunction hook

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo. General information
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi- A multifunction hook is located on the left and
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the right side in the cargo area.
rear seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as Safety information
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
Warning
seat is not occupied, secure each of the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle. Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with luggage
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
straps or, depending on the equipment,
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
with a cargo net or draw straps.
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy
straps. luggage in the cargo area if it has been ap-
propriately secured.
299
CONTROLS Cargo area
Storage compartment on Through-loading system

the left side
Principle
General information The through-loading system allows the trans-
port of long objects, such as skies.
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Safety information
Opening the storage compartment
Warning
There is a danger of jamming with folding
down the rear seat backrests. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the rear
seat backrest and the of the head restraint is
clear prior to folding down.
Turn the screw cap in the cover by 90°, ar- Warning

row 1, and fold down the trim panel, arrow 2. If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
Cargo floor panel dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
General information
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo area floor.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
Opening the storage compartment
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Fold cargo area floor forwards.
300
Cargo area CONTROLS
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of
damage. Make sure that the area of move-
ment of the rear seat backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Opening the through-loading

system
2. Lift flap.
3. Pull handle, arrow 1, down and fold trim for-

ward, arrow 2.
301
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Brake system
Brake disks and brake pads only
This chapter describes model-specific equip- reach their full effectiveness after ap-
ment, systems and functions that are available prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
now and will be available in the future, even if during this break-in period.
Additional information: Following part replacement
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. Observe the break-in procedures again if com-
ponents mentioned above are replaced.
Break-in procedures
General driving notes
General information
Moving parts need to work together smoothly.
Closing the trunk lid
The following instructions will help you to ach-
Safety information
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Safety information Warning

An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle
and can endanger occupants and other road
Warning
users or damage the vehicle in the event of
Due to new parts and components, safety an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
and driver assistance systems can react with In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After in- hicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
stalling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive of damage to property. Do not drive with the
conservatively and intervene early if neces- trunk lid open.
sary. Observe the break-in procedures of the
respective parts and components.
Driving with the trunk lid open
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the
Drive system trunk lid open:
Drive restrained for the first 300 miles/500 km
▷ Close all windows.
and avoid full throttle.
▷ Greatly increase the blower output.
Tires ▷ Drive moderately.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur- ▷ Fasten the trunk lid, e.g., with a tensioning
ing circumstances when tires are brand new. belt.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
302
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Climate comfort windshield This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplan-

ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow-
ing:
The marked area is not covered with heat re-
flective coating. ▷ Drive through calm water only.
Use the marked area, such as for garage door ▷ Drive through water only up to a maximum
opener, devices for electronic fee collection or height of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
payment systems. ▷ Drive through water at a maximum of walk-
ing speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Climate comfort laminated safety Safety information

glass
The vehicle glazing provides full protection
against the harmful effects of ultraviolet radia- NOTICE
tion on the skin. In addition, vehicle glazing re- When driving too quickly through deep wa-
duces heat radiation and prevents the interior ter, the water can penetrate under the hood,
from becoming too hot. into the electrical system or into the transmis-
sion. There is a risk of damage to property,
Mobile radio in the vehicle among other potential damage. When driv-
ing through water, do not exceed the maxi-
mum indicated water level and the maximum
Warning speed for driving through water.
Vehicle electronics and mobile communica-
tion devices can influence one another. There
is radiation due to the transmission oper- Braking safely
ations of mobile communication devices.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to General information
property. If possible, in the car's interior only The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Brak-
use mobile communication devices, such as ing System as a standard feature.
mobile phones, with a direct connection to
Perform emergency braking in situations that
an external antenna or the Personal eSIM in
require such.
order to prevent mutual interference and to
deflect radiation from the vehicle interior. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering
movement.
Aquaplaning Sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can the Antilock Braking System is regulating.
form between the tires and road surface.
303
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Objects in the travel path of the pedals Safety information
Warning Warning
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the Light but consistent pressure on the brake
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the wear and possibly even brake system failure.
vehicle such that they are secured and can- There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing ex-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor cessive stress on the brake system.
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats and do not layer several Warning
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
In Neutral or with drive-ready state switched
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance
mats are securely fastened again after they
drivetrain brake force, braking force boost
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
and steering assistance, are restricted or not
available at all. There is a risk of accident. Do
Driving in wet conditions not drive in Neutral or with drive-ready state
switched off.
In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or
in heavy rain, gently depress the brake pedal
every few kilometers. Brake disk corrosion
Ensure that this action does not endanger Corrosion on the brake disks and contamina-
other road users. tion on the brake pads are increased by the
The heat generated during braking dries brake following circumstances:
disks and brake pads and protects them ▷ Low mileage.
against corrosion.
▷ Extended stationary periods.
In this way the brake force will be available
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
when you need it.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
Hills agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause
General information a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking
The braking effect of the drivetrain can be in- slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.
fluenced through the energy recovery process.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con-
densation water develops and collects under-
neath the vehicle.
304
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Pennant bracket Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
Safety information Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport
type competition is an improper use of the ve-
hicle and may affect your warranty coverage.
NOTICE Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited War-
At high speeds, a mounted pennant can ranty” Booklet for further information on war-
cause damage to the vehicle, the pennant ranty matters.
bracket, and the pennant itself. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other po-
tential damage. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph / 130 km/h. Remove pennant before
trips at high speeds.
Overview
The pennant bracket is located on the side of

the vehicle.
Installation
1. Remove the protective cap.
2. Insert pennant horizontally.
3. Turn the pennant clockwise by 90° to re-
tain the pennant.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk
of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M
Sport or motorsport-like competitions.
305
DRIVING TIPS Increasing range
Increasing range
Vehicle features and options Tires
This chapter describes model-specific equip- General information

ment, systems and functions that are available Tires can have different effects on energy con-
now and will be available in the future, even if sumption. For example, energy consumption
they are not available in the owned vehicle. can be influenced by the tire size.
Checking the tire pressure regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
Increasing the range starting on a long trip.
Low tire pressure increases rolling resistance
General information and thus energy consumption and tire wear.
The vehicle contains comprehensive technolo- Additional information:

gies for reducing energy consumption and for Tire pressure specifications, refer to page 324.
maximizing the range.
Several measures, such as driving style and Pre-conditioning
regular maintenance, can increase the range. Run advance climate control in the vehicle dur-
Additional information: ing charging before driving off.
Range, refer to page 162. Heating and cooling operations are very en-
ergy intensive and substantially reduce the
Removing unnecessary cargo electric range.
Additional weight reduces the range. Additional information:

Stationary climate control, refer to page 281.
Removing attached parts following
use Anticipatory driving
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aer- Driving smoothly and proactively reduces en-
odynamics and increase the energy consump- ergy consumption.
tion. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle driv-
Closing windows ing ahead of you.
Open windows increase drag and therefore re-
duce the range. Using accelerator pedal for
deceleration and coasting
When approaching a red traffic light, use the
accelerator or brake pedal early to decelerate.
306
Increasing range DRIVING TIPS
Use the coasting function when driving down- The system decides based on the situation
hill. Press accelerator pedal just enough that if and how much the energy is recovered
the vehicle rolls. through recuperation or if the vehicle coasts.
With adaptive energy recovery: do not step on Depending on the strength of the recupera-
the accelerator pedal. Coasting and deceleration, the vehicle is decelerated differently while
tion are automatically adapted to the respec- coasting.
tive driving situation.
Setting the recuperation level
Switching off any functions that are The recuperation level can be adjusted.
not currently needed Additional information:
Functions such as seat heating and the rear Driving in detail: eDRIVE, refer to page 135.
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city traffic and Display
with stop-and-go driving.
Switch off these functions if they are not Display in the instrument cluster
needed. Adaptive recuperation can be displayed on the
The Efficient and Efficient Climate Control driv- instrument cluster.
ing modes support the energy-saving use of Additional information:
comfort features. In Efficient mode, the per-
formance of comfort functions is automatically Power gauge, refer to page 160.
reduced. In the Personal driving mode, deacti-
vation of comfort functions must be set first. Display on the control display
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed on
Having maintenance carried out the control display.
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach- Additional information:
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. Current driving condition, refer to page 168.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW service center. Activating adaptive recuperation
Also refer to BMW Maintenance System. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Adaptive recuperation 3. "Driving settings"
Principle 5. "Adaptive recuperation"
The adaptive recuperation supports an adap- 6. Select the desired setting.
tive and comfort-oriented driving style.
Various sensors analyze the current driving sit-
uation, e.g., the distance to the vehicle in front.
Coasting
General information Principle

Adaptive recuperation is available depending The electric drivetrain makes it possible to roll
on the equipment and national-market version. without consuming energy. This driving condi-
tion is referred to as coasting.
307
General information Overview

A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the efficient Button in the vehicle
effect of coasting.
Coasting is automatically adapted to the re-
spective driving situation.
The coasting mode is displayed in the Live Ve-
hicle menu as efficient coasting.
Live Vehicle, refer to page 150.
Exemplary driving situations

My Modes
If a route can be traveled without an antici-
pated need for braking, it is advantageous to
roll.
The following exemplary driving situations may Selecting the driving mode
be suitable:
▷ Rolling on a straight downhill route without 1. Press the button.
obstacles.
2. "Switch mode"
▷ Coasting on a distance without obstacles.
3. Select the driving mode.
Avoid late or strong braking.
Configuring Efficient mode
▷ Selector lever position D is engaged.
▷ Brake is not depressed.
2. "EFFICIENT"
▷ Accelerator pedal is not operated.
3. "Settings"
System limits 4. Select the desired setting.
▷ While Active Cruise Control is active.
Resetting the settings
▷ With defective, dirty or covered sensors.

Efficient Mode 2. "EFFICIENT"
3. "Settings"
Principle 4. "Reset settings"
Efficient mode helps promote an efficient driv-
ing style.
In addition, the efficiency trainer displays situa-
tion dependent notes to assist with an efficient
driving style.
308
Efficiency trainer The efficient range is adjusted depending on

the driving situation.
If the power gauge moves within the blue
Principle range, the current driving style is efficient. The
The system provides assistance for a proac- display will change to gray if the driving style is
tive and comfort oriented driving style. For this inefficient.
purpose, map information and sensor data is
used to analyze the current driving situation, Bonus range
such as upcoming speed limits and vehicles
driving ahead. Based on this information, the A modified driving style helps
driver receives notices for an efficient driving you extend your driving range.
style early on. The efficiency of the driving style The range extension is dis-
is evaluated in the control display and shown played as the bonus range in
in three categories. the instrument cluster.
If the bonus range is shown in gray or is hid-
General information den, the current driving style is inefficient.
The system has different displays to support The display turns blue as soon as all condi-
the driver with an efficient driving style. tions for efficient driving are met.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de-
Functional requirements pend on the settings of the trip data.
▷ Selector lever position D or B is engaged.
▷ Efficient mode is activated. Display in case of inefficient driving
style
Display
When driving above the efficient range,
an arrow will be displayed.
Power gauge
For instance, this is displayed for the
When the Efficient mode is activated, the dis- following situations:
play changes to a special configuration.
▷ Excessive acceleration.
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head- ▷ Excessive speed.
up Display. In addition, a notice to coast in advance is dis-
played.
System limits
For example, the function is not available in
▷ While Active Cruise Control is active.
▷ With trailer towing.
The efficient range of the power gauge is col-

ored blue. Additionally, the bonus range will be
displayed.
309
Efficiency evaluation
General information
The efficiency of the driving style, e.g., acceler-
ation, is evaluated on the control display and
shown in three categories. The current trip is
analyzed.
This function is available in Efficient mode.
Calling up the efficiency evaluation

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
Live Vehicle, refer to page 150
Display on the control display

The display of the efficiency analysis shows
the efficiency of the driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the larger
the bars of the evaluation categories.
In contrast, a reduced area will be displayed
with an inefficient driving style.
310
311
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that, prior to your first use of a charg-
ing location, you have the compatibility of the
following components confirmed:
now and will be available in the future, even if ▷ Charging cable.
they are not available in the owned vehicle. ▷ Charging station.
Additional information: ▷ Domestic socket outlet and connected
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. circuits.
General information Warning

Damaged or worn chargers, for instance
The vehicle can be charged using various worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk
charging cables at charging stations, domestic of fire. Only use chargers that are in good
socket outlets or industrial sockets. condition.
Control and monitoring of the charging process
are handled fully automatically. When charging
with AC, the charge current level can be ad- Warning
justed via iDrive.
Even when it is indicated that the high-volt-
age battery is discharged, the high-voltage
Safety information system is always still under high voltage.
There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do
not touch or change live parts, e.g., orange
high-voltage cables, even when the batteries
Warning
are discharged.
Working with electrical current improperly can
lead to electric shock due to high voltages or
high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger
Warning
to life. Observe the general safety regulations
when working with electrical current. Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. High voltage is present at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life.
Warning
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
A faulty or incorrectly designed charging de-
mends that work on the charging connection,
vice at the charging location can cause dam-
for instance cleaning, be performed by an au-
age to the vehicle and overload the power
supply at the charging location. There is a
risk of fire and an injury hazard.
312
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
Charge current
NOTICE
The charging cable connected to the vehicle
General information
and the charging cable connections may be
damaged due to mechanical load. There is The charge current strength is indicated in am-
a risk of damage to property, among other peres.
potential damage. Do not apply mechanical There are differences in the maximum permis-
loads to the charging cable and the charging sible charging current depending on the local
cable connections. Route the charging cable power grid.
to the vehicle freely and avoid stress due to Before charging, set a suitable current limit for
pulling or bending. the charging current.
When charging at charging stations, the per-
missible charging current is automatically de-
Charging from the power tected and a current limit is set.
grid When charging at a domestic socket outlet, set

the current limit yourself.
The high-voltage battery serves as energy
storage. The high-voltage battery can be Safety information
charged utilizing energy recovery during the
trip or via the power grid. Warning
Charge the vehicle at a suitable charging de- If the charge current strength is adjusted
vice. incorrectly, the power grid of the domestic
Charge the high-voltage battery regularly so socket outlet can be overloaded and over-
that it operates optimally. heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge
When charging via the power grid, you can current strength to the power grid prior to
chose between the following variants: charging on domestic socket outlets. With un-
known power networks, set on the lowest
▷ Domestic socket outlet.
level.
▷ Industrial socket.
▷ AC charging station.
▷ DC charging station. Charging on a domestic socket
For optimal use of the energy from the power
outlet
grid, charging at a charging station, e.g., at a The permitted charge current strength must
BMW Wallbox, is recommended. be determined, for instance by a qualified elec-
trician, before first charging with your own do-
The power grid and charging station should
mestic socket outlet or when charging with
enable a charging capacity of at least 11 kW.
third-party domestic socket outlets.
A lower charging capacity will extend the
charging time.
Ensure that the charging station is installed
according to the technical requirements of the
power grid, e.g. by a qualified electrician.
313
Current limit Depending on national-market version, differ-

ent charging cables are required and are in-
General information cluded in the vehicle's scope of delivery.
The current limit for charging with the Mode 2

charging cable and the Mode 3 charging cable
Safety information
can be set via iDrive.
When charging at domestic sockets on another Warning
power grid, the set charging current again Non-compatible charging cables or unsuita-
may need to be checked again. The permitted ble charging stations can heat up and cause
charge current strength must be determined, damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire.
for instance by a qualified electrician, before Use charging cables or charging stations for
charging with a domestic socket outlet. charging that are suitable for the respective
If the approved charging current strength is un- vehicle type.
known, set the current limit to the lowest level. An authorized service center will be glad to
provide information about suitable charging
Activating/deactivating current limit cables.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging" Warning
4. "AC limit" Improper use of the charging cable can pre-
vent charging and lead to damage, for in-
5. "AC limit"
stance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use
the charging cable only for charging the ve-
Setting the current limit hicle, and do not extend it using cables or
1. "MENU" adapters.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
4. "AC limit" Warning
5. Select the desired setting. Damaged charging cables can heat up or

lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire
Settings are stored. When you change charg-
or an injury hazard. Use undamaged charg-
ing locations you also might need to change
ing cables only.
the setting for charging.
Charging cable Warning

An incorrectly connected charging cable can
General information lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
Use a Mode 2 charging cable, Mode 3 charging
erty. Make sure that the charging cable con-
cable, or the permanently installed charging
nector is completely inserted in the charging
cable of a charging station to charge the vehi-
socket.
cle.
314
AC charging cable at designated DC charging stations. At the

higher dimensioned electrical connection of a
Mode 2 charging cable DC charging station, the charging time is nor-
mally substantially shorter compared to a do-
Mode 2 charging cables can be used to charge
mestic socket outlet or AC charging station.
the vehicle from grounded domestic socket
outlets. Charging at domestic socket outlet During charging at a DC charging station,
electrical connections is performed with alter- an indication in the instrument cluster is dis-
nating current. played.
When a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the Charge the vehicle only with a DC charging ca-
efficiency values may differ from those stated ble with a length less than 98 ft/30 m.
on the energy label. The DC charging cable is also referred to as
The Mode 2 charging cable is also referred to Mode 4 charging cable.
as standard charging cable.
Storage
Flexible Fast Charger For the delivery, the charging cable is stowed
The Flexible Fast Charger is a special mode 2 in the luggage compartment, for instance un-
charging cable. der the cargo floor panel or in a bag.
The interchangeable mains plugs of the Flex- Stow charging cable after use in the same
ible Fast Charger allow you to charge flexi- place again.
bly using domestic socket outlets or industrial If the charging cable is stowed in a bag, fasten
sockets with protective conductors. the bag at an open lashing eye in the luggage
compartment.
Mode 3 charging cable If required, store the charging cable with the
The Mode 3 charging cable makes it possible installed connector cover to prevent moisture
to quickly recharge at sockets of designated in the charging cable plug.
AC charging stations using a special connec-
tor. Charging is performed with alternating cur- Connecting the charging cable
rent at designated AC charging stations. The
charging process can be completed faster than General information
at domestic socket outlets.
Before connecting, if necessary clean the
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- charging cable plug and the area between the
market version, a maximum charge current charging socket cover and charging socket,
level of 16 A to 32 A is possible. e.g., remove snow.
The charging cable may be permanently in-
stalled at the charging station. Functional requirements
The Mode 3 charging cable is also referred to ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
as AC quick charging cable. ▷ The drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The vehicle is unlocked.
DC charging cable
▷ The parking brake is set.
The DC charging cable that is permanently
installed at the charging station makes is
possible to charge at DC charging stations.
Charging is performed with direct current
315
Charging socket cover 5. Insert the charging cable connector for the
charging socket and push it in until it en-
gages.
6. Hold the charging cable until it is correctly
locked.
Removing the charging cable
General information
AC charging: The charging cable is locked
The charging socket cover is located in the rear while charging with the vehicle locked. Unlock
on the right side of the vehicle. the vehicle before removing.
Direct current charging: during the charging
Keep charging socket clean and unobstructed. process, the charging cable is locked. When
If the charging socket is not being used, open the charging process is completed, the charg-
the charging socket cover and, if necessary, ing cable is unlocked.
keep the charging socket lid closed. Before unplugging, clean the area between the
charging socket cover and charging socket as
Connecting a charging cable necessary, for instance remove snow.
When charging at a charging station, follow the
instructions on the charging station. Disconnecting a charging cable
1. To open the charging socket cover, press 1. If necessary, unlock the vehicle or the
on the rear edge, arrow. charging cable via iDrive.
The charging socket cover opens. The charging process ends when the
charging cable is unlocked via iDrive or at
the charging station directly.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar-
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
2. Open the charging socket cover.

3. Remove the cover of the charging cable
connector, if needed.
4. Connect the Mode 2 charging cable to
the domestic socket outlet or the Mode 3
3. Detach the charging cable from the charg-
charging cable to the port at the AC charg-
ing socket, arrow 2.
ing station as needed.
4. Close the charging power socket cover until
it clicks into place.
316
5. Press the charging socket cover closed until lock automatically as soon as the charg-
it engages. ing process is finished.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable connec- ▷ "Unlock charging socket flap
tor, if needed. permanently": the charging socket cover
7. Remove the mode 2 charging cable from can be kept unlocked so that the charg-
the domestic socket outlet or the fast ing socket cover can be opened even
charging cable (mode 3) from the socket on when the vehicle is locked.
the AC charging station as needed.
8. Stow the charging cable as required. Charging process
At a charging station, insert the perma-
nently installed charging cable in the place
provided for it.
Principle
The charging process can be adapted to con-
Unlocking the charging cable straints, such as the cost of electricity, availa-
ble current sources, or a low ambient tempera-
Principle ture. The vehicle controls the charging process
in such a way that the charging process is
AC charging cable: the charging cable is un- completed if possible at the departure time. A
locked when the vehicle is unlocked. departure time must be set for this purpose.
DC charging cable: the charging cable is un-
locked via iDrive or by ending the charging General information
process at the charging station.
High or low outside temperatures can cause
longer charging times.
Unlocking charging cable via iDrive
When charging the vehicle, a charge target can
1. "MENU"
be set, thereby shortening the charging dura-
2. "Vehicle apps" tion.
3. "Charging" If the Mode 2 charging cable is exposed to
4. "Unlock charging cable" high temperatures and direct sunlight, this may
5. "Unlock charging cable now" interrupt the charging process. Charging will
resume automatically.
6. "Stop and unlock charging cable"
A charging procedure is canceled or not
started due to the installation of a Remote
Additional settings for unlocking Software Upgrade. The charging procedure
1. "MENU" may not continue automatically after the suc-
2. "Vehicle apps" cessful installation.
3. "Charging"
Safety information
4. "Unlock charging cable"
NOTICE
▷ "Unlock AC charging cable at end of
charging": The AC charging cables un- The charging socket cover and charging
socket outlet cover may be damaged by
strain. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty, among other potential damage. Do not
317
strain the charging socket cover and charg- Starting the charging process
ing socket outlet cover, e.g., by dropping the
1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
charging cable.
parking brake, if needed.
2. Set charging mode or schedule charging
Battery thermal management process.
Scheduling the charging process, see
Principle Charging in the time frame, refer to
An optimal high-voltage battery temperature page 319.
increases the charging capacity during charg- 3. Switch off drive-ready state.
ing and shortens the charging time. 4. Connect the Mode 2 charging cable to
the domestic socket outlet or the Mode 3
General information charging cable to the port at the AC charg-
Battery thermal management prepares the ing station as needed.
high-voltage battery for upcoming charging at 5. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle.
a DC charging station. The temperature of the
Connecting the charging cable, refer to
high-voltage battery is adjusted for this. Pre-
page 315.
heating/precooling considers factors such as
remaining range. 6. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Battery thermal management can reduce After the charging cable connector is plug-
range and increase energy consumption. ged into the high-voltage charging socket, the
charging cable is locked automatically.
Automatic activation
Charging status display
When guidance to a DC charging station has
been started, the high-voltage battery is pre-
heated/precooled as much as possible until
Indicator light on the charging socket
the destination is reached.
Destination input, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication;
Activating/deactivating manually
Battery preheating/precooling can be activated
and deactivated manually. Certain factors in-
fluence the availability of this function, e. g.,
The charging status is indicated on the indica-
remaining range.
tor light on the charging socket.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
4. "US: Batterie vorwärmen"
318
Charging status Charging in the time frame

Light Meaning General information
White Charging cable can be con- A time frame can be set for the charging proc-
nected. ess, e.g., to charge with a cheap electricity rate.
The vehicle can also start the charging process
Yellow Charging cable is locked.
before the selected time frame begins or end it
Flashing yel- Charging process is being after the selected time frame finishes. The sta-
low prepared. tus update of the charging process is adjusted
so the vehicle can be as fully charged as pos-
Blue Charging process paused.
sible and, if applicable, its climate adjusted by
Flashing blue Charging process is active. the departure time.
Flashing red Fault in the charging process. Functional requirement

Green Charging process is complete. A departure time is defined.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light Setting a time frame for charging
goes out after some time. 1. "MENU"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indica- 2. "Vehicle apps"
tor light flashes continuously. The other indica-
3. "Charging"
tor lights turn off after some time.
4. "Charging mode"
Press the button on the vehicle key to
check the charging state. The charging status 5. "Time slot"
is indicated on the indicator light. In some 6. Select the desired setting.
cases the vehicle is locked.
Additional messages about the charging sta- Charge target
tus can be displayed in the instrument cluster
or via the BMW app on the mobile device. Principle
A target value in percent can be set for charg-
Setting the charging mode ing the high-voltage battery.
1. "MENU" When a lower target value is set, the charging
2. "Vehicle apps" time may be shortened.
3. "Charging"
General information
4. "Charging mode"
Charging with a set charging target is espe-
5. Select the desired settings: cially suitable for charging at DC charging sta-
▷ "Immediately": the charging process tions.
starts as soon as the charging cable is A target value of 80 % is recommended for
connected. optimal use of the function.
▷ "Time slot": If a departure time is set, a Target values below 20 % cannot be set.
time frame for charging can be set, e.g.,
to charge using a cheap electricity rate.
319
Set charge target Ending the charging process

1. "MENU" 1. Remove the charging cable from the vehi-
2. "Vehicle apps" cle.
3. "Charging" Detach, refer to page 316.
4. "Charging target" 2. Stow the charging cable as required.
5. Select the desired setting. 3. Press the charging socket cover closed until
it engages.
Permissible volume of DC charging 4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
When the vehicle is charged at a DC charging
station, the noise emission during the charging Goodbye screen on control display
process can be limited, for instance to comply When drive readiness is switched off, a menu
with the local noise level restrictions. A limita- is shown on the Control Display, in which,
tion of the noise emission can lead to longer among other things, some settings can be ap-
charging times. plied for charging via iDrive.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Displays in the instrument
3. "Charging" cluster
4. "Fan loudness"
5. Select the desired setting. The charge state indicator light shows the
charge state of the high-voltage battery in the
Stopping the charging process instrument cluster, if standby state is switched
on.
The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and con- Information regarding the charging process is
tinued at a later time by connecting the charg- shown on the charging screen.
ing cable. For example, so that other people Display Meaning
can use the electrical connection in the mean-
time, or in order to avoid excessive strain on Charging the vehicle with a Mode 2
the electrical connection. charging cable or Mode 3 charging
cable.
Detach, refer to page 316. Charging the vehicle with a DC
charging cable.
Continuing the charging process
Current charging capacity.
If the charging process is interrupted, for in-
stance due to a temporary power failure, the Icon indicates that the maximum
charging process will continue automatically charging capacity of the vehicle has
after the interruption. been reached.
When the vehicle is charged at a public charg- Maximum charging current strength
ing station, the charging process may not con- or currently set current limit.
tinue automatically after an interruption.
320
Display Meaning Departure time

Charging cable locked.
Principle
For optimum range and climate control, the
Charging cable unlocked. departure time can be set before parking the
vehicle.
Set charge target. General information

With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre-
heated or precooled if climate control is set.
Departure time set.
The following settings are possible for depar-
ture time:
One-time departure time set. ▷ Climate control for departure time.
▷ Scheduling of up to three regular departure
times.
Climate control activated at depar-
▷ Planning a one-time departure time.
ture time.
Flashing: ventilation or cooling ac-

Climate control for departure time
tive. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Blinking: heating active. 3. "Charging"
4. "Departure plan"
Charging station has no or limited 5. "Pre-conditioning for departure"
charging power.
Setting the departure time
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the time and weekday.
Activating the departure time

The shaded area indicates a limitation in the 1. "MENU"
charging capacity that can occur, for instance 2. "Vehicle apps"
due to the connected charging infrastructure.
3. "Charging"
Additional information: 4. "Departure plan"
▷ Charge state indicator, refer to page 167 5. Activate the desired departure time.
▷ Charging screen, refer to page 163.
321
The set departure time will be deactivated if Before charging, ensure that the settings en-
the departure time was ignored three times in abled match the desired charging station,
a row. e.g., charging mode.
When the vehicle leaves a known charging lo-
cation, the settings are automatically set to
Climate control factory settings.
The following settings for vehicle air condition-

ing are possible:
To use the function, a GPS signal must be re-
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi-
ceived.
ately.
The range will be reduced if pre-condition- Activate/deactivate the function
ing is activated without a charging cable
1. "MENU"
connected.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Planned climate control at the set depar-
ture time. 3. "Charging"
Additional information: 4. "Location-based charging settings"
Stationary climate control, refer to page 281. 5. "Save based on location"
If the function is deactivated, no location-
based settings are saved and saved settings
Location-based charging are not enabled.
settings
Display on the control display
Principle If the function is enabled, the icon
Various settings can be selected for charging indicates the location-based settings,
at charging stations. which are automatically saved and en-
abled.
To simplify recharging at known charging loca-
tions, some changed settings, such as charg-
ing mode, can be saved based on location. Deleting location-based charging
settings
General information 1. "MENU"
When the function is activated, some settings 2. "Vehicle apps"
are automatically saved as soon as the charg-
3. "Charging"
ing process is finished and the charging cable
is disconnected. 4. "Location-based charging settings"
The settings are saved based on the GPS co- 5. "Delete all location-based charging
ordinates of the charging location. settings"
Saved settings are enabled as soon as the
vehicle approaches a known charging location
again.
322
Discharged high-voltage Before and while driving

battery and vehicle battery To optimize the service life of the high-voltage
battery, note the following:
▷ Bring the high-voltage battery to operating
General information temperature before driving. To do this, pre-
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve- heat/precool the vehicle.
hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re- Setting the departure time, refer to
quired for operation of the onboard electronics. page 321.
With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation ▷ Drive proactively.
of the vehicle is possible.
Increasing the range, refer to page 306.
Service life of high-voltage Parking

battery To optimize the service life of the high-voltage
▷ Avoid direct sunlight at high outside tem-
General information
peratures.
The performance of the high-voltage battery
▷ Park the vehicle in a secure location at low
decreases over its service life. The service life
outside temperatures such as in a garage.
of the high-voltage battery can be optimized
by how it is used.
Long stationary periods
Charging instructions To optimize the service life of the high-voltage
When charging multiple times in succession
using DC, e.g. during a longer trip, the charging ▷ If possible, park the vehicle with a charge
capacity is temporarily reduced as needed to level between 30 % and 50 %.
protect the high-voltage battery. ▷ Do not leave the charging cable connected.
The charging capacity is also reduced as ▷ Do not park the vehicle for longer than
the service life of the high-voltage battery in- 14 days if the electric range is exhausted.
creases.
To optimize the service life of the high-voltage Taking out of service
battery, note the following: If the vehicle is parked for more than three
▷ Preferably charge at AC charging stations months, observe the following:
for daily use. ▷ Park the vehicle with a battery charge state
▷ Keep the charge level between 10 % to between 30 % and 50 %.
80 % if possible, for instance by setting a ▷ Do not leave the charging cable connected.
charging target of 80 %.
▷ Check the battery charge at least once
Charge target, refer to page 319. within 6 months.
▷ Recharge the high-voltage battery as close ▷ Charge up to 50 % if the battery charge
to a planned departure as possible. A time state is below 10 %.
frame can be set for charging.
Charging in the time frame, refer to Maintenance
page 319.
The high-voltage battery is maintenance-free.
323
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres-
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by
the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
now and will be available in the future, even if To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
they are not available in the owned vehicle. please note the following:
Additional information: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. ▷ Maximum speed for driving.
On the control display

Tire pressure The current tire inflation pressure values and
the intended tire inflation pressure values for
General information the mounted tires can be displayed on the
Control Display.
The tire condition and tire pressure influence
the following: To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
tire sizes must be stored in the system and
▷ The service life of the tires.
must have been set for the mounted tires.
▷ Driving safety.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo-
▷ Driving comfort. cated on each tire.
▷ Electrical consumption. The reference tire inflation pressure value is
located in the lower area of the control display.
Safety information
Checking the tire pressure
Warning
General information
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pres-
sure may heat up significantly and sustain Tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure
damage. This will have a negative impact increases with the tire temperature.
on aspects of handling, such as steering and Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure
braking response. There is a risk of accident. loss.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, The displays of inflation devices may under-
and correct it as needed, for instance twice read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
a month and before a long trip.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
Tire pressure specifications
pressure table
In the tire inflation pressure table 1. Determine the intended tire inflation pres-
sure levels for the mounted tires.
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 324, contains all tire inflation pressure 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
324
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac- found in the tire pressure values on the control
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
intended tire inflation pressure. If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed the flat tire monitor.
onto the tire valves.
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the Tire inflation pressures up to
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold 100 mph/160 km/h
tires or tires at the same temperature as the For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and
ambient temperature. for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels values in the tire inflation pressure table and
when the tires are cold, i.e.: adjust as necessary.
▷ A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least two hours after a trip.
If equipped with an emergency wheel: check
the tire pressure of the emergency wheel in the
cargo area regularly and correct if necessary.
Checking using the tire inflation

pressure specifications on the Control These pressure values can also be found on
Display the tire pressure label on the driver's door pil-
1. "MENU" lar.
2. "Vehicle apps" Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Check whether the current tire inflation
pressure levels deviate from the intended
tire pressure value.
6. Correct the tire pressure of a tire if the
current tire pressure deviates from the in-
tended tire pressure.
The display of the current tire pressure may be
limited when the vehicle is stationary. After a
short drive, the tire pressure is updated.
After correcting the tire pressure

If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
cally. Make sure that the correct tire settings
have been made. With tires that cannot be
325
Tire pressure values up to Tire size Pressure specifications

100 mph/160 km/h in bar/PSI
Front: 255/40 R 2.8 / 41 -

i7 xDrive50 21 102 H XL M+S
Tire size Pressure specifications Rear: 285/35 R 21 - 3.0 / 44

in bar/PSI 105 H XL M+S
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Tire inflation pressures at max.
tires speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
245/50 R 19 105 2.9 / 42 2.9 / 42 Warning

W XL In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
245/50 R 19 105 Y cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe
XL and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
245/50 R 19 105
the relevant table on the following pages.
H XL A/S
Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
245/50 R 19 105 occur.
H XL M+S
Front: 255/45 R 2.5 / 36 - For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
20 105 H XL A/S optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table and
Rear: 285/40 R - 2.7 / 39 adjust as necessary.
20 108 H XL A/S
Front: 255/45 R 2.5 / 36 - Tire pressure values over

20 105 Y XL 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 285/40 R - 2.7 / 39
i7 xDrive50
20 108 Y XL
Front: 255/40 R 2.8 / 41 - Tire size Pressure specifications

21 102 Y XL in bar/PSI
Rear: 285/35 R 21 - 3.0 / 44 Specifications in

105 Y XL bar/PSI with cold
tires
Front: 255/45 R 2.5 / 36 -
20 105 V XL M+S
Rear: 285/40 R - 2.7 / 39 245/50 R 19 105 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49
20 108 V XL M+S W XL
326
Tire size Pressure specifications 18: rim diameter in inches

in bar/PSI 96: load bearing capacity
245/50 R 19 105 3.0 / 44 3.3 / 48 Y: speed code letter

Y XL ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds ex-
245/50 R 19 105 ceeding 150 mph/240 km/h
H XL A/S
245/50 R 19 105
Maximum tire load
H XL M+S Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi-
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Front: 255/45 R 2.7 / 39 -
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
20 105 H XL A/S
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating –
Rear: 285/40 R - 3.0 / 44 GAWR – on the certification label on the driver
20 108 H XL A/S door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must
be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Front: 255/45 R 2.7 / 39 -
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
20 105 Y XL
rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Rear: 285/40 R - 3.0 / 44
20 108 Y XL Tire Identification Number
Front: 255/40 R 3.1 / 45 - DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1922
21 102 Y XL xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
Rear: 285/35 R 21 - 3.4 / 49 xxx: tire size and tire design
105 Y XL 1922: tire age
Front: 255/45 R 3.1 / 45 - Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
20 105 V XL M+S the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Rear: 285/40 R - 3.4 / 49

Tire age
20 108 V XL M+S
Front: 255/40 R 3.1 / 45 - Recommendation

21 102 H XL M+S Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires
Rear: 285/35 R 21 - 3.4 / 49 at least every 6 years.
105 H XL M+S
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
Tire marking on the tire sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
Tire size DOT … 1922 19th week 2022
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm Uniform Tire Quality Grading
45: cross-sectional relationship in % Quality grades can be found where applicable
R: radial tire code on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
327
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- heat when tested under controlled conditions
ture A on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
DOT Quality Grades material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Treadwear
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Traction AA A B C to a level of performance which all passenger
Temperature A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to A represent higher levels of performance on
these grades. the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Warning
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
under controlled conditions on a specified gov- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as tion, or excessive loading, either separately
well on the government course as a tire graded or in combination, can cause heat buildup
100. The relative performance of tires depends and possible tire failure.
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service M+S
practices and differences in road characteris-
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
tics and climate.
weather performance than summer tires.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Tire tread
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to Summer tires
stop on wet pavement as measured under
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
controlled conditions on specified government
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
risk of aquaplaning.
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Winter tires
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
winter driving conditions.
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
328
Minimum tread depth ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten-

dency to pull to the left or right.
▷ Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear
in the area of the tire shoulder.
Damage can be caused by the following situa-
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
Distributed over the tire circumference are
the tire manufacturer’s wear indicators with a ▷ Incorrect tire storage.
height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm, which serve
as an indicator of tire tread wear. Safety information
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Warning
Wear Indicator. Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
statutory regulations on the minimum tread trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
depth. age is suspected while driving, immediately
reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive care-
Tire damage fully to the nearest authorized service center
shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as
General information needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but
Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign have them replaced.
bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles Warning
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
Tires can become damaged by driving over
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush-
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec-
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
may be a risk of accidents and risk of dam-
with low-profile tires.
age to property. If possible, avoid driving over
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal- objects or road conditions that may damage
functions: tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
329
Exchanging wheels and

Warning
tires Mounted steel wheels can cause technical
problems, for instance unexpected loosening
Mounting and wheel balancing of the lug bolts and damage to the brake
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried disks. There is a risk of accident. Do not
out by an authorized service center or another mount steel wheels.
Approved wheels and tires Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will impair
General information the vehicle's handling characteristics and a
The following sizes are recommended and ap- variety of system functions, such as the An-
proved by the vehicle manufacturer for the ap- tilock Braking System or Dynamic Stability
proved wheels and tires per vehicle type and Control. There is a risk of accident. To main-
special equipment: tain good handling and vehicle response,
▷ Wheel and tire combinations. use only tires with a single tread configura-
tion from a single manufacturer. The manu-
▷ Rim designs.
facturer of the vehicle recommends that you
▷ Tire sizes. use wheels and tires that have been recom-
▷ Tire brands. mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the
You can ask an authorized service center or
original wheel/tire combination remounted on
another qualified service center or repair shop
the vehicle as soon as possible.
about the approved wheels and tires for the
vehicle and the special equipment.
Safety information Warning

Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-sec-
tion wheel studs, may loosen or come off.
Warning
The wheel may come loose during driving.
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for There is a risk of accident. Use only two-sec-
your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, tion wheel studs that have been categorized
for instance due to contact with the body due as suitable for the respective wheel type by
to tolerances despite the same official size the manufacturer of the vehicle.
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The
manufacturer of your vehicle strongly sug-
gests that you use wheels and tires that have
been recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer for your vehicle type.
330
Recommended tire brands Winter tires
General information
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve-

hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire Winter tires are recommended for operating on
sidewall. winter roads.
Winter tires can be identified by the icon with
New tires mountain and snowflake, as well as the M+S
marking on the tire sidewall.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
ing circumstances when tires are brand new. All-season tires with the M+S designation, but
Drive conservatively for the first without icon with mountain and snowflake,
200 miles/300 km. have better winter characteristics than summer
tires but generally do not achieve the perform-
Retreaded tires ance of winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

Warning
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
Retreated tires can have different tire casing than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
structures. With advanced age the service life then attach a sign showing the permissible
can be limited. There is a risk of accident. maximum speed in the field of vision. The sign
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec- is available from an authorized service center
ommend the use of retreaded tires. or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Wheel change between axles
Warning
A wheel change between the axles on vehi-
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on
the front and rear axles can cause damage
to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident. Do not rotate the tires between the
331
axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or

rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Tire repair set
Different abrasion patterns can occur on the Principle

front and rear axles depending on individual With the tire repair set, minor tire damage
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
pairs between the axles to achieve even abra- driving.
sion. Further information is available from an
authorized service center or another qualified General information
service center or repair shop. After changing,
▷ The filled in tire sealant closes the damage
check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.
from the inside when it hardens.
Storing tires ▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire re-

pair set found on the compressor and seal-
ant bottle.
Tire pressure
▷ The use of a tire repair set can be ineffec-
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
tive if the tire puncture measures above ap-
sure indicated on the tire sidewall.
prox. 0.16 in/4 mm.
Storage ▷ Do not remove foreign objects that have
penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects
▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
only when they are visibly protruding from
dark place.
the tire.
▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
oil, grease, and solvents.
tire inflation pressure.
▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires. Overview
Storage
Repairing a flat tire The tire repair kit is stored in the trunk behind
the left side trim panel or in the storage com-
Safety precautions partment under the trunk floor.
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground. Sealant bottle and filler hose
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
1 Sealant bottle
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance. 2 Sealant bottle outlet
332
3 Filler hose sor and attach it in the visible area in the

vehicle interior.
4 Sealant bottle connection
▷ Remove the warning label from the tire
5 Wheel valve connection
sealant bottle and attach it to the rim.
Compressor Preparing the tire repair set

1. Insert the sealant bottle into the mount on
the housing of the compressor.
1 Compressor
2 Tire pressure display
3 Pressure reducing valve button 2. Turn the sealant bottle clockwise by 90° to
the stop.
4 Sealant bottle mount
5 Connector for socket
6 On/off switch
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Apply the parking brake to secure the vehi-
3. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the
cle against rolling away.
sealant bottle and turn clockwise by 90° to
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front the stop.
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
▷ Remove the warning label for the maxi-
mum permissible speed from the compres-
333
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and 6 bar/87 psi. Do not turn off the compres-
screw the connecting piece of the filler hose sor in this phase.
onto the valve.
2. Switch off the compressor.

5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
connector into the power socket in the vehi- Checking the tire pressure
cle interior.
Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure dis-
play of the compressor. The tire pressure must
Filling the tire with sealing be at least 2.5 bar/36 psi.
compound
Tire pressure too high
Safety information If the tire pressure is too high, reduce the tire
pressure with the pressure reducing valve on
NOTICE the compressor.
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of damage
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
to property, among other potential damage. reached
Do not run the compressor for more than Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire
10 minutes. pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi is reached. Contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Filling the tire with sealing compound
1. With standby state or drive-ready state Minimum tire inflation pressure is
switched on, switch on the compressor. reached
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes 1. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire vehicle interior.
pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi. 2. Disconnect the hose from the sealant bottle
While the tire is being filled with tire sealant, and the valve on the wheel.
the tire pressure can briefly reach approx. 3. Unscrew the valve cap.
4. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
5. Immediately drive 5 miles/10 km to ensure
that the tire sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
334
Do not exceed the permissible maximum ▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. driving readiness turned on, turn on the
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than compressor and let it run for a maxi-
12 mph/20 km/h. mum of 10 minutes.
Tire sealant may spray from the damaged ▷ Reduce tire pressure: press the pressure
area during the initial wheel rotations. reducing valve button on the compres-
sor.
Adjusting the tire pressure
Remove and stow the tire repair set
1. Stop at a suitable location.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Connect the hose directly to the compres-
sor and turn clockwise by 90° until it audi- 2. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
bly engages. vehicle interior.
3. Disconnect the hose from the compressor
and the valve on the wheel.
4. Unscrew the valve cap.
5. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not exceed a maximum distance travelled
3. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and of 125 miles/200 km.
screw the connecting piece of the hose
onto the valve. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of
the tire repair set promptly.
▷ Flat tire monitor, refer to page 344.
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 337.
System limits
Contact an authorized service center or an-
4. Insert the connector into the socket in the other qualified service center or repair shop if
vehicle interior. the tire cannot be made drivable.
5. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure With the Tire Pressure Monitor: using sealant
display of the compressor. can damage the wheel electronics. In this case,
Do not continue driving unless a minimum have the electronics checked and replaced at
tire pressure of 1.3 bar/19 psi is displayed. the next opportunity.
Contact an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
6. Correct the tire pressure to 2.5 bar/36 psi.
335
Tire chains Information on the wheel size and rim offset is

located on the inside of the wheel.
The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that
Safety information are only suitable for certain models.
Information about approved wheels and tires
Warning for the vehicle can be requested from an au-
Mounting tire chains on unsuitable tires can thorized service center or another qualified
cause the tire chains to come into contact service center or repair shop.
with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instruc-
accident or risk of damage to property. Only tions.
mount tire chains on tires that are designated If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor: with
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use tire chains, do not reset the Tire Pressure
of tire chains. Monitor, otherwise, incorrect displays may oc-
cur.
If the vehicle is equipped with a flat tire mon-
Warning itor: with tire chains, do not initialize the flat
Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage tire monitor, otherwise, incorrect displays may
tires and vehicle components. There may be occur.
a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop- When driving with tire chains, activate the
erty. Make sure that the tire chains are al- drive-off support to optimize the drive power.
ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed
according to the tire chain manufacturer's in- Maximum speed with tire chains
structions.
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using tire chains.
Fine-link tire chains
Rear axle steering during operation
the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types with snow chains
of fine-link tire chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended General information
as road-safe and suitable. In order to guarantee free movement of the
Information regarding suitable tire chains is wheels when operating with tire chains, rear
available from an authorized service center or axle steering must be turned off when tire
another qualified service center or repair shop. chains are mounted.
Use Safety information

Use is only permitted in pairs on rear wheels
equipped with the tires of the following wheel/ Warning
tire sizes: When rear axle steering is switched on and
Tire size Wheel size Rim offset (IS) tire chains are mounted, there can be contact
between tire chains and the body. There may
245/50 R19 8.5J x 19 26 be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
336
property. With mounted tire chains, switch off Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 324.
the rear axle steering.
Safety information
Switching off rear axle steering
The rear axle steering is switched off by speci- Warning
fying that tire chains are installed. The display of the target pressures is not
a substitute for the tire inflation pressure de-
1. "MENU" tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the
2. "Vehicle apps" tire settings can lead to incorrect target tire
3. "Driving settings" inflation pressure values. In this case, it can-
not be guaranteed that the notification of a
tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a
5. "Tire chains" risk of injury and risk of damage to property.
Starting with the permissible maximum speed Ensure that the tire sizes of the mounted tires
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear are displayed correctly and match the details
axle steering will be switched on again auto- on the tires and on the vehicle.
matically.
Tire pressure monitor The following prerequisites must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
Principle tire pressure loss is not assured:
The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire ▷ After each tire or wheel change, the system
pressure and issues a warning if the tire pres- detects and updates the mounted tires on
sure has dropped. the control display and displays them after
a short trip.
General information Enter the information about the mounted
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in- tires in the tire settings when the system
flation pressure and tire temperature. does not automatically detect the tires.
Depending on the tires detected or registered, ▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not acti-
the system displays the specified nominal vate until after driving for a few minutes:
pressures on the control display and compares ▷ After a tire or wheel change.
them with the current tire pressures. ▷ After a reset, for tires with special ap-
If tires are being used that are not specified proval.
in the tire inflation pressure details on the ve- ▷ After changing the tire setting.
hicle, such as tires with special approval, the
▷ For tires with special approval:
system needs to be actively reset. The system
will then take over the actual tire inflation pres-
sures as the target pressures.
When operating the system, also note the in-
formation found in the Tire inflation pressure
chapter.
337
▷ After a tire or wheel change, a reset was 10. Select the maximum road speed that will be
performed with the correct tire inflation used with the tires.
pressure. 11. "Save tire settings"
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad- The measurement of the current tire inflation
justed to a new value, a reset was per- pressure is started. The measurement prog-
formed. ress is displayed.
▷ Wheels with wheel electronics.
Status display
Tire settings
Current status
General information The system status can be displayed on the
The information about the mounted tires can Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
be entered in the tire settings if the system tem is active.
does not automatically detect the tires.
1. "MENU"
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be
2. "Vehicle apps"
gathered from the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle or directly on the tires. 3. "Vehicle status"
The tire details do not need to be re-entered 4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
when the tire pressure is corrected. The current status is displayed.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details
entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel Current tire pressure
change, the settings of the tire sets used last The current tire pressure is displayed for each
can be selected. tire.
The current tire inflation pressures may
Changing settings change during driving or depending on the out-
1. "MENU" side temperature.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status" Current tire temperature
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Depending on the model, the current tire tem-
peratures are displayed.
5. "Tire settings"
The current tire temperatures may change
6. "Tire selection" while driving or due to the outside tempera-
7. "Manual" ture.
8. "Tire type"
9. Select the tire dimension that is mounted Nominal pressure
on the rear axle. The nominal pressure for the tires on the front
For tires with special approval: and rear axles is displayed.
"Other tires" The specified nominal pressures take the in-

fluence of driving and outside temperature on
Observe further proceeding in the perform the tire temperature into account. The appro-
a reset section. priate nominal pressure is always displayed,
independent of the weather situation, tire tem-
peratures and travel times.
338
The displayed nominal pressure may change For tires with special approval:
and may differ from the tire inflation pressure performing a reset
details on the door pillar of the driver's door.
The tire inflation pressure can thus be cor- 1. "MENU"
rected to the value of the displayed target 2. "Vehicle apps"
pressures. 3. "Vehicle status"
The nominal pressure is immediately adjusted 4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire
5. Make sure that correct tire settings have
settings.
been made.
Tire settings, refer to page 338.
Tire conditions
6. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
General information off.
Tire and system status are indicated by the 7. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset".
color of the wheels and a text message on the 8. Drive off.
control display. The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol-
Any existing messages may not be deleted if lowing is displayed: "Resetting tire pressure…".
the nominal pressure is not reached after the After a travel time of several minutes, the set
tire inflation pressure is corrected. tire inflation pressures are accepted as the
predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is
All wheels green completed automatically while driving.
▷ The system is active and bases warnings After a successfully completed reset, the
on the target pressures. wheels on the control display are shown in
▷ For tires with special approval: the system green and the following is displayed: "Reset
is active and bases warnings on the tire successful."
inflation pressures stored during the last re- You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
set. you continue driving the reset resumes auto-
matically.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occur- Messages: for tires without special
red in the indicated tires. approval
Gray wheels General information
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
losses. bility Control may be turned on.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction. Safety information
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings. Warning
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
performed for the system. inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Runflat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
339
of accident. Do not continue driving if the If there is a significant tire pressure

vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow loss
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires. Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
If a tire inflation pressure check is the instrument cluster.
required
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the con-
Message
trol display.
An icon with a Check Control message appears
on the control display. Icon Possible cause
Icon Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major tire

pressure loss.
Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, for instance
when the tire has not been suffi- Measure
ciently inflated or in the case of a nat- 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
ural steady tire pressure loss. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
Measure 2. Read the description on what to do in case
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
If the tire inflation pressure is too low page 341.
Message
Messages: for tires with special
A yellow warning light is illuminated in approval
the instrument cluster.
General information
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display. When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control may be turned on.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire pressure loss.

Safety information
Warning
Measure A damaged regular tire with low or no tire

inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill- of accident. Do not continue driving if the
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
in all four tires and correct if necessary. the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
340
If a tire inflation pressure check is Measure

required 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
Message 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
An icon with a Check Control message appears ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
on the control display. in all four tires and correct if necessary.
Icon Possible cause 3. Perform a system reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord- If there is a significant tire pressure
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
loss
has not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel Message
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen the instrument cluster.
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys- In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
tem. The system issues a warning pears in a Check Control message on the con-
based on the tire inflation pressures trol display.
stored during the last reset.
Icon Possible cause
Measure There is a flat tire or a major tire

pressure loss.
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed. No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
2. Perform a system reset.
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
the instrument cluster.
vers.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- 2. Read the description on what to do in case
sage appears on the control display. of a flat tire.
Icon Possible cause Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to

page 341.
There is a tire pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys- Actions in the event of a flat tire
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures Standard tires
stored during the last reset. 1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire pressure in all four tires,
for instance using the tire pressure display
from a tire repair set.
341
For tires with special approval: when the Possible distance traveled with a
tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the depressurized tire
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been The possible distance which may be safely
reset. In this case, perform the reset. traveled varies depending on how the vehicle
If tire damage cannot be found, contact an is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road condi-
authorized service center or another quali- tions, outside temperature. The distance trav-
fied service center or repair shop. eled may be less but may also be more if an
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire economical driving style is used.
repair set or by changing the wheel. If the vehicle is loaded with an average
Use of sealing compound, for instance from weight and used under favorable conditions,
the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel elec- the possible distance traveled may be up to
tronics. Have the electronics replaced at the 50 miles/80 km.
next opportunity.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Runflat tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-
dle differently, potentially leading to conditions
Safety information such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
Warning ▷ Longer braking distances.
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
instance, reduced directional stability when or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
braking, braking distances are longer and the potholes.
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do Final tire failure
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
cate the final failure of a tire.
Maximum speed Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
dent.
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized
Continued driving with a flat tire service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
System limits
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers. Temperature
2. Do not exceed a speed of The tire inflation pressure depends on the
50 mph/80 km/h. tire's temperature.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tires at the next opportunity. tire temperature, thus increasing the tire infla-
tion pressure.
342
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the Declaration according to NHTSA/
tire temperature falls again. FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
These circumstances may cause a warning System
when temperatures fall very sharply. Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
Following a temperature-related warning, the should be checked monthly when cold and in-
target pressures are displayed on the Control flated to the inflation pressure recommended
Display again after a short distance. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
Sudden tire pressure loss vehicle has tires of a different size than the
The system cannot indicate sudden and se- size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
rious tire damage caused by external circum- inflation pressure label, you should determine
stances. the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehi-
cle has been equipped with a tire pressure
Failure performing a reset
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a
Tires with special approval: the system will not low tire pressure telltale when one or more
function correctly if a reset was not performed, of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Ac-
for example a flat tire may be indicated al- cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
though the tire inflation pressures are correct. illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
Malfunction the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
Message and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
The yellow warning light flashes and is
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
then illuminated continuously. A Check
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a
Control message is displayed. It may
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
Measure reached the level to trigger illumination of the
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle
mounted: have the wheels checked, if has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
needed. tion indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with
indicator is combined with the low tire pres-
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
sure telltale. When the system detects a mal-
area of the interference, the system auto-
function, the telltale will flash for approximately
matically becomes active again.
one minute and then remain continuously il-
▷ For tires with special approval: the system luminated. This sequence will continue upon
was unable to complete the reset. Perform subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
a system reset again. malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor malfunction: have cator is illuminated, the system may not be
the system checked by an authorized serv- able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
ice center or another qualified service cen- intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
ter or repair shop. variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
343
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- 3. "Vehicle status"

ing properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc- 4. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
The status is displayed.
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re-
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly. Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol-
lowing situations:
Flat tire monitor ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
Principle ▷ After a tire or wheel change.
The flat tire monitor detects a tire pressure
loss while driving and issues a warning if the Performing initialization
tire pressure has dropped. When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
General information flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
The system detects tire pressure loss on the the tire inflation pressures.
basis of rotation speed differences between Do not initialize the system when driving with
the individual wheels while driving. tire chains.
In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diame- 1. "MENU"
ter and therefore the rotational speed of the
corresponding wheel changes. The difference 2. "Vehicle apps"
will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 3. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla- 4. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires. 5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
Functional requirements 6. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
The following prerequisites must be met for 7. Drive off.
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
The initialization is completed while driving,
tire pressure loss is not assured:
which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ After a tire or wheel change, an initialization
The initialization automatically continues when
was carried out at the correct tire pressure.
driving continues.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was performed.
Messages
Status display General information
The current status of the flat tire monitor can When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor bility Control (DSC) is turned on, if needed.
is active.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
344
Safety information If identification of flat tire damage is not

possible, please contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service
Warning center or repair shop.
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire 2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as repair set or by changing the wheel.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk Runflat tires
of accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow Safety information
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
Indication of a flat tire tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for
A yellow warning light is illuminated in instance, reduced directional stability when
the instrument cluster. braking, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
sage appears on the control display. not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Icon Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire Maximum speed

pressure loss. You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Measure Continued driving with a flat tire

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Follow the following when continuing to drive
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- with a damaged tire:
vers.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
2. Read the description on what to do in case vers.
of a flat tire.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
Standard tires tires at the next opportunity.
1. Identify the damaged tire. When the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not
To do this, check the tire pressure in all four have been initialized. In this case, initialize
tires, for instance using the tire pressure the system.
display from a tire repair set.
When the tire inflation pressure in all four Possible distance traveled with a
tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not depressurized tire
have been initialized. In this case, initialize The possible distance which may be safely
the system. traveled varies depending on how the vehicle
345
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road condi- ▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels,
tions, outside temperature. The distance trav- high lateral acceleration (drifting).
eled may be less but may also be more if an ▷ When driving with tire chains.
economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions, Changing wheels/tires
the possible distance traveled may be up to
50 miles/80 km.
General information
Vehicle handling with damaged tires When a tire repair set is used, the wheel does
not always need to be changed immediately
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will han-
in the event of a breakdown when there is tire
dle differently, potentially leading to conditions
pressure loss.
If needed, the appropriate tool for a wheel
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
change, e.g., a jack, is available as an acces-
▷ Longer braking distances. sory from an authorized service center, an-
▷ Changed self-steering properties. other qualified service center or a repair shop.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or Safety information
potholes.
Warning
Final tire failure
The jack is only provided for short-term lifting
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all
cate the final failure of a tire.
safety precautions are observed, there is a
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips
the tire could come loose and cause an acci- over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
dent. When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do
Do not continue driving. Contact an authorized not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on
service center or another qualified service cen- the drive-ready state.
ter or repair shop.
System limits Warning

The system could be delayed or malfunction in Supports such as wooden blocks under the
the following situations: jack reduce the load-carrying capacity of
▷ A natural, even tire pressure loss in all the jack to bear weight. The load-carrying
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex-
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. ceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is
a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place
▷ Sudden and serious tire damage caused
supports under the jack.
by external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
▷ The system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
346
Warning Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall
is provided in order to perform a wheel off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack it. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
is not designed for frequent use; for example, age to property. While the vehicle is raised,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or
the jack frequently may cause it to become pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury wheel removed by an authorized service cen-
and risk of damage to property. Only use the ter or another qualified service center or re-
jack to change an emergency or spare wheel pair shop.
in the event of a breakdown.
Warning
Warning Incorrect handling of the jack can damage the
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- vehicle's underbody and expose high-voltage
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the jack can slip components. There is a risk of injury or risk
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, of damage to property. When cranking up the
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re- jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking
sistant surface. point next to the wheel well. Make sure not to
damage any of the underbody parts.
Warning
The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle NOTICE
and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. Using an impact wrench to loosen or tighten
There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other the wheel lock bolt can damage it. There is
vehicle or cargo using the jack. a risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Only use a lug wrench to
loosen and tighten the wheel lock bolt.
Warning
When the jack is not inserted into the jacking Securing the vehicle against rolling
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle
away
may be damaged or the jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. When cranking
General information
up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad-
jacking point next to the wheel well. ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
347
On a level surface
▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in ▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed. Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
On a slight downhill gradient 2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on
the lug lock bolt.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
screwing on the lug bolt.
able objects, for instance rocks, under the
proper side of the wheels of both the front and
rear axles to block the car from rolling downhill. Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
Lug bolt lock
Principle ▷ Set the parking brake.
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The ▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter position P.
which matches the coding. ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
Overview make sure that they remain outside the
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on- hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart- ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit. wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
348
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
portable hazard warning light at an appro- row 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or
priate distance. lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll-
ing away.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ For air suspension: disable the air suspen-
sion level adjustment.
Two-axle ride level control, refer to
page 268.
Jacking points
2. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of
the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
The jacking points are located at the indicated

positions.
3. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank

Jacking up the vehicle handle or lever clockwise.
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when us-
ing the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply
with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the jack.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon

as the jack is under load and continue turn-
ing the jack crank handle or lever with one
hand.
349
5. Make sure that the car jack foot extends Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
vertically and is at a right angle beneath the
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
jacking point.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac-
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
6. Make sure that the car jack foot is vertical tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat-
and at a right angle beneath the jacking tern.
point after extending the vehicle jack. 5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclock-
wise to retract the jack and lower the vehi-
cle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight-
ening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if
necessary.
7. Crank the vehicle up until the vehicle jack 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op-
has the entire surface on the ground portunity and correct as needed.
and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in-
ches/3 cm above ground. 4. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Mounting a wheel 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire renewed at the
Warning nearest authorized service center or an-
Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-sec- other qualified service center or repair shop.
tion wheel studs, may loosen or come off.
The wheel may come loose during driving.
There is a risk of accident. Use only two-sec- Emergency wheel
tion wheel studs that have been categorized
as suitable for the respective wheel type by
Principle
the manufacturer of the vehicle.
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the
faulty tire. The emergency wheel is only in-
tended for temporary use until the faulty tire/
wheel has been replaced.
350
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly,
and correct it as needed.
Safety information
Warning
The emergency wheel has particular dimen-
sions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may oc-
cur, for instance reduced directional stabil-
ity when braking, longer braking distance,
and changed self-steering properties in the
limit range. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview
The emergency wheel and wheel change tools
are located in a bag in the cargo area.
Removing the emergency wheel

1. Slacken the luggage strap at the clasps.
2. Detach the snap hooks of the luggage
straps at the lashing eyes.
3. Remove the bag with the emergency wheel
and wheel change tools from the cargo
area.
4. Open the bag, remove emergency wheel
and wheel change tools.
Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Stow the emergency wheel and wheel
change tools in the bag.
2. Place the bag into the cargo area.
3. Attach the snap hooks of the luggage
straps at the lashing eyes.
4. Secure the luggage straps. Make sure that
it is correctly and firmly seated.
351
MOBILITY Under the hood
Under the hood

Overview
1 Fresh air intake 3 Vehicle identification number

2 Filler neck for washer fluid
352
Under the hood MOBILITY
Hood injury. Do not reach into the area of moving

parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
Safety information
Warning NOTICE
An incorrectly locked hood can open while Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk hood is opened. There is a risk of damage
of accident. Stop immediately and correctly to property, among other potential damage.
close the hood. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper
blades mounted are folded down onto the
windshield before opening the hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in- NOTICE
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of When the hood is closed, it must engage on
hood is clear during opening and closing. both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Open the
hood again and then close it energetically.
Warning
Avoid pressing again.
Improperly executed work under the hood
can damage components and lead to a
safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or Opening hood
risk of damage to property. The manufacturer
The lever for unlocking the hood is located be-
of your vehicle recommends that work under
hind the footwell trim.
the hood be performed only by an authorized
BMW i service center or another qualified 1. Pull the lever, arrow 1.
service center or repair shop. Hood is unlocked.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance lock-
ing hooks, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay
attention to protruding parts and keep clear
of these areas.
2. Release the lever and pull it again, arrow 2.

Warning Hood can be opened.
There are moving components under the 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
hood. Certain components under the hood
can also move with the vehicle switched off,
for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of
353
MOBILITY Under the hood
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
354
Operating materials MOBILITY
Operating materials

Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a
risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the in-
Additional information: structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. away from ignition sources. Do not refill op-
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.
Coolant United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio
is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many in-
General information dividual states; do not exceed the allowable
The cooling system is maintenance-free. washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply.
Follow the usage instructions on the washer
Have coolant topped up by an authorized serv- fluid container.
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen-
trate or the equivalent is recommended.
Coolant level
A Check Control message is displayed when
NOTICE
the coolant level is low.
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
Washer fluid windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Do
General information not add silicon-containing additives to the
All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank. washer fluid.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can NOTICE
be used.
Mixing different windshield washer fluid con-
Recommended minimum fill quantity: centrates or antifreeze can damage the
0.2 US gal/1 liter. washer system. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage.
Do not mix different windshield washer fluid
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the infor-
mation and mixture ratios provided on the
containers.
355
MOBILITY Operating materials
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located under the

hood.
Refilling washer fluid

1. Pull out the filler neck with the cover closed.
2. Open the lid and add washer fluid.

3. Close the lid and press the filler neck down
again.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures be-
low +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
356
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Condition Based Service
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Principle
now and will be available in the future, even if Condition Based Service determines the main-
they are not available in the owned vehicle. tenance recommendation using sensors and
special algorithms that take into account the
operating conditions of the vehicle.
The maintenance recommendation is deter-
mined taking into account the individual usage
BMW maintenance system profile of the vehicle.
The maintenance system provides service no-

General information
tifications and thereby provides support in Information on service notifications can be dis-
maintaining road safety and the operational played on the control display.
reliability of the vehicle. Additional information:
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the Service notifications, refer to page 169.
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work, spare Service data in the vehicle key
parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials
Information on the service notifications is con-
are calculated separately. Further information
tinuously stored in the vehicle key. The service
is available from an authorized service center
center can read this data out and suggest a
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
shop.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
Safety information key with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Warning Stationary periods

Improperly performed work, in particular Stationary periods during which the vehicle
maintenance and repair on the high-voltage battery was disconnected are not taken into
system, can lead to electric shock. There is a account.
risk of injury, fire and danger to life.
Have an authorized service center or another
Have work on the vehicle, in particular main- qualified service center or repair shop update
tenance and repair, performed by an author- the time-dependent maintenance procedures,
ized BMW i service center or another quali- such as checking brake fluid and changing the
fied service center or repair shop. microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
357
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance Booklet for US erly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagno-
sis.
Models
Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for Position
additional information on the performance of
service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by
a service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Records of regular main-
tenance and repair work should be retained.
Diagnostic socket
There is a diagnostic socket on the driver’s
side for reading out vehicle data.
General information
Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will
trigger the alarm system after locking the vehi-
cle.
Remove devices connected to the diagnostic
socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
tem. Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for On-
board Diagnosis for other than its intended
purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and
creates risks of personal and property dam-
age. Given the foregoing, the manufacture
of your vehicle strongly recommends that ac-
cess to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
or other persons that have the specialized
training and equipment for purposes of prop-
358
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
NOTICE
This chapter describes model-specific equip- Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
ment, systems and functions that are available hood is opened. There is a risk of damage
now and will be available in the future, even if to property, among other potential damage.
they are not available in the owned vehicle. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper
Additional information: blades mounted are folded down onto the
windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the wiper blades

Onboard vehicle tool kit
1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers
into fold-out position.
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 147.
2. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retaining spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the

left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Turn the cover lock, arrow 1, and fold out the
trim panel, arrow 2.
Wiper blades 4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the

detent.
Safety information 5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
NOTICE 6. Fold in the wipers.
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
Lights and bulbs
other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly
when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold General information
in or switch on the wiper without a wiper Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu-
blade installed. tion to driving safety.
359
MOBILITY Replacing components
All headlights and lights are designed using Safety information

LED technology at least.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
DANGER
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are desig- Contact with live components can lead to an
nated Class 1 light-emitting diodes. electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
that you let an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
perform the work in case of a malfunction.
Warning
Safety information Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
Warning
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries
Intense brightness can irritate or damage the that are compatible with your vehicle type
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do should be installed in your vehicle. Informa-
not look directly into the headlights or other tion on compatible vehicle batteries is availa-
light sources. Do not remove the LED covers. ble at an authorized service center.
Headlight glass Registering the battery to the

The inside of the headlight glass can fog up vehicle
in cool or humid weather. When driving with The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the lights switched on, the condensation evap- that you have an authorized service center or
orates after a short time. The headlight glass another qualified service center or repair shop
does not need to be changed. register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
If, despite driving with the headlights switched the battery has been changed. Once the bat-
on, moisture such as water droplets increas- tery has been registered again, all comfort fea-
ingly forms in the light, have the headlights tures will be available without limitation and
checked. any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Vehicle battery Charging the battery

A charger that is installed in the vehicle sup-
General information plies the vehicle battery with power. The
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve- charger receives the necessary energy from
hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery. The vehicle the high-voltage battery.
battery supplies the onboard electronics with Additional information:
energy. Charge vehicle, refer to page 312.
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be re-
quested from an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
360
Replacing components MOBILITY
Power interruption Replacing fuses

After a power interruption, some equipment The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
needs to be newly initialized or individual set- you have an authorized service center or an-
tings updated, for example: other qualified service center or repair shop re-
▷ Parking brake, refer to page 142. place the fuses.
▷ With Memory function: store the positions

again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery
so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
General information
The fuses are located at different places in the
vehicle.
Information on the fuse layout and the posi-
tions of the fuse boxes is available on the In-
ternet: fusecard.bmw.com.
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown
fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat-
ing.
361
MOBILITY Breakdown Assistance
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle features and options Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
now and will be available in the future, even if First-aid kit
Additional information: General information
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8. Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with a first-aid kit.
Hazard warning system Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
Hazard warning system button
The red light in the button blinks when the

hazard warning system is turned on. Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Warning triangle Turn the screw cap in the cover by 90°, ar-
row 1, and fold down the trim panel, arrow 2.
When stowing the first-aid kit, make sure that
the label points downwards and the cord of the
zipper is pointing towards the interior.
The warning triangle is located on the inside of

the tailgate.
362
Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY
BMW Roadside Assistance Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnostics enables detailed vehi-
cle data to be transmitted via cellular networks,
Principle
which is necessary for vehicle diagnosis. This
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con- data is transmitted automatically. It may be
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a necessary to approve this on the control dis-
breakdown. play.
General information Teleservice Help

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- Depending on the country, Teleservice Help
hicle's condition is transmitted to the BMW enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
Roadside Assistance. BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans-
There are various ways of contacting BMW mission.
Roadside Assistance. You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
▷ Via a Check Control message. it through BMW Roadside Assistance.
Supplementary text messages, refer to 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
page 159.
2. Set the parking brake.
▷ Via a call with a mobile phone.
3. Turn on control display.
▷ Via the BMW app.
4. Consent to Teleservice Help.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment BMW Accident Assistance
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services.
Principle
▷ Cellular network reception.
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-
▷ Standby state is switched on. tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
an accident.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
manually General information
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-
support is first offered through Teleservice Di- ately severe accident, which did not deploy any
agnosis and, where applicable, then through airbags, a Check Control message is displayed
Teleservice Help. in the instrument cluster. In addition, a text
message appears on the Control Display.
1. "MENU"
When BMW Accident Assistance is triggered,
2. "All apps"
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. Select the desired service.
A voice connection to the selected service is
established.
363
Functional requirements Emergency Call

▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
Intelligent emergency call
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception. Principle
▷ Standby state is switched on. In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the system
Starting BMW Accident Assistance or manually.
If an accident is detected automatically General information

A text message relating to BMW Accident As- Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
sistance appears on the control display. tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
The connection can be established directly: with an Assist system.
"Contact accident assistance" Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Check Control message for BMW Accident The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
Assistance can also be called up from the connection with the BMW Response Center.
stored Check Control messages for a certain For technical reasons, the emergency call can-
length of time. not be guaranteed under unfavorable condi-
Additional information: tions.
Check Control, refer to page 159.
Overview
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con-
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. If necessary, select the entry for BMW Acci- SOS button
dent Assistance.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established. Functional requirements
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
the vehicle has been activated.
364
Automatic triggering Malfunction

Under certain conditions, for example if the The function of the emergency call may be im-
airbags are deployed, an emergency call is au- paired.
tomatically triggered immediately after an acci- The LED near the SOS button flashes for ap-
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic Col- proximately 30 seconds. A Check Control mes-
lision Notification is not affected by pressing sage is displayed.
the SOS button.
Have it checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
Manual triggering
shop.
1. Tap the cover flap.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the
LED in the area of the button illuminates What to do after an accident
green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an General information
emergency call has been initiated. After an accident, comply with the following
If a cancel prompt appears on the control safety precautions with regard to the high-volt-
display, the emergency call can be aborted. age system:
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle ▷ Engage the selector lever position P, apply
until the voice connection has been estab- the parking brake and turn off the drive
lished. readiness and standby.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection ▷ Secure the crash site.
to the BMW Response Center has been es- ▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
tablished.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
The BMW Response Center then makes firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
contact with the occupants of the vehicle equipped with a high-voltage system.
and initiates further steps to help.
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
Even if you are unable to respond, the high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a
BMW Response Center can take further safe distance from the vehicle.
steps to help you under certain circumstan-
ces.
Safety information
For this purpose, data that serves to deter-
mine the necessary rescue measures, for
instance the current position of the vehicle DANGER
when it can be determined, is transmitted Contact with live components can lead to
to the BMW Response Center. an electric shock. There is a risk of injury
Even if the BMW Response Center is no or danger to life. After an accident, do not
longer heard through the loudspeakers, the touch any high-voltage components such as
BMW Response Center may still be able to orange colored high-voltage cables or parts
hear the occupants of the vehicle. that are in contact with exposed high-voltage
cables.
The BMW Response Center ends the emer-
gency call.
365
Transporting the vehicle

Warning
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corro- General information
sive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch Do not transport the vehicle by towing it.
fluids escaping from the high-voltage battery.
Safety information
Jump-starting NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
General information the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of damage to property, among other
Have only an authorized service center or an-
potential damage. The vehicle should only be
other qualified service center or repair shop
transported on a loading platform.
perform the jump-start.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lift-
DANGER
ing and securing it.
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
other potential damage.
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Towing
Pushing the vehicle
General information To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
hazardous area, push it for a short distance at
Depending on vehicle equipment, deactivate
a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
the air suspension level adjustment.
Two-axle ride level control, refer to page 268.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 134.
Safety information
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Front Collision Warning en-
a risk of accident. Switch off Front Collision
366
Tow truck
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor-
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc-
cur. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Correctly at-
tach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
The vehicle should only be transported on a
side on both vehicles.
loading platform.
If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow
bar at an inclination, note the following:
Towing other vehicles
▷ Free movement is limited when cornering.
General information ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an inclination.
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations.
Tow rope
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden-
Observe the following notes when using the
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
tow rope:
a warning triangle in the rear window.
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
Safety information the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
fastening.
Warning
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow rope in regular intervals.
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
not be possible to control handling. There is 30 mph/50 km/h.
a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier 3 miles/5 km.
than the vehicle to be towed. ▷ When driving off to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Warning
Different levels of braking may occur when
towing with adaptive recuperation. There is a
risk of accident. Deactivate adaptive recuper-
ation before towing.
367
Tow fitting Safety information
General information NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow
fitting. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Follow the
notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car-

ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
Observe the following notes when using the
tow fitting:
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
push it out.
vehicle.
▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clock-
wise and screw it in as far as it will go. If
necessary, tighten with a suitable object.
▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter-
clockwise.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 359.
368
Vehicle Care MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
NOTICE
This chapter describes model-specific equip- When washing with an open charging socket
ment, systems and functions that are available cover, the charging socket can be damaged.
now and will be available in the future, even if There is a risk of damage to property, among
they are not available in the owned vehicle. other potential damage. Close the charging
Additional information: socket cover before washing. Clean dirt be-
hind the charging socket cover with a cloth.
Steam cleaner and high pressure

Washing the vehicle cleaner
General information Safety information
Regularly remove foreign bodies such as
leaves or snow in the area below the wind-
NOTICE
shield.
When cleaning with high pressure cleaners,
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
components can be damaged due to the
winter. Intense contamination and road salt
pressure or temperatures being too high.
can damage the vehicle.
Additional information: other potential damage. Maintain sufficient
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to distance and do not spray too long continu-
page 147. ously. Follow the operating instructions for
the high pressure cleaners.
Safety information
Distances and temperature
Warning ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
Contact with live components can lead to an ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
electric shock. High voltage is present at the seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
charging connection. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that work on the charging connection,
for instance cleaning, be performed by an au-
369
MOBILITY Vehicle Care
Automatic car washes or car Additional information:

washes Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 134.
Safety information
Driving out of a car wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
NOTICE
Turn on drive-ready state.
Improper use of automatic car washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a Additional information:
risk of damage to property, among other po- Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.
tential damage. Follow the following instruc-
tions: Lights
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use
those that use soft brushes in order to abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning
avoid paint damage. agents containing alcohol.
▷ Do not drive through a car wash with Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off
avoid damage to the body. with water.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
avoid damage to tires and rims. scraper.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage
to the exterior mirrors. Fresh air intake for automatic
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, climate control
rain sensor to avoid damage to the win-
dow wiper system. Safety information
Driving into a car wash NOTICE

After opening the hood, foreign bodies or
NOTICE liquids may enter the automatic climate con-
trol via the fresh air intake under the hood.
other potential damage. Follow the following
instructions:
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., ▷ Make sure that no foreign bodies or liq-
in a car wash. uids enter the fresh air intake, e.g., when
washing the engine or cleaning the area
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll under the windshield.
freely. ▷ Do not direct the steam jet or high-pres-
Some car washes do not permit persons in the sure cleaner at the fresh air intake.
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the ▷ Regularly check the fresh air intake and
outside when in selector lever position N. A remove foreign bodies.
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
370
Overview products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol-

low the instructions on the packaging.
Vehicle paintwork
General information
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving
safety and value retention. Environmental in-
fluences in areas with elevated air pollution
or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen, can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor
After washing the vehicle the frequency and extent of your vehicle care
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes to these influences.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect
Corrosive substances such as grease or bird
can be reduced. The heat generated during
droppings must be removed immediately to
braking dries brake disks and brake pads and
prevent the finish from being altered or discol-
protects them against corrosion.
ored.
Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows to minimize loss of visibility due to Matte paintwork
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
wiper blade wear.
for vehicles with matte paintwork.
Vehicle care Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Vehicle care products
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
General information chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy
abrasion and premature degradation of the
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
leather surface.
cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle
care products are available from an authorized To guard against discoloration, such as from
service center or another qualified service cen- clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
ter or repair shop. roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be-
Safety information cause contamination on such surfaces is sub-
stantially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
Warning
grease will gradually break down the protective
Cleaning agents can contain substances that coating of the leather surface.
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
Remove aggressive substances, e.g.,
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the
sunscreen, immediately to prevent alterations
interior, open the doors or windows. Only use
or discolorations of the leather.
371
Synthetic leather care Textile care

Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp Use a microfiber cloth for cleaning minor con-
microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner. tamination.
Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will Dampen the cloth with water.
rub into pores and folds, causing significant If fabrics containing cashmere are soiled, use
abrasion and premature degradation of the only a damp, soft sponge with a suitable inte-
surface. rior cleaner.
In case of major soiling, use a moist soft
sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior Caring for special components
cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances, Displays, operating elements, and
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis- protective glass of the Head-up
colorations of the synthetic leather. display
Fabric care
NOTICE
General information Surfaces can be damaged by improper

cleaning, e.g., by using chemical cleaners, or
In case of major contaminations, such as bev-
from moisture or liquid of any kind. Physical
erage stains, use a moist soft sponge or micro-
damage to the material is possible.
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaners.
▷ Avoid pressure that is too high and do
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
not use any scratching materials.
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
colorations of the fabric. ▷ Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber
cloth for cleaning displays.
Safety information ▷ Clean the operating elements and, de-
pending on vehicle equipment, the pro-
tective glass of the Head-up display with
NOTICE a damp microfiber cloth and standard
Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of household dish soap.
clothing can damage the seat covers and
other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There
is a risk of damage to property, among other
Light-alloy wheels
potential damage. Ensure that any Velcro® When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim
fasteners are closed. cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not
use abrasive cleaning agents or steam clean-
ers above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac-
Upholstery material care turer's instructions.
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid can destroy the protective coating of adjacent
rubbing the material vigorously. components, such as the brake disk.
If upholstery material containing cashmere is After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry
soiled, use only a damp, soft sponge with a them. The heat generated during braking dries
suitable interior cleaner. brake disks and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
372
Chrome surfaces Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in Do not soak the headliner.
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of
water and added auto shampoo as needed. Seat belts
Rubber components
Warning
Environmental influences can cause surface
Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the
contamination of rubber parts and a loss of
seat belt fabric. Missing protective effect of
gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning
the seat belts. There is a risk of injury or dan-
agents for cleaning.
ger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber cleaning the seat belts.
care products at regular intervals. When clean-
ing rubber seals, do not use any silicon-con- Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
taining vehicle care products in order to avoid thus have a negative impact on safety.
damage or noises.
Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Wiper blades
Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if
The wiper blades are cleaned by using the
they are dry.
washer system.
Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as Pillow for head restraints in the rear
this may reduce wiper performance.
The cover must be washed by hand.
Fine wood parts Inner cushion cannot be washed.
Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood
components solely with a moist rag. Then dry
Carpets and floor mats
with a soft cloth.
Warning
Kenaf Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using a pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
suitable care product. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
Plastic components not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
NOTICE
use loose floor mats and do not layer several
Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or sol- floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
vents, such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic mats are securely fastened again after they
parts. There is a risk of damage to property, were removed, for instance for cleaning.
among other potential damage. Clean with a
microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with The floor mats can be removed from the inte-
water, if needed. rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very contaminated,
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a
373
textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the car-

pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction
only.
Sensors and camera lenses
General information
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Front camera and rear-view camera

If soiling is detected, cleaning of front camera
and rear-view camera is offered on the Control
Display or can be switched on manually.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Parking"
4. "More"
5. "Camera cleaning"
374
375
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the specific measuring process. Detailed values
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. can be found in the approval documents, on
Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this, signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from
for instance due to the optional equipment an authorized service center or another quali-
chosen, national-market version, or country- fied service center or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g.,
model version, equipment version or country- due to tires and vehicle load.
specific measurement procedure.
BMW i7
Width with mirrors in/mm 86.3/2,192
Width without mirrors in/mm 76.8/1,950
Height in/mm 60.8/1,544
Length in/mm 212.2/5,391
Wheelbase in/mm 126.6/3,215
Smallest turning radius diam.
without Integral Active Steering ft/m 43.0/13.1
with Integral Active Steering ft/m 40.4/12.3
376
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
i7 xDrive60
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 7,165/3,250
Payload lbs/kg 1,005/456
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 3,417/1,550
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,990/1,810
377
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General information License Texts and Certifications
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve- Canada

hicle are listed here.
Telematics Communication Box
Model: WAVE-01-HIGH-R1
Updates made after the Contains IC: 2703H-TM05NNNABM0
editorial deadline This equipment complies with IC radiation ex-
posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
The following chapters were updated in the ronment.
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
This equipment should be installed and oper-
the editorial deadline for the Integrated Own-
ated with minimum distance 24 cm between
er's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
the radiator & your body.
▷ Operation: sensors of the vehicle: radar
NOTE: THE MANUFACTURER IS NOT RE-
sensors: safety instructions.
SPONSIBLE FOR ANY RADIO OR TV IN-
▷ Operation: opening and closing: automatic TERFERENCE CAUSED BY UNAUTHORIZED
doors. MODIFICATIONS TO THIS EQUIPMENT.
▷ Operation: seats, mirrors and steering SUCH MODIFICATIONS COULD VOID THE
wheel: front and rear seats: lumbar support. USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.
▷ Operation: seats, mirrors and steering
wheel: front seats and rear seats: seat Avis d’Industrie Canada sur l’exposition aux
massage. rayonnements
▷ Operation: safety: Emergency Stop As- Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d’expo-
sistant: Activating/deactivating Emergency sition aux rayonnements d’Industrie Canada
Stop Assistant. pour un environment non contrôlé.
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Auto- Il doit être installé de façon à garder une dis-
matic Lane Change Assistant: general. tance minimale de 20 centimétres entre la
source de rayonnements et votre corps.
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: As-
sisted Driving Plus. REMARQUE: LE FABRICANT N'EST PAS RE-
SPONSABLE DES INTERFÉRENCES RADIO-
▷ Operation: climate control: automatic pro-
ÉLECTRIQUES CAUSÉES PAR DES MODIFI-
gram: general.
CATIONS NON AUTORISÉES APPORTÉES À
▷ Operation: storage compartments: glove CET APPAREIL. DE TELLES MODIFICATIONS
compartment: opening the glove compart- POURRAIT ANNULER L'AUTORISATION AC-
ment. CORDÉE À L’UTILISATEUR DE FAIRE FONC-
▷ Mobility: charging the vehicle: charging TIONNER L'APPAREIL.
process: battery thermal management. Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
378
Appendix REFERENCE
2. This device must accept any interference, in- Interface and frequency range: Wifi @ 5GHz
cluding interference that may cause undesired Type: ¼ wave coax
operation of the device.
Max Gain: -2.8 dBi
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
This device complies with the FCC/ ISED RF
tions suivantes:
exposure limits and has been evaluated in
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage. compliance with portable exposure condition.
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radi- The exposure standard for wireless mobile
oélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est sus- phones/portable devices employs a unit of
ceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement. measurement known as the Specific Absorp-
tion Rate, or SAR. This device has been shown
USA/Canada to be capable of compliance for localized SAR
for uncontrolled environment/general popula-
HeadUnit (Garmin) tion exposure limits specified in ANSI/IEEE
Model: MGU22 Std. C95.1-1992 and has been tested in ac-
cordance with the measurement procedures
FCC ID: IPH-03910 specified in ISED RSS-102 and IEEE Std. 1528-
IC: 1792A-03910 2013. The standards include a substantial
Changes or modifications not expressly ap- safety margin designed to assure the safety of
proved by the party responsible for compliance all persons, regardless of age and health. The
could void the user’s authority to operate the standard incorporates a substantial margin of
equipment. safety to give additional protection for the pub-
lic and to account for any variations. To comply
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
with the measured SAR value/SAR testing ex-
Rules and contains licence-exempt transmit-
clusion, the equipment must be installed and
ter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation,
operated with a minimum distance of 51 mm of
Science and Economic Development Canada's
the human body.
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: FCC Class B device notice Note: This equip-
ment has been tested and found to comply
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pur-
ence.
suant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
2. This device must accept any interference re- are designed to provide reasonable protection
ceived, including interference that may cause against harmful interference in a residential in-
undesired operation. stallation. This equipment generates, uses and
This radio transmitter has been approved by can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
the FCC/ISED to operate with the antenna installed and used in accordance with the in-
types listed below with the maximum permissi- structions, may cause harmful interference to
ble gain indicated. Antenna types not included radio communications. However, there is no
in this list, having a gain greater than the max- guarantee that interference will not occur in a
imum gain indicated for that type, are strictly particular installation. If this equipment does
prohibited for use with this device. cause harmful interference to radio or televi-
Interface and frequency range: Bluetooth & sion reception, which can be determined by
Wifi @ 2.4GHz turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by
Type: ¼ wave coax
one or more of the following measures:
Max Gain: -2.5 dBi
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
379
REFERENCE Appendix
- Increase the separation between the equip- ne doit pas être colocalisé ni fonctionner con-
ment and receiver. jointement avec à autre antenne ou autre ém-
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a etteur.
circuit different from that to which the receiver Ce produit doit être installé de façon à garantir
is connected. une distance minimale de séparation de 20 cm
- Consult the dealer or an experienced ou plus de tout corps humain.
radio/TV technician for help. CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
HeadUnit (Harman) Canadian ICES-003.
Model: MGU22H Cet appareil numérique de classe B est con-
FCC ID: T8GMGU22H forme à la norme canadienne ICES-003.
IC: 6434A-MGU22H FCC Class B digital device notice
Modification statement: This equipment has been tested and found
The party responsible for the compliance has to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
not approved any changes or modifications to device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
this device by the user. Any changes or modifi- These limits are designed to provide reasona-
cations could void the user’s authority to oper- ble protection against harmful interference in
ate the equipment. a residential installation. This equipment gen-
erates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
Le responsable de l’homologation de ce pro-
energy and, if not installed and used in accord-
duit n’approuve aucune modification apportée
ance with the instructions, may cause harm-
à l’appareil par l’utilisateur, quelle qu’en soit la
ful interference to radio communications. How-
nature. Tout changement ou modification peu-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference
vent annuler le droit d’utilisation de l’appareil
will not occur in a particular installation. If this
par l’utilisateur.
equipment does cause harmful interference to
Wireless notice: radio or television reception, which can be de-
This device complies with FCC/ISED radiation termined by turning the equipment off and on,
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled the user is encouraged to try to correct the
environment and meets the FCC radio fre- interference by one or more of the following
quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 measures:
of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
rules. This transmitter must not be co-located
- Increase the separation between the equip-
or operating in conjunction with any other an-
ment and receiver.
tenna or transmitter.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
This device will be installed into specific car-
circuit different from that to which the receiver
lines with an antenna configuration that as
is connected.
worst case will be at a minor distance of 8.68
cm from the end user. - Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
Le présent appareil est conforme à l'exposition
aux radiations FCC / ISED définies pour un en- Interference statement
vironnement non contrôlé et répond aux direc- This device contains licence-exempt transmit-
tives d'exposition de la fréquence de la FCC ra- ter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation,
diofréquence (RF) et RSS-102 de la fréquence Science and Economic Development Canada’s
radio (RF) ISED règles d'exposition. L'émetteur
380
Appendix REFERENCE
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Cet appareil contient un ou plusieurs émet-
teurs/récepteurs exempts de licence qui sont
conformes au(x) RSS exempts de licence d'In-
novation, Science et Développement économi-
que de Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
381
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Advance climate control, see Stationary cli-
mate control 281
3D view 247 Airbags 180
Airbags, indicator and warning light 182
A Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 276
Air conditioning, climate 275
ABS, see Antilock Braking System 214 Air distribution, manual 277
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 137 Air drying, see air conditioning 275
Acceleration sensor, see G-meter 166 Air flow, automatic climate control 276
Accelerator pedal positions 135 Air outlets, see Ventilation 280
Accessories and parts 9 Air pressure, tires 324
AC charging station, see Charging vehicle 312 Air quality 281
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 211 Air suspension, see Two-axle ride level con-
Accident, what to do 365 trol 268
Accumulator, charging, see Vehicle, charg- Air vent, see Ventilation 280
ing 312 Alarm signal, high-voltage battery 16
Acoustic pedestrian protection 131 Alarm system 97
AC quick charging cable, see Mode 3 charging Alarm, unintentional 98
cable 314 All-season tires, see Winter tires 331
Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 281 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 216
Activation points, panorama view 249 Ambient light 178
Activation word 54 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 355
Active Blind Spot Detection 199 Antilock Braking System 214
Active comfort chassis, see Executive Drive Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 348
Pro 269 Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Active Cruise Control, distance control, see tertainment, Communication 6
Speed control systems 220 Aquaplaning 303
Active Guard, see Collision warning sys- Armrest heating 278
tems 184 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedestrian
Active Park Distance Control 253 protection 131
Active Protection 211 Assistance with breakdown 362
Active roll stabilization 270 Assisted Driving, lane guidance, see Speed
Active Steering, integral 217 control systems 220
Adaptive brake assistant 214 Assisted Driving Plus, see Cruise Control sys-
Adaptive Light Control 174 tems 220
Adaptive lighting functions 174 Assisted View 165
Adaptive recuperation 307 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Adjusting speed to route 239 tertainment and Communication 6
Adjustments, steering wheel 120 AUTO H button, see Automatic Hold 143
Automatic camera perspective 246
382
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic climate control 271 B Brake, see Gear position B 133

Automatic control, headlight 171 Being towed, see Towing 366
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 119 Belts, see Seat belts 112
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger Blind spot collision warning 199
airbags 182 Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 103
Automatic deactivation, high-voltage system 17 Blower 276
Automatic Differential Brake 217 Blu-ray, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Automatic dimming, see Automatic High Beam Entertainment, Communication 6
Assistant 175 BMW Accident Assistance 363
Automatic doors 82 BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Automatic headlight control 171 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Automatic High Beam Assistant 175 BMW Curved Display 48
Automatic Hold 143 BMW Digital Key 90
Automatic Lane Change Assistant 233 BMW Drive Recorder 208
Automatic locking 96 BMW eDrive 129
Automatic Parking Assistant 255 BMW Gesture Control 58
Automatic Parking Assistant Professional 255 BMW ID 68
Automatic Parking Assistant, see Memory BMW iDrive 45
Parking 261 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 53
Automatic program, automatic climate con- BMW Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Dis-
trol 273 play 48
Automatic time setting 166 BMW Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW
Automatic unlocking 95 Curved Display 48
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal BMW maintenance system 357
Assistant 57 BMW Natural Interaction, see BMW Gesture
AUTO program, automatic climate control 273 Control 58
Average consumption, see Trip data 164 BMW Operating System, see BMW iDrive 45
Axle loads, approved 377 BMW Roadside Assistance 363
BMW Touch Command 57
B Boost, see Sport Boost function 138
Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 296
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 108 Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 296
Backrest, seats 106 Bracket, flag 305
Backrest tilt 107 Brake assistant 214
Backrest width 108 Brake assistant, adaptive 214
Back-up Assistant 265 Brake disks, breaking in 302
Back-up Assistant Professional 265 Brake disks, see Brake system 302
Bandages, see First-aid kit 362 Brake pads, breaking in 302
Bar for tow-starting/towing 367 Brake pads, see Brake system 302
Base position, rear seats 111 Brake, see Gear position B 133
Battery, charge state indicator 167 Brake system 302
Battery, charging see Vehicle, charging 312 Braking, information 303
Battery, disposing of 361 Breakdown assistance 362
Battery high-voltage system, long stationary Breaking in 302
periods 323 Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 212
Battery, vehicle 360 Brightness, Control Display 49
383
Button AUTO H, see Automatic Hold 143 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Button, central locking system 93 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Buttons on the steering wheel 32 Center armrest, front 295
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency Center armrest, rear 295
call 364 Center console 34
Button, Start/Stop 131 Central display area, instrument cluster 163
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 366 Central Information Display (CID), see Control
Display 49
C Central locking switch, see Central locking sys-
tem 93
Cable for tow-starting/towing 367 Central locking system 93
Calendar day, see Date 166 Central screen, see BMW Curved Display 48
Calibration of the front seats 109 Central screen, see Control Display 49
California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9
Call, gesture control 59 Change, wheels and tires 330
Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Atten- Changing parts 359
tion Camera 213 Changing wheels 346
Camera lenses, care 374 CHARGE, energy recovery 130
Camera perspective, automatic 246 Charge state indicator, high-voltage bat-
Camera perspective, semi-automatic 246 tery 167
Camera, rearview camera 246 Charging cable, Flexible Fast Charger 315
Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 36 Charging cable, high-voltage battery 314
Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 296 Charging cable, storing, see Storage 315
Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 296 Charging cradle 288
Captain’s Chair, see Executive Lounge Seat- Charging process display, see Charging
ing 110 screen 163
Care 369 Charging process, see Charging screen 163
Care, displays, screens 372 Charging screen 163
Care, Head-up display 372 Charging, see Vehicle, charging 312
Care, light-alloy wheels 372 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging
Care, vehicle 371 tray 288
Cargo 298 Charging status, indicator light on the charging
Cargo area 298 socket outlet 318
Cargo area, enlarging 300 Charging status indicator, see Charging
Cargo area, securing, see Valet parking screen 163
mode 94 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless
Cargo, stowing and securing 299 charging tray 288
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Charging, vehicle 312
area 299 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
Car key, see Vehicle key 74 number 13
Carpet, care 373 Check Control 159
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 123 Children, seating position 123
Car wash 369 Children, transporting safely 123
Car wash, automatic 369 Child restraint seats 123
Car wash view 248 Child restraint systems, mounting 124
CBS, see Condition Based Service 357
384
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil- ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
dren safely 123 gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Child safety latch 128 Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle 61
Child safety locks 128 Connection, electrical devices, see Sock-
Child seat installation 124 ets 286
Child seat, mounting 124 Consumption, see Trip data 164
Child seat mountings LATCH 125 Contactless operation of the trunk lid 87
Child seats, see Transporting children Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
safely 123 Entertainment, Communication 6
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 373 Contact with water, high-voltage system 16
Chrome surfaces, care 373 Continued driving with a flat tire, see Tire Pres-
Cleaning, displays, screens 372 sure Monitor 337
Cleaning, Head-up display 372 Continued driving with flat tire, see Flat tire
Clearance, water 303 monitor 344
Climate comfort laminated safety glass 303 Control Display 49
Climate comfort windshield 303 Control Display, brightness 49
Climate control 271 Control display, pop-ups 47
Climate, fresh air intake 370 Control systems, driving stability 214
Closing with the Key Card 89 Coolant 355
Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital Cooling, maximum 276
Key 90 Cooling system 355
Clothes hooks 297 Cornering light 175
Coasting 307 Corrosion, brake disks 304
Coasting with idling engine 307 Cosmetic mirror 286
Coat hooks 297 Cross traffic warning 206
Collision warning systems 184 Cruise Control, Cruise Control, see Speed con-
Combination switch, see Turn signals 144 trol systems 220
Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys- Cruise Control, see Speed control systems 220
tem 145 Cup holder, front 296
Comfort Access 81 Cup holder, rear 296
Comfort entry 112 Current driving condition 168
Comfort exit 112 Curved Display 48
Communication, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Cushions for rear head restraints, care 373
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for
Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 350 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Comparison of entries, see Entry compari- Customer Support 6
son 47
Compartments in the doors 295 D
Compressor 333
Concierge Service, see Owner's Manual for Damage, tires 329
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dashboard 32
Condensation water under the parked vehi- Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 149
cle 304 Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 208
Condensation, windshield 277 Data memory 11
Condition Based Service 357 Data protection, settings 67
Confirmation signal from the vehicle 96 Data, see Personal data, deleting 67
385
Data, technical 376 Distance warning, see Park Distance Con-

Date 166 trol 251
Daytime driving lights 174 Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 173
Daytime running lights 174 Door opening angle 249
DC charging cable 314 Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con-
Deceleration and recuperative braking 135 trol 214
Defrost function 277 Drive-off monitoring 254
Defrost, windshield 277 Drive-off support 216
Deleting, personal data 67 Drive power reduced 160
Departure schedule, see Stationary climate Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 213
control 281 Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis-
Departure time, pre-conditioning 282 tance systems 241
Destination input 6 Driver assistance systems 218
Diagnostic connection 358 Driver Attention Camera 213
Diagnostic socket 358 Drive readiness, see Operating condition of the
Digital Key 90 vehicle 41
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 90 Drive-ready state in detail 132
Dimensions 376 Drive-ready state, turning off 132
Dimmable exterior mirrors 119 Drive-ready state, turning on 132
Dimmable interior mirror 119 Drive Recorder 208
Direct dial buttons, see Shortcuts 48 Driver profiles 68
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 144 Driver profiles, welcome screen 68
Display and operating concept, see BMW Driving 129
iDrive 45 Driving Assistant, see Collision warning sys-
Display charge state, high-voltage battery 167 tems 184
Display, charging status, indicator light on the Driving comfort 268
charging socket outlet 318 Driving condition, display 168
Display, current driving condition 168 Driving Dynamics Control, see My Modes 139
Display, iDrive 47 Driving dynamics, setting 215
Displaying information on parking assistance, Driving in detail 135
see Assisted View 165 Driving notes, breaking in 302
Display in the windshield, see Head-up dis- Driving notes, general 302
play 151 Driving off, see Drive-off support 216
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 177 Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 132
Display panel, see Instrument cluster 149 Driving stability control systems 214
Displays 149 Driving, Start/Stop button 131
Displays and icons 7 Driving through water 303
Displays for the vehicle, see Live Vehicle 150 Driving tips, see General driving notes 302
Display, speed limiting function, see Speed DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 214
Limit Info 218 DTC, see Setting for increased driving dynam-
Disposal, vehicle battery 361 ics 215
Distance control, see Speed control sys- Dynamic Drive 270
tems 220 Dynamic Stability Control 214
Distance to vehicle driving ahead, distance Dynamic Traction Control, see Setting for in-
control, see Speed control systems 220 creased driving dynamics 215
386
E Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
eDRIVE, electric drive, see BMW eDRIVE 129 Entertainment, selection list in the instrument
Efficiency Coach, Efficient mode 309 cluster 160
Efficient4x4, see xDrive 216 Entry assistance, exit assistance 112
Efficient drive mode 308 Entry comparison 47
Efficient driving mode, see My Modes 139 Equipment, interior 284
Efficient Mode 308 Error indicators, see Check Control 159
Efficient Mode, see My Modes 139 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see Dynamic
Efficient rolling, see Current driving condi- Stability Control 214
tion 168 Evasion Assistant, see Forward Collision Miti-
Electric drive, see BMW eDRIVE 129 gation 185
Electric drive, see Driving in detail 135 Exchange, wheels and tires 330
Electric motor sound 270 Executive Drive Pro 269
Electric range 162 Executive Lounge Seating 110
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Dynamic Exit warning 194
Stability Control 214 Exterior lighting, locked vehicle 173
E-mail, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Exterior mirror 118
Entertainment, Communication 6 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 119
Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis- Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 119
tant 205 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 118
Emergency braking, see PostCrash – External start, see Jump-starting 366
iBrake 211 Eyelet for towing 368
Emergency call 364 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 299
Emergency release, glove compartment 294
Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis- F
tance 363
Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis- Factory settings, see Vehicle data, resetting 67
tance 363 Failure message, see Check Control 159
Emergency stop assistant 205 Fan, see Air flow 276
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 134 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 112
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 89 Fatigue Alert 212
Emergency wheel 350 Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Camera 213
Energy recovery, CHARGE 130 Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 212
Engine compartment, see Under the hood 352 Fault indicators, see Check Control 159
Engine coolant 355 Filter, see Interior filter 281
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 307 Fine wood, care 373
Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedestrian Fine wood parts, care 373
protection 131 First-aid kit 362
Engine start, see Jump-starting 366 Flag bracket 305
Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for Flat tire, changing wheels 346
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Flat tire, continued driving, see Flat tire moni-
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's tor 344
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Flat tire, continued driving, see Tire Pressure
Communication 6 Monitor 337
Flat tire message, see Flat tire monitor 344
387
Flat tire message, see Tire Pressure Moni- G-meter 166

tor 340 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
Flat tire monitor 344 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Flat tire, repairing 332 Gross vehicle weight, approved 377
Flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 344 Guest profile, see BMW ID 68
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 337
Flat tire warning light, see Flat tire monitor 344 H
Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 340 Handbrake, see Parking brake 141
Flexible Fast Charger 315 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 285
Flooding, driving through 303 Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for
Floor carpet, care 373 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Floor mats, care 373 Hands-free system 6
Fold-away position, wiper 147 Hazard warning system 362
Fold-out position 147 Head airbag 180
Foot brake 303 Headlight control, automatic 171
Forward Collision Mitigation 185 Headlight flasher 144
Forward Collision Warning, see Forward Colli- Headlight glass 360
sion Warning 185 Headlights, care 370
For Your Own Safety 9 Headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Fresh air intake, climate 370 bulbs 359
Front airbags 180 Headlights, turning up, dimming, see Auto-
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and matic High Beam Assistant 175
bulbs 359 Headliner 35
Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting Head restraint cushions, care 373
down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 119 Head restraint pillow 117
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva- Head restraints and seats 106
tion 182 Head restraints, front 115
Front-seat passenger airbag, indicator Head restraints, rear 116
light 183 Head-up display 151
Front seats 106 Head-up display, care 372
Fuses 361 Head-up display, position, saving see Memory
function 120
G Heated steering wheel 120
Heavy cargo, stowing 299
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Height, vehicle 376
Remote Control 284 High beams 144
Gear position B 133 High-voltage battery, alarm signal 16
Gear position, see Selector lever positions 132 High-voltage battery, charge state indica-
General driving notes 302 tor 167
Gesture Control 58 High-voltage battery, heated 135
Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 58 High-voltage battery, heavily discharged 135
Glare shield, see Sun visor 286 High-voltage battery, long stationary peri-
Glass sunroof 103 ods 323
Glopal Positioning System, navigation 6 High-voltage battery, service life 323
Glove compartment 294
388
High-voltage system, automatic deactiva- Information on Driver Assistance, displaying,

tion 17 see Assisted View 165
High-voltage system, contact with water 16 Initialization, see flat tire monitor 344
High-voltage system, safety 16 Input, iDrive 47
High-voltage system, work 16 Installation of child restraint systems 124
Highway Assistant, Assisted Driving Plus, see Instrument cluster 149
Cruise Control systems 220 Instrument lighting 177
Hills 304 Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 149
Holder for beverages, front 296 Integral Active Steering 217
Holder for beverages, rear 296 Integrated key 75
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 6
Control 284 Integrated Universal Remote Control 284
Homepage, see Internet 7 Intelligent emergency call 364
Hood 352 Intelligent Personal Assistant 53
Horn 32 Intended use 9
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 94 Interior camera 290
Hour, see Time 166 Interior equipment 284
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Interior filter 281
glass 360 Interior lights 177
Interior lights, locked vehicle 173
I Interior mirror 119
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 119
iBrake – PostCrash 211 Interior motion sensor 98
Ice, see Outside temperature 163 Internet page 7
Ice warning, see Outside temperature 163 Intersection Collision Warning, see Forward
Iconic sounds, see Electric motor sound 270 Collision Mitigation 185
Icons and displays 7 Interval indicator, see Service notifications 169
Identification marks, tires 327
Identification number, see Vehicle identification J
number 13
iDrive 45 Jacking points 349
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 74 Jacking points for the vehicle jack 349
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 74 Jam protection system, windows 100
Inclination 107 Jump-starting 366
Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 183
Indicator light on the charging socket outlet, K
see Display, charging status, indicator light
on the charging socket outlet 318 Kenaf, care 373
Indicator lights 152 Key Card 89
Individual air distribution 277 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 81
Individual settings, see BMW ID 68 Key, mechanical 75
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless Key, see Vehicle key 74
charging tray 288 Knee airbag 181
Influencing the range, see Range predic-
tion 167
Information 6
389
L Load 299
Loading 298
Labeling 327 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing
Label on recommended tires 331 cargo 299
Lane boundary 196 Local time, see Time 166
Lane change assistant 233 Lock control elements, rear automatic climate
Lane control assistant with active side collision control 273
mitigation 202 Locking, automatic 96
Lane control assistant with active side collision Locking, see Opening and Closing 74
protection, see Side collision mitigation 202 Locking, settings 95
Lane departure warning 196 Lock, lug bolts 348
Lane guidance, Assisted Driving, see Speed Long stationary periods, high-voltage bat-
control systems 220 tery 323
Lane threshold, warning 196 Loop 368
Language, setting 55 Low beams, operation 172
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 299 Lower back support, see Lumbar support 108
LATCH child seat mountings 125 Lug bolt lock 348
Launch Control 137 Luggage straps 299
Leather care 371 Lumbar massage, see Rear seat massage 112
LED headlights, changing, see Lights and Lumbar massage, see Seat massage 109
bulbs 359 Lumbar support 108
Length, vehicle 376
Letters and numbers, entering 47 M
Level 1 charging cable, see Mode 2 charging
cable 314 Maintenance 357
Level 1 charging, see Charging vehicle 312 Maintenance recommendation, see Condition
Level 2 charging cable, see Mode 3 charging Based Service 357
cable 314 Maintenance, see Service requirements 169
Level 3 charging cable, see DC charging ca- Maintenance system, BMW 357
ble 314 Make-up mirror 286
Light-alloy wheels, care 372 Malfunction, vehicle key 77
Light carpet, see Welcome Light Carpet 173 Manual brake, see Parking brake 141
Light control, adaptive 174 Manual control, air distribution 277
Lighting 171 Manual control, air flow 276
Lighting, speakers 179 Manually unlocking doors, see Integrated
Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind key 75
Spot Detection 199 Map update, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
warning 206 Matte paintwork 371
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 359 Matt paint, care 371
Lights 171 Maximum cooling 276
Lights and bulbs 359 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
Lights, care 370 Info 218
Light switch 171 Maximum speed, winter tires 331
List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 160 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 362
Live Vehicle 150 Memory function 120
390
Memory Parking 261 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,

Messages, see Check Control 159 care 372
Meters, see Instrument cluster 149 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 367
Microfilter, see Interior filter 281
Minimum tread depth, tires 329 O
Mirror position, saving, see Memory func-
tion 120 OBD, see On-board diagnosis 358
Mobile devices, connecting 61 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 244
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Odometer, see Trip data 164
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 OFF display, instrument cluster, see Standby
Mobile radio in the vehicle 303 and Drive readiness 161
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis- Old battery 361
tance 363 On-board computer, see Trip data 164
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis- On-board diagnosis 358
tance 363 Onboard vehicle tool kit 359
Mobility System, see Tire repair set 332 On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis-
Mode 2 charging cable 314 tance 363
Mode 2 charging, see Vehicle, charging 312 On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
Mode 3 charging cable 314 tance 363
Mode 4 charging cable, see DC charging ca- Opening and closing 74
ble 314 Opening with the Key Card 89
MODE button, see Speed control systems 220 Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digi-
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own tal Key 90
Safety 9 Operating condition of the vehicle 41
Moisture 360 Operating menus, see BMW iDrive 45
Monitoring of the high-voltage battery 16 Operating principle, see BMW iDrive 45
Monitor, see Control Display 49 Operation via voice 53
Mounting of child restraint systems 124 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Outside temperature 163
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-
Multifunction hook 299 age 323
Multi-function steering wheel 32 Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW In-
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 telligent Personal Assistant 55
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 P
My Modes 139
Paint, vehicle care 371
N Paintwork 371
Panel heating 278
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Panel heating distribution 278
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 97
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints, Panic mode 97
front 115 Panorama View 248
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints, Panorama View, see Panorama View 248
rear 116 Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sun-
roof 103
391
Park Distance Control 251 PostCrash – iBrake 211

Parked car ventilation, see Stationary climate Power Display, instrument cluster 160
control 281 Power failure 361
Parking aid lines, rearview camera 244 Power interruption 361
Parking assistance, see Park Distance Con- Power Meter, see Power Display 160
trol 251 Power windows 99
Parking assistance systems 241 Pre-conditioning 281
Parking assistant 255 Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Moni-
Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance tor 337
systems 241 Pressure, tires 324
Parking Assistant Professional, see Parking Pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 344
assistance systems 241 Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Moni-
Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance sys- tor 337
tems 241 Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear-end
Parking brake 141 collision preparation 204
Parking brake function, Active Park Distance Protective function, windows, see Jam protec-
Control 253 tion system 100
Parking lights 172
Parking view, gesture control 59 Q
Parking with Automatic Hold 143
Parts and accessories 9 Quick charging cable, see Mode 3 charging ca-
Pathway lighting 174 ble 314
Pathway lighting, turning on 174
Pathway lines, rearview camera 244 R
Payload 299
Payload, technical data 377 Racing track 305
PDC, see Park Distance Control 251 Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 36
Pedestrian protection, acoustic 131 Radiator fluid 355
Pedestrian Warning, see Forward Collision Mit- Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
igation 185 tertainment and Communication 6
Pennant 305 Rain sensor 146
Performance Control 270 Range 162
Performance display, see Sport displays 169 Range, increasing 306
Personal Assistant 53 Range prediction 167
Personal data, deleting 67 READY display, instrument cluster, see
Personal driving mode, see My Modes 139 Standby and Drive readiness 161
Personal Mode, see My Modes 139 Rear automatic climate control 271
Personal profile, see BMW ID 68 Rear automatic climate control, lock control el-
Personal settings 67 ements 273
Physical units, see Units of measurement, set- Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer-
ting 168 ing 217
Pillow for head restraints in the rear 117 Rear-end collision preparation 204
Plastic, care 373 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and
Plastic parts, care 373 bulbs 359
Pop-ups, control display 47 Rear seat backrests, folding down 300
Possible gestures, gesture control 59 Rear seat massage 112
392
Rear seats 109 Rolling to a stop with engine decoupled, see

Rearview camera 246 Coasting 307
Rear-view mirror, exterior 118 Roll stabilization, see Active roll stabiliza-
Rearview mirror, interior 119 tion 270
Rear window defroster 278 Roofliner 35
Recirculated-air mode 276 Rope for tow-starting/towing 367
Recirculating air filter, see Interior filter 281 Route and Intersection Assistant, see Adjust-
Recommended tire brands 331 ing speed to route 239
Recuperation, adaptive 307 Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for
Recuperative braking and deceleration 135 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Recuperative braking, see Energy recovery 130 RTTI, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Reduced drive power 160 tertainment, Communication 6
Remaining range, see Range 162 Rubber components, care 373
Remote 3D View 250
Remote control 264 S
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Safe braking 303
tion 6 Safe Exit, see Exit warning 194
Remote Control Parking, see Remote con- Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 90
trol 264 Safety and warning, see Collision warning sys-
Remote control, see Vehicle key 74 tems 184
Remote control, universal 284 Safety locks, doors, and windows 128
Remote services, app, see Owner's Manual for Safety of the high-voltage system 16
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Safety package, see Active Protection 211
Remote Software Upgrade 63 Safety switch, windows 103
Renewal, wheels and tires 330 Safety systems, see Airbags 180
Replace battery, vehicle key 75 Safety systems, see Collision warning sys-
Replacement, wheels and tires 330 tems 184
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 359 Screen, see BMW Curved Display 48
Replacing light diodes, see Lights and Screen, see Control Display 49
bulbs 359 Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 332
Replacing parts 359 Seamless mode change, see Remote con-
Reporting safety malfunctions 14 trol 264
Reserve warning, see Range 162 Search for charging stations, see Owner's
Reservoir, washer fluid 355 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor 339 munication 6
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 339 Seat and armrest heating 278
Reset, vehicle settings 67 Seat and panel heating 278
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 90 Seat belt reminder 114
Retreaded tires 331 Seat belts 112
Reversing Assistant 265 Seat belts, care 373
Risk of collision when exiting 194 Seat calibration 109
Risk of collision when getting out 194 Seat cooling 279
Roadside parking lights 173 Seat cooling distribution 279
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 101 Seat heating 278
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 285 Seat heating distribution 278
393
Seating position for children 123 Sitting safely 106

Seat massage 109 Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the
Seat position, saving, see Memory function 120 vehicle 41
Seats and head restraints 106 Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 163
Seats, front 106 Slippery road, see Outside temperature 163
Seats, rear 109 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 376
Securing, cargo 299 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Selection list on the instrument cluster 160 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Selector lever position 132 Smartphone, using via voice control 56
Selector lever position B, see Gear position SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's
B 133 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Self-leveling suspension, see Two-axle ride munication 6
level control 268 Snapshot camera, see Interior camera 290
Semi-automatic camera perspective 246 Sockets, electrical devices 286
Sensors, care 374 Soft-close automatic, doors 94
Sensors of the vehicle 36 Soft-close automatic function 94
Service and warranty 10 Software Update, see Remote Software Up-
Service Center, see BMW Accident Assis- grade 63
tance 363 Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up-
Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis- grade 63
tance 363 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 364
Service life of high-voltage battery 323 Sound 6
Service notifications 169 Sound of drivetrain 270
Service notifications, see Condition Based Sound output, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
Service 357 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 350
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Speaker lighting 179
Communication 6 Speech recognition 53
SET button, see Speed control systems 220 Speed control systems 220
Set clock 166 Speed Limit Assist 237
Set day, see Date 166 Speed Limit Assistant 237
Set time, see Time 166 Speed Limit Device, speed limiter, see Speed
Setting, Control Display 49 control systems 220
Setting driving dynamics, see My Modes 139 Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 218
Settings, locking/unlocking 95 Speed limiter, manual, see Speed control sys-
Settings, resetting, vehicle 67 tems 220
Settings, seats and head restraints 106 Speed Limit Info 218
Shortcuts, iDrive 48 Speed warning 218
Side airbag 180 Sport Boost function 138
Side collision mitigation 202 Sport displays 169
Side protection, Park Distance Control side, Sport driving mode, see My Modes 139
see side protection 246 Sport Mode, see My Modes 139
Side view 247 SPORT PLUS setting, see Setting for in-
Signaling, horn 32 creased driving dynamics 215
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig- Stability control systems 214
nals from the vehicle 96 Standard charging cable 314
394
Standard charging, see Vehicle, charging 312 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi- Telephone, selection list in the instrument
cle 41 cluster 160
Start/Stop button 131 Teleservices, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Starting the engine with the Key Card 89 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Stationary climate control 281 Temperature, automatic climate control 274
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Manual for Temperature display, see outside tempera-
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 ture 163
Status control display, tires 339 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 97
Status information, iDrive 46 Thigh support 108
Status of Owner's Manual 8 Through-loading system 300
Status, vehicle 168 Tilt alarm sensor 98
Steering column adjustment 120 Tilt, backrest 107
Steering, see Integral Active Steering 217 Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior
Steering wheel, adjusting 120 mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 119
Steering wheel, buttons 32 Time 166
Steering wheel heating 120 Time of day, see Time 166
Steering wheel position, saving, see Memory Time setting, automatic 166
function 120 Time zone 166
Storage, charging cable 315 Tire brands, recommended 331
Storage compartment, cargo area 300 Tire chains 336
Storage compartments 294 Tire change 330
Storage, tires 332 Tire damage 329
Storing the vehicle 323 Tire identification marks 327
Stowing, cargo 299 Tire inflation pressure 324
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Tire marking 327
area 299 Tire pressure 324
Summer tires, tread 328 Tire Pressure Monitor 337
Sun visor 286 Tire pressure monitoring, see Flat tire moni-
Supplementary Owner's Handbooks 7 tor 344
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 7 Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 339
Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat- Tire Pressure Monitor, resetting 339
ing 278 Tire pressure, tires 324
Switches, see Dashboard 32 Tire pressure warning, see Flat tire moni-
SYNC program, automatic climate control 277 tor 344
System language, setting, see Language, set- Tire repair set 332
ting 55 Tires and wheels 324
Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 332
T Tire settings 338
Tire tread 328
Tail light, changing, see Lights and bulbs 359 Title, gesture control 59
Taking the vehicle out of service 323 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9 tertainment and Communication 6
Technical data 376 Tools 359
Torque display, see Sport displays 169
395
Touch Command 57 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 63

Touchpad, Controller 51 Upholstery material care 372
Tow bar 367 Upper backrest, front 108
Tow fitting 368 Upper retaining strap, top tether 127
Towing 366 USB port, position in vehicle 287
Tow rope 367 Used battery, disposing of 361
Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability Use, intended 9
Control 214
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Manual for Navi- V
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 134 Valet parking mode 94
Transporting children safely 123 Vanity mirror 286
Travel & Comfort System 288 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer-
Tread, tires 328 ing 217
Trip data 164 Vehicle battery 360
Triple turn signal activation 144 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-
Trip odometer, see Trip data 164 tance 362
Trunk, emergency unlocking 89 Vehicle, breaking in 302
Trunk lid, contactless operation 87 Vehicle care 371
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 89 Vehicle care products 371
Trunk, see Cargo area 298 Vehicle, charging 312
Turning circle lines, rearview camera 244 Vehicle data, resetting 67
Turning circle, vehicle 376 Vehicle equipment 8
Turning off, drive-ready state 132 Vehicle identification number 13
Turning on, drive-ready state 132 Vehicle issues 362
Turn signal, indicator light 156 Vehicle key 74
Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and Vehicle key, additional 74
bulbs 359 Vehicle key, integrated key 75
Turn signals, high beams, headlight Vehicle key, loss 75
flasher 144 Vehicle key, malfunction 77
Turn Warning, see Forward Collision Mitiga- Vehicle key, replace battery 75
tion 185 Vehicle paint, care 371
Two-axle ride level control 268 Vehicle paintwork 371
Vehicle status 168
U Vehicle storage 323
Ventilation 280
Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi- Venting, see Stationary climate control 281
cle 36 Venting, see Ventilation 280
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 98 Version Software, see Remote Software Up-
Units of measurement, setting 168 grade 63
Units, see Units of measurement, setting 168 Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 208
Universal remote control 284 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Unlocking, automatic 95 tertainment and Communication 6
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 74 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
Unlocking, settings 95 Vision Access, see Automatic doors 82
Updates made after the editorial deadline 8 Voice activation system 53
396
Voice command response 53 Wheels and tires, exchange 330

Voice control 53 Widgets, iDrive 46
Voice control, gesture control 59 Widgets, instrument cluster, see Central dis-
Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal play area 163
Assistant 53 Width, vehicle 376
Voice control system 53 Window, defrosting 277
Volume, gesture control 59 Windows, powered 99
Windshield, climate comfort 303
W Windshield, defrosting 277
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 355
Wake word 54 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 145
Warning against cross traffic 206 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
Warning function for oncoming traffic, see For- age 323
ward Collision Mitigation 185 Winter tires 331
Warning function, rear-end collision 204 Winter tires, tread 328
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active Wiper blades, changing 359
Blind Spot Detection 199 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 355
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross Wiper, fold-away position 147
traffic warning 206 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 145
Warning lights 152 Wiper system 145
Warning messages, see Check Control 159 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Warning systems for collision hazard 184 charging tray 288
Warning triangle 362 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 288
Warning when exiting 194 Wood, care 373
Warning when opening the doors, see Exit Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 47
warning 194 Work, high-voltage system 16
Warranty 9 Workshop, see Service requirements 169
Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 359
Washer fluid 355
Washer system 145 X
Washing the vehicle 369
Washing, vehicle 369 xDrive 216
Water, high-voltage system 16
Water on roads 303
Water, see Condensation water under the
parked vehicle 304
Web page 7
Website, see Internet 7
Weights 377
Welcome Light Carpet, see Welcome light 173
Welcome lights 173
Welcome screen, driver profiles 68
Wheelbase 376
Wheel base, vehicle 376
Wheel change 346
Wheels and tires 324
397
*BL5A5EAB0005*
01405A5EAB0 ue

California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.
The BMW Driver's Guide app explains the equipment of your

vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:
All information surrounding navigation,

entertainment and communication
Photorealistic animations for various

vehicle functions
Keyword search
360° view: Explore your vehicle

interactively inside and out
Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon

and optical character recognition on the
buttons in the vehicle
Available in more than 30 languages
Can be used offline after download

*BL5A5EAB0005*
01405A5EAB0 ue

2023 BMW I7 17

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 BMW I7 17

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 BMW I7 17

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A5EAB0 - VI/22 OwnersManuals2.com

After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade

© 2022 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Validity of the Owner's Manual Printed Owner's Manual

Context help app can be displayed on smartphones and

"..." Texts in vehicle used to select

information ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the

Service center ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice

BMW Driver’s Guide app 2. Second action step.

The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all stand-

▷ First possibility. is currently available in the vehicle and if or

Under the hood Windshield

The vehicle identification number can be found Reporting safety defects

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

For Canadian customers

Safety of the high-voltage system

Monitoring of the high-

Safety information Safety information

Actions in the event of a message

During and shortly after charging

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

Buttons for the central locking

Access to vehicle interior

Unlocking with the vehicle key Locking the vehicle

Depending on the settings, either only the driv-

Unlocking the vehicle Closing the cargo area

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

1 Light switch element

Driver's door BMW iDrive

Buttons on the Controller

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant

Canceling voice control

▷ Press the button on the steering

Set-up and use

wheel Select left mirror, Automatic Curb

Adjusting the steering wheel

1 Backrest tilt/head restraint

Press the switch to adjust the forward/back

Turning the thumbwheel: ad-

Display in the instrument cluster

Turning off drive-ready state

In selector lever position B, the vehicle will de-

Press the button.

Releasing the parking brake

Lights and lighting Window wiper system

Buttons in the vehicle Turning on window wiper system

Exterior lighting menu.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off. Press the lever up until the desired position is

Left roadside parking light.

Activating/deactivating rain sensor Climate control

Functions via climate control menu

Enable: press lever up once from the 0 posi-

Disable: press lever back into the 0 position.

Air recirculation mode.

Automatic recirculated-air con-

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Fresh air.

Cleaning the windshield